JP6694401B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in a start winning area, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the player is given a game value. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state to be given.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a random number related to the execution of the game can be stored up to a predetermined number based on the fact that the game ball wins the start opening provided in the game area (the start condition is satisfied). Then, the variation display game corresponding to the random number is executed, and when the result of the variation display game is a special result, the special variation winning device is opened to enter the special game state. Further, it is also possible to execute a pre-reading effect that performs a preliminary determination process of determining the result information of the variable display game corresponding to the random number before the variable display game is executed, and notifies the player of the result of the preliminary determination process. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-180269, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there are cases where it is not possible to prevent illegal acts such as aiming at random numbers.
An object of the present invention is to prevent fraud effectively.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A special game that executes a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area and gives a player a game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the gaming machine that generates the state,
Starting storage means capable of storing the execution right of the variable display game as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area,
Only when the starting memory is to be stored based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning area, a plurality of types of random numbers are extracted and stored in the arithmetic register, and the random number stored in the arithmetic register is stored. Random number storage control means for storing in a random number storage area of the storage means,
A prior determination means for performing a prior determination process of determining the random number extracted by the random number storage control means before the variable display game corresponding to the random number is executed,
The plurality of types of random numbers include jackpot random numbers for determining whether or not to derive the special result, and jackpot symbol random numbers for determining the type of identification information when deriving the special result, And
The big hit random number and the big hit symbol random number are hardware random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit,
The random number storage control means, after extracting the jackpot random number, extracts the jackpot symbol random number,
A conditional branch instruction is configured to be executed between the extraction of the jackpot random number and the extraction of the jackpot symbol random number, and the predetermined condition of the conditional branch instruction is satisfied and the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the total number of instructions to be executed is different between when the big hit random number is extracted and when when the big hit random number is not extracted .

  According to the present invention, fraud can be effectively prevented.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the number of discharged balls display part. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a payout rate display part. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an accessory ratio display part. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of switch reading processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 1. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a table which shows the priority of winning a prize mouth monitoring. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the modification of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a prize number counter update processing. It is a figure explaining a discharge sphere number field, an acquisition sphere number field, and an acquired sphere number area classified by character. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout performance monitoring process. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special process starting port switch common process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during opening of the special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of production command setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a universal figure game process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in the universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric power operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric remaining ball process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of board electric wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of external information edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of external information edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening signal edit process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a layout of the display screen of a display apparatus. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (payout number command) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a back view of the game machine which concerns on a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the payout performance monitoring process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the single command system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the count information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the design command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production point control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the first half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a latter half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus in the ending at the time of the jackpot state ending. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the player setting mode waiting for a customer. It is a front view of a game board provided with a sub display device according to a third embodiment. It is a figure explaining the discharge | emission ball number area | region which concerns on 4th Embodiment, an acquisition ball number area | region, and a role object acquisition ball number area | region. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a payout command (payout number command) concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of single command system command processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the high probability (time saving) termination processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit system command processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a first half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series. In 4th Embodiment, it is the latter half of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series. It is a front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pay-out performance monitoring processing concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the over-prize notification processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a table showing an example of a notice mode of the 1st over-winning notification and the 2nd over-winning notification according to a 6th embodiment. It is a table which shows the other example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the 1st over-winning notification and the 2nd over-winning notification which concerns on 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus in the hall setting mode which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special symbol variable display game according to the seventh embodiment. In 7th Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special symbol variable display game by the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. In modification 1 of 7th Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special symbol variable display game by the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in the modified example 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen which applied the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment to the case of the jackpot without re-lottery, and the case of the jackpot with re-lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of CPU of the game microcomputer which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the flag register concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of power-on processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the game control device program start preparation processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of random number update processing 2 concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hard random number acquisition processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judging processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the main processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the timer interruption process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the starting opening switch monitoring processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of hard random number acquisition processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the procedure which detects the rising information which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure 1 reservation storage area which concerns on each embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 reservation storage area which concerns on each embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of special figure reservation information judgment processing concerning a 10th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of special figure reservation information judgment processing concerning a modification of a 10th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the variation start information setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of gate switch monitoring processing concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of segment LED edit processing concerning a 13th embodiment. It is a program list which shows the conventional program structure of LED edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display data corresponding to the universal figure reservation number which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of external information edit processing concerning a 13th embodiment. It is a program list of the random number update process 2 which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a program list explaining a part of special figure game processing concerning a 14th embodiment. It is a program list explaining a part of special figure game sequence branch table which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a program list of the modification 1 of the special figure game processing which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a program list of the modification 2 of the special figure game processing which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a conventional second half variation group table for explaining the compression method according to the sixteenth embodiment. It is a latter half variation group table concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the compression system which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the read-out format of the data which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a program list of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a program list of the conventional 2-byte distribution process for explaining the compression system of the 17th embodiment. It is a program list of 2 byte distribution processing which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a latter half variation group table concerning an 18th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the compression system of 18th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the read-out format of the data of 18th Embodiment. It is a program list of 2 byte distribution processing which concerns on 18th Embodiment. It is another example of the latter half variation group table according to the eighteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the random number storage area which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common processing which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of providing the work area for a prior determination separately from a random number storage area. It is a figure for explaining an example of a shift of a random number storage area performed at the time of a change start. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of providing a fluctuation | variation holding area in a random number storage area. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of providing a fluctuation | variation holding work area separately from a random number storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing concerning the modification of a 19th embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows the one part program structure of the starting opening switch monitoring process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

  The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable via a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

  Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the center and the left side of the upper portion of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided which extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (toward the player). The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect and the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the production pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also during operation of the production operation device by the player.

  The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability changing state), big hit state (special game state ), Is a small hit game state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left striking (normal striking) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and right striking that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit with a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 (display means) as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage where the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. Section 40b is provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage 40b is moved to the starting winning port 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37. It is easy to win the prize.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 (general winning area) is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also placed in the lower right playing area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. In the present embodiment, there are two winning port switches 35a of the left general winning port 35 and the winning port switch 35b of the right general winning port 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a starting condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general variable display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is opened to change to the open state (the winning easy state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 shortens the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or increases the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to be higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state and the normal gaming state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. In the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs in an overlapping manner.

  In the game area 32 in the lower right of the normal variation winning device 37, an attacker type in which the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to open the special winning opening A special variation winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a big prize. By facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  As described above, in the game area 32, the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) are provided as a plurality of winning areas in which game balls can be won without any particular condition. In addition, as a variable winning device that is activated when a predetermined condition (a predetermined result of the special figure variation display game or the predetermined figure variation display game) is established, and a game ball can be won, a normal variation winning device 37 (second A start winning opening) and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) are provided.

  When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening), the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the winning opening. The number of prize balls according to the type of is discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. In this embodiment, the prizes of the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening), the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening), the general winning opening 35, and the special variation winning device 39 (large winning opening). The number of balls is 2, 3, 10, and 14, respectively, and increases in this order.

  Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided. An out ball detection switch 65 (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the out opening 30b and is discharged to the outside of the game area 32.

  Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed on the lower right corner of the game board body 30a outside the game area 32. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), variation display section 53 (general figure display, lamps D10, D18) for the general figure variation display game, and the number of starting (holding) memories for each variation display game And a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56). The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

  Further, the collective display device 50 is provided with a first game state display section 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for informing that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal). D8), a second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs and notifies that the time-saving state has occurred, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display section, lamp D17) that indicates that the state has been displayed, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) is displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display section, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), cyclically turned on (one of the LEDs is turned on and off in a predetermined order at a predetermined time interval), or plural It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of the LEDs. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the universal figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, on the collective display device 50, the number of discharged balls display section 66 for displaying the number of discharged balls of the gaming machine 10, the payout rate display section 67 for displaying the payout rate of the gaming machine 10, and the accessory ratio of the gaming machine 10. An accessory ratio display section 68 for displaying is provided. Each of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is composed of a plurality of (even one) 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps) and the like. The display unit constitutes a display unit that displays the number of discharged balls, the rate of balls output, and the ratio of character products.

  In addition, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are not limited to those that directly display the number of ball discharged, the ball output ratio, and the character ratio, respectively. It may be one that indirectly displays the number of balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio (for example, a countdown display of the number of discharged balls described later). That is, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 may display information on the discharge ball number, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. In addition, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 may display the number of ball discharged, the ball output ratio, and the character ratio by numerical values on a 7-segment display. Instead, it may be displayed with a level meter or the like.

  Here, the number of discharge balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32, and is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning port and the number of game balls that have passed through the out port 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls discharged from the ball discharge device to the game area 32. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and The special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) is included. As will be described later, a counting means for counting the number of discharged balls (the number of shot balls) is provided. Then, the discharged ball number display unit 66 (discharged ball number display means) displays the discharged ball number, so that the player can grasp the number of the game balls shot in the game area 32 and the convenience is improved.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls. Since the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning, the payout rate according to this definition can be obtained even if the actual prize balls are not paid out due to lack of balls. The payout rate may be simply calculated from the acquired number of balls during the time when the number of discharged balls becomes 100, as in the present embodiment, from the number of discharged balls between 0 and 100, It may be accurately calculated from the above definition by using the number of acquired balls (total of the number of prize balls) and the number of discharged balls accumulated from the power-on of the gaming machine to the present. It should be noted that, in the past, the payout rate has not been displayed, but in the present embodiment, the payout rate display unit 67 (the payout rate display means) displays the payout rate, so that the player can play it. The general winning a prize opening 35 can be made to have an interest. And, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the ratio of the accessory is the jackpot state (that is, fanfare, ending) among all the prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize hole from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by each character) obtained by winning the big prize hole (so-called continuous character ratio). In addition, the ratio of the prizes is the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole, out of the total number of prize balls (the total number of the prize balls). Ratio), or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the special winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (generally used so-called accessory ratio) (Percentage of all goods)) Since the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning the prize, the prize ratio can be calculated even if the prize balls are not actually paid out due to the balls being out. In the present embodiment, since the character ratio display unit 68 (character ratio display means) displays the character ratio, the interest of the game is improved and the player can easily win the variable winning device (an open state). Has the impression that many occur), which is the motivation for the player to continue playing the game. In addition, the accessory ratio display is an index for the player to determine whether to continue playing the game. Further, since the winning of the general winning opening 35 influences the winning ratio, the player can be made interested in the winning opening 35 through the displaying of the winning ratio.

  With reference to FIG. 2B, a display mode of the discharged ball number display portion 66 will be described. The discharged ball number display unit 66 is composed of two 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portions) indicators (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2B (I), the number of discharged balls is displayed in a countdown display on the discharged number-of-balls display unit 66, and (100−number of discharged balls) is displayed. Further, the number of discharged balls is counted up to 100 (predetermined number). As will be described later, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (a predetermined number), the payout rate displayed in the payout rate display section 67 is from 1 to 100 until the number of discharged balls changes. It is updated to the latest payout rate during the period. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total of the number of prize balls) is displayed as it is on the payout rate display portion 67, the payout rate is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown display from "99" to "00" in the discharged ball number display unit 66, but it may be configured to count up from "00" to "99". When the number of discharged balls reaches 100, “00” is displayed in the discharged ball number display portion 66. In the present embodiment, the output rate display of the output rate display section 67 is updated to the latest one at the timing when "00" is displayed on the discharged ball number display section 66. In addition, after the power is turned on (including power failure recovery), the discharged ball number display unit 66 starts the countdown display from the display of “00”. Further, the number of discharged balls is cleared to 0 at the end of the big hit, and the discharged ball number display portion 66 starts the countdown display from the display of "00" after the end of the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (II), in a state other than the shooting of the game ball or a customer waiting demonstration state, the discharge ball number display unit 66 is in a non-display state because the segment (light emitting unit) of the display is turned off. Good. In addition, the states other than the launch of the game ball and the customer waiting demonstration state are collectively referred to as "customer waiting state". The state other than the shooting of the game ball is a state in which the touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is an off signal. Further, when the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits the customer waiting demo command to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4), the gaming machine 10 is in the customer waiting demo state (state during the customer waiting demo). On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or the game ball is being launched, the segment (light emitting part) of the display is turned on and the countdown display is displayed in the discharge ball number display portion 66 so that the player in the game can recognize it. Run. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (III), the discharge ball number display unit 66 executes an error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, the error or illegality that affects the game is an error or illegality related to opening the glass frame or the front frame (a glass frame opening error or a front frame opening error described later), and an error regarding a ball out or overflow (full). (Shoot ball out error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game balls can be put into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the discharge ball number display unit 66 is not updated, but the game control device 100 inside the game machine counts the discharge balls. ..

  The display mode of the payout rate display unit 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 2C. The payout rate display section 67 is composed of two 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot portions) indicators (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2C (I), in the payout rate display portion 67, the payout rate is displayed only from 0 to 99, and when the payout rate becomes 100 or more, “99” is displayed by blinking or lighting. FF ”is displayed.

  As described above, the payout rate display of the payout rate display unit 67 is performed every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number) until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. It is updated to the latest payout rate. Every time the payout rate display is updated, the payout rate display unit 67 changes the emission color of the segment (light emitting unit) to clearly indicate that the payout rate display has been updated. In this case, the player can easily recognize the update of the payout rate. For example, the payout rate display unit 67 changes from red to green or from green to red every time the payout rate display is updated. The payout rate display unit 67 may be configured to always display the payout rate in a single color without changing the color.

  Further, the payout rate display section 67 may change the color of the payout rate display according to the payout rate, using the design value (for example, the base value 40 in the normal gaming state) as a reference. Thereby, it is possible to give a warning by notifying the deviation of the payout rate from the design value. For example, the payout rate is displayed in green in the range of 30 to 50, yellow in the range of 10 to 29 and 51 to 60, and red in the range of 0 to 9 and 61 or more. In addition, during the big hit, the ball output rate becomes very large, and thus it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) instead of red. In the configuration that displays the payout rate in a single color without changing the color, when the payout rate greatly deviates from the design value (equal to or more than a predetermined value or less than a predetermined value), the payout rate display blinks. You can do it.

  Further, the payout rate display portion 67 displays "00" after the power is turned on (including power failure recovery). Further, the payout rate is cleared to 0 at the timing when the big hit ends, and the payout rate display portion 67 displays "00".

  As shown in FIG. 2C (II), in a state other than during the game ball is being launched or in a customer waiting demo state (that is, a customer waiting state), the payout rate display section 67 is in a non-display state in which a segment of the display is turned off. You can become. On the other hand, in a state where the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or a game ball is being launched, the segment of the indicator on the payout rate display portion 67 is turned on and the payout rate is displayed so that the player in the game can recognize it. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased. Further, since the payout rate cannot be obtained until the number of discharged balls reaches 100 after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the payout rate display unit 67 may be in a non-display state.

  On the contrary, in the state other than the game ball is being launched or in the customer waiting demonstration state, the payout rate display section 67 displays the payout rate, and the game is shown in a state where the customer waiting demo is not being performed or the game ball is being launched. It may be configured to hide the ball rate. Thereby, the player can select a gaming machine or a gaming table to play in consideration of the payout rate.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (III), the payout rate display unit 67 executes an error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, the error or illegality that affects the game is an error or illegality related to opening the glass frame or the front frame (a glass frame opening error or a front frame opening error described later), and an error regarding a ball out or overflow (full). (Shoot ball out error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game ball can be inserted into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the payout rate display unit 67 is not updated, but the payout rate is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. is doing.

  The display mode of the accessory ratio display unit 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 2D. The accessory ratio display unit 68 is composed of three 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot portions) indicators (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2D (I), the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the value of the accessory ratio (%) from “00.0” to the first decimal place of “99.9”. When the accessory ratio is 100%, "100" is displayed. In addition, for example, when the character ratio display unit 68 is composed of four 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps), the value of the character ratio (%) up to the second decimal place is displayed.

  Further, the character ratio display unit 68 displays the character ratio in accordance with the character ratio based on a standard value defined by the rule (for example, a continuous character ratio of 60% which is a prize ball by continuous character operation). You may change the color. As a result, it is possible to give a warning by notifying the deviation of the accessory ratio from the reference value. For example, when the character ratio is equivalent to the continuous character ratio, the character ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 55.0% and yellow in the range of 55.1% to 60.0%. And in red within the range of 60.1% to 100%. In addition, during the big hit, the ratio of the accessory becomes large, so that the character may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow). Further, for example, the character ratio is obtained by winning all the commonly used character ratios (of all the prize balls, all characters (special variable winning device 39 and normal variable winning device 37). The percentage of prize balls is 70%, and the character ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 65.0% and 65.1% to 70.0%. Is displayed in yellow, and in the range of 70.1% to 100% is displayed in red. In the configuration in which the character ratio is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the character ratio display blinks when the character ratio largely deviates from the design value (equal to or more than a predetermined value or less than). You can do it.

  The number of prize balls for each character (the number of acquired balls for each character) for calculating the character ratio of the character ratio display unit 68 is accumulated until the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and is cleared when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (including restoration of power failure), the character ratio display is displayed as "00.0". After that, in the character ratio display portion 68, the character ratio is updated every time a winning occurs. In addition, a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) of the special figure variation display game is set as one set, and the number of balls acquired by each role (also referred to as the number of acquired role balls) is set in a plurality of blocks (storage area of a predetermined byte) Although it is possible to store the number of balls in a ring buffer consisting of 1 in order, in this case, the number of winning balls classified by character is retained without being cleared even when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (II), in a state other than the shooting of a game ball or in a customer waiting demonstration state (that is, a customer waiting state), the character product ratio display portion 68 is not illuminated because the segment (light emitting portion) of the display is turned off. It may be displayed. On the other hand, in a state where the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or a game ball is being fired, the segment (light emitting portion) of the display is turned on in the character ratio display section 68, and the character ratio is displayed so that the player in the game can recognize it. indicate. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  On the contrary, in the state other than the shooting of the game ball or the customer waiting demonstration state, the character ratio display section 68 displays the character ratio, and the character is not in the customer waiting demonstration or the state of the game ball being discharged. The physical ratio may be hidden. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a gaming table to play in consideration of the role ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (III), the accessory ratio display unit 68 executes an error display (“EEE” display) to notify the player during an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, the error or illegality that affects the game is an error or illegality related to opening the glass frame or the front frame (a glass frame opening error or a front frame opening error described later), and an error regarding a ball out or overflow (full). (Shoot ball out error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game ball can be put into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the character ratio display portion 68 is not updated, but the character ratio is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the game machine. is doing.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39 is won, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

  The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

  In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit / miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination matches the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

  The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state and a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. By flickering the LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

  When the random number value of the universal figure extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is the hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

  The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable prize device 37 has the special map 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored within a predetermined upper limit.

  At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The memory number of the special figure start winning prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning of the normal variable prize device 37 or the second starting memory.

  In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol). In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest.

  When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this period, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

  When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure changing display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-described specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

  Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

  Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variable display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the count switch. (39a) is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130. And so on.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for informing the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

  Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before reaching A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when the special result mode is achieved, some of the plurality of display results have already been derived and displayed. The display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. Refers to the non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal effect (N reach) and a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) are provided as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

  The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit to generate random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns for special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games for various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a controls the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 are connected and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a low level of 7V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. To be done.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraudulent detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, an out ball detection switch 65 for detecting a game ball entering the out port 30b. Detection signal, a frame electric wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input section 120, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, a front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 and the like, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A signal, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 are taken in and played via the data bus 140. A first input port 122 is provided for supplying to the microcomputer 111 for use. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full).

  Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass product for sale) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is, is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving a signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

  In addition, the opening / closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c which is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37 and the solenoid (big winning opening solenoid) 39b which opens the special variation winning device 39 are output to the output unit 130. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

  In addition, the output unit 130 has third output ports 135-1 and 135- for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50. 2. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of a digit line connected to the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the universal solenoid 37c or the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , Second drivers 138b-1, 138b-2, which output on / off drive signals of the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output ports 135-1 and 135-2, and the fourth output A third driver 138c that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the port 136, and an external information signal that is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided. The second driver 138b-2 outputs an ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line for the discharge ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 in the collective display device 50. Then, the second driver 138b-1 outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for the segment lines for the other display units (displays) of the collective display device 50.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photo coupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit / receive data to / from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying a video image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  In the main control microcomputer 311, a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that is retained even when power is not supplied during a power failure FeRAM 323 capable, RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I / F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, and DC5V serving as a power supply voltage of the command I / F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. Is configured to.

  Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34 to extract the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in, and it is judged whether or not the general figure variation display game is hit.

  Then, on the public figure display, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the general figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the result mode of the off-screen on the general-picture display.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game has missed.

  In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 with the special winning opening solenoid 39b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. ..

  Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved is defined as one round (R), and the control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times or 4 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening / closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the time-saving state is duplicated and the ordinary electric power support is executed.

  For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the execution time of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game (general figure variation time) is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, (10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure variation display game to be the second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (eg 1604 msec). Is.

  Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure changing display game (general figure probability) to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set so as not to be opened in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). Moreover, you may make it select either the 1st opening aspect or the 2nd opening aspect when it becomes a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can be independently generated, both of them can be simultaneously generated, or only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as “A ***”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device normally starts is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

  Further, the power supply delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time elapses, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the elapse of the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. The determination is made (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

  Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the waiting time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port installed in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 previously read (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (result of A1016 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). As the validity determination, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (A1020). It should be noted that an area for storing information on payouts and the number of acquired balls (for example, a discharged ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an acquired ball number area for each role) may be excluded from the validity determination target. If the checksums match (result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process for normal recovery from power failure is executed.

  Further, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1026 of FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

  The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on) in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Further, the areas to be initialized include a discharged ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an accessory-based acquired ball number area, which will be initialized by clearing to 0 (initial value = 0). As a result, the number of balls discharged, the number of balls acquired, the number of balls acquired by each character, the payout rate obtained from the number of balls acquired, and the character ratio calculated from the number of balls acquired by character are all cleared to zero. become. It is also possible to configure such that the area for acquiring the number of balls for each character (and thus the character ratio) is not cleared to zero. In addition, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area for storing the game state in the RWM to determine whether the game state is the high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the game state is not the high-probability state (result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processes of step A1023 and step A1024 and shifts to the process of step A1025. When the gaming state is the high-probability state (result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (A1023), for example, the high-probability notification LED provided on the collective display device 50. On (lighting) data of (error indicator) is saved in the segment area (A1024). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1025), and in step A1031. Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1026 after executing steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  The command for restoring the power failure transmitted in the process of step A1025 and the command for initializing the RAM transmitted in the process of step A1030 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and holding of special figures 1 and 2 A decoration special figure 1 hold number command indicating a number, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a state of probability are included. In addition, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, a recovery screen command is displayed when the special figure variation display game is running when the power is turned off, and a customer wait demo command when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , A power-on command is included when initialized at power-on. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time saving information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process in step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangement (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines.

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), small number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol of ordinary figure (random symbol to hit symbol) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1033), and interruption is permitted (A1034). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and hit random number have the same cycle as the timer interrupt process which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by random so that all values in the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (A1036), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1035. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1034) before the initial value random number updating process (A1035), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait.

  In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1035 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. There is an advantage that it simplifies the main process.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the processing of step A1036. The determination is made (A1038). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1039), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the game machine stands by until the power is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), And the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the lapse of the waiting time.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation processing is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control device 100 first sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

  When the checksum calculation is not completed (result of A1107 is “N”), the game control device 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control device 100 first updates the big hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201), and updates the small hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Subsequently, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1204), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.

  Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" determines the small hit stop symbol of the special symbol It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. Also, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the ordinary figure. It is a random number that becomes the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. ..

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1305), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1306), a random number update. Processing 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the big winning opening switch 39a are monitored to see if there is a normal signal input or to monitor for errors (front surface). A winning opening switch / state monitoring process for checking whether the frame or the glass frame is opened is executed (A1308).

  Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1309), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1311).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1313).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification are configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the input process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Then, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and further bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in the RWM or another memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is ended.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and the port is saved (stored) in the port input state of the target switch control area. (A1504). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal input to the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first data ) Is loaded and the inverted data (second data) is saved (A1509). After that, in the first and second readings, a deterministic bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 1 and the different bit is 0 is created (A1510), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed to determine this time. Bit (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same state bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second reading (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and set as the previously held bit (A1513). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the currently confirmed bit and the previously held bit, and saves this as the currently confirmed state (A1514). Further, the exclusive OR of the last time and the confirmed state of this time is taken and saved as the rising edge (A1515). Then, the switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt processing and compares it with the previous read result to change the signal. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but if it does so, it may not be possible to make a correct determination if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

  The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the ports 135-1 and 135-2 (see FIG. 3) that output the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 which outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 by +1 in the range of 0 to 4, for example (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135-1 (A1608).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the touch switch signal from the touch switch (shooting touch switch) provided on the operation handle 24 is an ON signal (A1609). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 24 is operated. When the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an ON signal (result of A1609 is “Y”), the segment output data is loaded from the segment area corresponding to the digit counter (A1610), and the segment output data is sent to the segment output port 2 ( It is output to the port 135-2) (A1612). The segment output data output here is the segment output data for the discharge ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. As a result, when the operation handle 24 is operated, the number of discharged balls is displayed on the number-of-discharged-balls display unit 66, the payout rate is displayed on the payout rate display unit 67, and the role ratio display unit 68 is displayed. It becomes possible to display the character ratio.

  On the other hand, when the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an off signal (result of A1609 is “N”), the game control device 100 turns off (LED off) the 7-segment display (LED lamp). The segment output data is set (A1611), and the segment output data is output to the segment output port 2 (port 135-2) (A1612). As a result, when the operation handle 24 is not operated, the number of discharged balls is displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate is displayed on the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 is displayed. The character ratio display is hidden.

  In step A1609, instead of determining whether or not the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is ON, it may be determined whether or not the customer waiting demo is being performed (customer waiting demo state). Then, when the demo is waiting for the customer, the display is executed on the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 (A1610, A1612), and the demo is waiting for the customer. If not, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 may be hidden (A1611, A1612). As will be described later, when the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state during customer waiting demonstration) is set (A3210 in FIG. 27), that is, the game control device 100 directs. When the customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the control device 300, it can be determined that the customer waiting demo is in progress.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1613), further combines the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (A1614), and finally combines them. The data is output to the external information / launch permission signal output port 137 (A1615). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shot test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and combined to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70. The output data is output (A1621). The data of step A1621 is data of the payout rate. Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and combined to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70. The data is output (A1622), and the output process ends. The data of step A1622 is data of the character ratio.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The number-of-wins counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) of prize balls actually paid out. It is possible to monitor illegal payouts by comparing these two signals.

  Each of these prize number counter areas has a prize number counter for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (for example, 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the destination, and thus more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100 selects a winning number to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (result of A1701 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the prize number counter areas is completed (A1703).

  When all the checks are completed (result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks are not completed (result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701 and steps A1701 to A1703 are repeated.

  Further, when there is a count number (result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target prize number counter area (A1704), and the prize number counter area 2 The payout amount corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved as a new remaining number of prize balls in the remaining number of prize balls area (A1707). As the value of the remaining award ball area before the process of step A1707, a fraction which is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored.

  After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not 0 or more (result of A1709 is “N”), the process moves to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining prize ball area (A1711). Then, the process returns to step A1708.

  With the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact value generated during the big hit. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A1712), and determines whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (result of A1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy status flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal is in an on state (busy state). It is said that. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start the payout control. Either a state, a busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the payout command transmission processing. The case of not being in the busy state includes the case of being in the idle state and the case of being in an indefinite state. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to the idle state or the busy state based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to a state indicating that the payout control can be immediately started or is not possible. To resolve. That is, when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout processing is possible immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 checks whether or not the winning number counter area 1 has a count (A1715). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, the count number which is not “0” is displayed in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is.

  Then, when there is no count number (result of A1715 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the prize number counter areas are checked. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (A1717). When all the checks are completed (result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmitting process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks are not completed (result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  Further, when there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target prize number counter area (A1718), and the target prize number counter. The payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission processing is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the gaming control device 100 outputs a state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, indicating that the payout control can be started. In the case shown, it constitutes prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

  In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, and will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and will be backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without providing a function for doing so.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs due to some cause, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which causes a problem of cost increase. According to this embodiment, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

  In addition, the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, so that the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as the hall computer does not pay the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, to the winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 39) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball, and payout control means that performs payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means ( The payout control device 200) is provided, and the game control means outputs a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means immediately outputs the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Sphere command The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started without being transmitted to the payout control means for a predetermined period. I will do so.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (first start prize hole 36, second start prize hole 37, general prize hole 35, special variation prize device 39), and game control means (game control device). 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has been transmitted for each number of prize balls, and a status signal starts payout control. If it is possible and the prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates the payout. This means that whether or not the control means can start the payout control is performed before the determination as to whether or not there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and based on the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the special variation winning device 39). A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command, and a payout control device (payout control device 200) that performs payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control device. Provided, the game control means, when the state signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started, the prize ball command And a prize ball signal (main prize) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of a game ball in a predetermined prize area (game controller 100). Sphere signal) game machine The external information output means for outputting to the outside (game control device 100), and, the external information output means, the status signal output from the payout control means, whether the payout control means can start the payout control. Therefore, the prize ball signal is output regardless of.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , A special variation winning device 39) generates a prize ball command in units of one prize, and if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued to the payout control means (payout). The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to be transmitted to the control device 200) and is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning region, and the predetermined winning region. Entering a game ball into The number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the data at the same time as the award ball command is sent to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game balls to the area, and output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine each time the cumulative value reaches a predetermined number. Is capable of storing the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, updating the game balls in the predetermined prize area, and accumulating the number of prize balls by the external information output means. By performing the update corresponding to the processing, it becomes possible to store the number of prize balls that has not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1801 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A1804 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). When the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1804 is “N”), the processes of step A1807 and thereafter are executed.

  On the other hand, when the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the small hitting symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the hit random number is not in the initial value setting waiting state (result of A1807 is “N”), the processes of step A1810 and thereafter are executed.

  On the other hand, when the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the hit initial value random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1810). When the hit symbol random number is not in the initial value setting waiting state (result of A1810 is “N”), the random number updating process 1 is ended.

  On the other hand, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1811). Then, the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1812), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number updating process 2 updates both. The update target is switched and processed every time an interrupt occurs. Further, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the updating process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured.

  The game control device 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of this update processing (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter in which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the lower 1 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the additional value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as "masked value") is set to a mask update value obtained by adding "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

  Further, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as the additional value and the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0” and the value does not change by adding “0”.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “Y”), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value and the lower 1 byte of the random number value is set to the random number area to be updated. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

  The game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the new random number value, and whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

  When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A1913 is “N”), the game control device 100 places the new random number value in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A1913 is “Y”), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new random number value again (A1914), and The random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “N”), the random number updating process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the higher random number area of the 2-byte random number. Then (A1917), the random number update process 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a, of the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Winning prize switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process constitutes a monitoring means for monitoring the winning of each winning opening and executing a predetermined process when a winning is made. As the predetermined processing, the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 (addition of 1), or addition processing is executed with respect to the number of prize balls by the winning to calculate a payout rate (total number of prize balls) or a character ratio. There are things.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares the winning prize port monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning prize hole switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning prize hole (special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening and executes fraud & prize monitoring processing for detecting a normal winning (A2002). Details of the fraud & winning award monitoring process will be described later.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares the winning prize port monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the large winning prize hole switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning prize hole (special variation winning prize device 39) (A2003). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2004). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal power support state, that is, whether or not it is in the time saving state or the probability changing state (except the latent probability changing state) (A2005).

  Then, when the normal control support state is in effect (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2006). ). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2007). Subsequently, a prize-winning port monitoring table of a prize-winning port switch that does not require unauthorized monitoring is prepared (A2008). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraudulent monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the starting opening 1 switch 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2009).

  On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is not in the normal electric power support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of a winning opening switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring (A2010). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switch that does not need to be fraudulently monitored is the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). 36a. Next, the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2011). A winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 is prepared (A2012). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2013).

  FIG. 15B is a table showing the priority rankings related to winning hole monitoring for each gaming state. This priority order is realized by the order of prize-winning mouth switch / state monitoring processing (FIG. 15A) and prize-winning mouth monitoring in later-described prize number counter updating processing (FIG. 17A).

  Here, the winning opening monitoring is the fraud & winning award monitoring process or the winning number counter updating process (also executed in the fraud & winning award monitoring process), counting the number of winning prizes, updating the number of discharged balls (calculation), and the winning percentage. Is to perform the calculation of, the ratio of the accessory role, and the like. In particular, even when the winning holes are won at the same time, the payout rate and the character ratio are calculated based on the predetermined priority order as shown in FIG. 15B by prioritizing the winning of the predetermined winning holes. Done. In the normal game state and the normal electric power support state, the special winning opening is not opened unless there is a dishonesty, so it is not added to the priority table.

  As shown in FIG. 15B (I), it is possible to change the priority order related to winning a prize monitoring according to the game state (steps A2005 to A2013). That is, according to the determination (A2005) as to whether or not it is in the normal electric power support state, the winning number counter updating process (also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring process) is performed by the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port). It is possible to set (determine) which one of the prize winning opening (general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening)) which does not need to be illegally monitored first.

  In particular, when the normal electric power support state is in effect (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the winning combination switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require illicit monitoring is applied to the normal variable winning a prize device 37 (second starting winning opening). The winning opening monitoring (that is, counting the number of winnings, updating the number of discharged balls, adding the number of acquired balls, etc.) can be performed prior to the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port) having the above). As will be described later, among the winning openings having a winning opening switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring, the winning opening monitoring of the general winning opening 35 is prioritized before the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). Shall be executed. In addition, when the normal electric power support state is not in place (the result of A2005 is “N”), that is, in the normal game state, the special game state, etc., the start winning a prize having the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require unauthorized monitoring. For the mouth 36 (first starting winning opening), the winning opening monitoring can be performed prior to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  As shown in FIG. 15B (II), in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “Y”), among the starting winning openings of the winning opening switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring, the general winning opening 35 is If only the prize winning port monitoring (prize number counter updating process) is executed prior to the prize winning port monitoring (A2006, A2007) of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting prize hole), the normal variable winning device 37 (second start) The prize-winning port monitoring for the general prize-winning port 35 having a larger number of prize balls than the prize-winning port) can be performed with priority over the prize-winning port monitoring of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting prize-winning port).

  Further, in a gaming state other than the normal electric power support state (a special gaming state, a normal gaming state, etc.), the winning hole monitoring is preferentially performed in the order of the winning holes having the largest number of winning winning balls (the number of winning balls). Thereby, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially requested, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  Further, as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 15C, even if the processing of steps A2005 to A2009 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of FIG. 15A is deleted and the processing of steps A2010 to A2013 is executed after step A2004. Good. In this case, in all game states (independent of the game state), the order of the winning holes with the most award balls (the number of prize balls) to be obtained (large winning hole → general winning hole → first starting winning hole → The winning opening monitoring can be executed with priority in the order of the second starting winning opening). In this case, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially requested, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved. In the prize-winning switch / state monitoring process of FIG. 15C, the winning prizes to the respective winning prizes are monitored in descending order of the number of prize balls to be obtained, and if there is a winning prize, the winning prize ball number is added to the winning ratio. It constitutes a monitoring means for calculating the (total number of prize balls) and the ratio of character goods.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the out-ball detection switch 65 after step A2009 or A2013 (A2014). When there is an input to the out-ball detection switch 65 (result of A2014 is “Y”), the value of the number-of-discharging-balls area for storing the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 to add 1 to the number of discharging balls (A2015), A payout performance monitoring process described later is executed (A2016). Then, an out-ball detection command indicating that there has been a ball entering the out port 30b is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (A2017). After that, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals that should be monitored for the status such as whether an error has occurred or the signal to be monitored this time is updated ( A2018).

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch detect the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, and the discharge ball number is updated by +1 to count (A2015, A2210). .. However, since the number of launch balls emitted from the ball launch device is basically equal to the number of game balls discharged outside the game area 32, a switch (sensor) that directly detects the launch ball from the ball launch device. ) May be provided to count the number of discharged balls. In addition, since the ball emitted from the ball launching device returns to the ball launching device, it is more accurate to use the out-ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch as in the present embodiment. You can count.

  When there is no input to the out ball detection switch 65 (result of A2014 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the state scan counter (A2018). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. The gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (A2019). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2020). The details of the gaming machine status check processing will be described later.

  By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, the state (shoot ball out error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (payout abnormal error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2021). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2022).

  By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal (frame radio wave incorrect) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2023). When the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2023 is “N”), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2023 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2024), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The gaming machine state check process for determining the state of is executed (A2025).

  By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Note that the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2026). ), And ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Note that the processing from steps A2024 to A2026 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2024 to A2026 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize monitoring process. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2007, and A2013 in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 and the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) of the normal variable winning device 37. About the 2nd starting prize hole (normal variable prize device 37) and big prize hole (special variable prize device 39), open and close the opening and closing member by force using a piano wire or illicit equipment, and insert the game ball into the prize ball. Since it is easy for fraud to pay out, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of winning.

  The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch that is the error monitoring target (A2101), and determines whether or not it is in the fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable winning a prize device 39 is opened when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the special winning port switch 39a.

  Then, in the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and it is determined whether the number of illegal winnings after addition is the monitoring target It is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (for example, 5) (A2105).

  The reason why the number of judgments is 5 is that, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning hole, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not decided that the case is a fraud if a player wins a prize or when there is noise in the signal, and so that it is not easily decided as an error even though it is not a fraud.

  And when it is not more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). When the number is equal to or more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of illegal prizes is limited to the determined number of illegal occurrences (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target illegal prize notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target injustice occurrence command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares an injustice prize occurrence flag as an injustice flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110) and sets prize balls. The counter updating process is executed (A2111). The details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112) and determines whether or not there is permission to update the notification timer (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when the update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), the target notification timer is updated by −1 if not 0 (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the one special winning port switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the other major winning port switch 39a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice with respect to the injustice notification of the special variation winning device 39, and prevents the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. When the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). A fraudulent prize release flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

  In addition, the game control device 100, after the process of step A2119 is completed, or when the value of the notification timer is not 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize monitoring process before the last time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in step S4, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the effect command is set. The process is executed (A2122). After that, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends.

  By the above process, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fraud occurs, and the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fraud is released, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning prize counter update process]
FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The winning number counter updating process is executed in steps A2009 and A2011 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A and step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (to be exact, a change in the input) in the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216), and it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2217). The table address is updated so that the target winning opening switch changes in the order of the left winning opening switch 35a, the right winning opening switch 35b, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the winning opening of the general winning opening 35 is changed. The monitoring is preferentially executed before the start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and loads the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). In the prize number counter area, the count number is updated by +1 for each winning of the target winning opening (only 1 is added), and the number of winnings of the target winning opening (the number of winnings) is stored. Further, it is determined whether or not overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

  When the overflow has not occurred (the result of A2205 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). Next, the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning number counter area 1 (target winning port) is set (A2207). Then, the set number of prize balls is added to the value of the acquired number of balls area (A2208), and the set number of prize balls is added to the value of the target number-of-acquired balls area for each accessory (A2209). The value is updated by +1 (A2210). After that, a payout performance monitoring process (described later) for executing calculation of a payout rate and a character ratio, display control of the discharged ball number display unit 66, a ball ratio display unit 67, a character ratio display unit 68, and the like is executed. To do.

  In the processing of steps A2204 and A2209, when the change in the number of winnings to the general winning opening 35 or the starting winning openings 36 and 37 in a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the number of winnings (The value of the winning number counter area) may not be updated by +1 and the number of prize balls may not be added to the value of the winning ball count for each accessory. That is, in such a case, with respect to winnings exceeding a predetermined number, the number of prize balls and the number of winnings for calculating the character ratio may be stopped. With this configuration, for example, if the player cannot be properly awarded a prize ball due to some trouble, it is considered that the number of prizes will be extremely increased by the compensation process of the staff at the hall (game shop). Also, it becomes possible to properly calculate the character ratio. Further, it is possible to prevent fraud in which a malicious person wins a large number of game balls to the general winning opening 35 or the like in a short time because the number of winnings to the general winning opening 35 is manipulated.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch detect a game ball discharged outside the game area 32, and the game control device 100 updates the discharge ball number by +1 and counts ( (A2015, A2210), discharge ball number counting means for counting the number of discharged balls is configured. However, since the number of game balls to be emitted from the ball launch device is basically equal to the number of game balls to be discharged to the outside of the game area 32, a switch for detecting the launch ball from the ball launch device ( A sensor) may be provided, and the game control device 100 may count the number of balls to be discharged, so that the discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of discharged balls may be configured instead of the discharged ball number counting means. In addition, since there is a return to the ball launching device from the ball launching device, the number of discharged balls can be accurately counted by using the game ball with the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch.

  After the process of step A2211, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (A2212). After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2213), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2214).

  When the overflow does not occur (result of A2214 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (A2215). After the processing of step A2215 ends or when an overflow occurs (result of A2214 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2217).

  When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (result of A2217 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2217 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is completed. Through the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information (the number of winnings and the number of winnings) is stored.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17B, a discharged ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls, an acquired ball number area for storing the acquired number of balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of prize balls), An area for acquiring the number of balls for each character, which stores the number of balls for each character, will be described. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the accessory-based acquired ball number area are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control device 100.

  The number of balls acquired is used to obtain the payout rate. The number of balls acquired for each character is used to calculate the character ratio. The number of balls acquired by each character is the number of balls acquired for each prize hole (character) (however, with respect to the large prize hole, it is distinguished between the big hit state and the small hit state). In addition, when the total value (total number) of the number of balls acquired for each character is calculated, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize hole is obtained. The character ratio is, for example, a ratio of the total number of prize balls obtained by winning a special winning opening during a big hit to the total value of the number of balls acquired for each character.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (I), the discharged ball number area is a storage area having a size of 1 byte, and is used to store a value of 0 to 99 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17B (II), the acquired sphere number area is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes and is used to store a value of 0 to 1500.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (III), each winning character-based acquisition area is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes and is used to store a value of 0 to 65535. The number-of-acquired-balls area for each role may be a storage area having a size of 3 bytes or more. If it exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit value (65535) is kept. The area for acquiring the number of balls for each character is an area for storing the total number of prize balls for winning the plurality of general winning openings 35, and the total number of prize balls for winning the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1). , An area for storing the total number of prize balls due to winning in the ordinary variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2), an area for storing the total number of prize balls due to winning in the large winning opening during the big hit, a small area It corresponds to the area for storing the total number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening in the middle of winning (other than the big hit).

[Ball output performance monitoring process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of payout performance monitoring processing. The payout performance monitoring process is executed in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of discharged balls is 100 (predetermined number) or more (A2301). If the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (result of A2301 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2313. When the number of discharged balls is 100 or more (the result of A2301 is “Y”), in order to update the payout rate displayed in the payout rate display unit 67 to the latest payout rate, the number-of-balls-acquired area (RWM) The value of (in) is loaded (A2302). In the acquired number-of-balls area, the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of prize balls), that is, the payout rate is stored. Then, it is determined whether the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (A2303).

  When the number of acquired balls is less than 100 (the result of A2303 is "N"), the game control device 100 indicates the light emission color (red or green in this embodiment) of the segment (light emitting unit) of the payout rate display unit 67. The value of the segment color number area (within the RWM) that stores the color number is updated (A2304), and the segment data corresponding to the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate%) is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2305). ). The segment areas that do not correspond to the color numbers are cleared to 0. In this way, in the payout rate display portion 67, the emission color can be changed to update and display the payout rate display (for example, from red to green), and the player is notified that the payout rate has been updated. Can be recognized.

  As described above, by the processing of steps A2301 to A2305, the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls) is updated and displayed on the payout rate display unit 67 every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (a predetermined number). it can. In addition, when a plurality of winning openings are simultaneously awarded to a plurality of winning openings at the timing when the number of discharged balls is 100, a plurality of winning openings are selected based on a predetermined priority order for each winning opening as shown in FIG. 15B. Among the winning prizes, the winning of the winning opening having the highest priority is adopted, and the winning ball number of the adopted winnings is added to calculate the payout rate (the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls) (priority calculating means). ). As a result, particularly in the normal game state and the special game state, at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (a predetermined number), the highest possible payout rate is obtained, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved. Further, in the specific game state (normal electric power support state), since there are many prizes for the ordinary variable prize device 37, the prize for the ordinary variable prize device 37 is preferentially adopted. In addition, the number of prize balls that have not been adopted among the plurality of prizes is added to the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls) in the payout performance monitoring process in the next timer interruption process.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15C, the winning openings are in the order of the winning openings with the most award balls (the number of winning balls) (large winning opening → general winning opening → first starting winning opening → second starting winning opening). When the priority is given to the monitoring (calculation of the payout rate), the payout rate as large as possible is required at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  When the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (result of A2303 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A2306), and "99". The segment data for blinking display of is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2307). Since the payout rate display section 67 can only display the payout rate from 0 to 99, when the number of balls (the payout rate) acquired is 100 or more in this way, "99" is displayed in one color (for example, red) in a blinking manner. Let In particular, the payout rate becomes 100 or more during the special game state (big hit), but when the payout rate display is updated, one color is used to prevent the color of the payout rate display from frequently changing. In the special game state (big hit), it is also possible to turn off the payout rate display section 67 to hide the payout rate, but in this case, the number of acquired balls (the payout rate) is When updating the payout rate display at 100 or more, the color of the payout rate display may be changed.

  The game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the acquired number of balls as an effect command (A2308), and executes an effect command setting process (A2309). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the payout rate (the number of acquired balls) on the display device 41. It should be noted that the command here corresponds to the payout rate (the number of acquired balls) of a numerical value less than 100 (1 byte range) displayed in the payout rate display section 67.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data regarding the payout rate in the test signal output data area in the RWM (A2310). As a result, the signal data relating to the throwing rate is output to the relay board 70 and the external test firing test device outside through the output process (A1621 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. Then, it is possible to confirm whether or not an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the ball output rate output to the test shooting test device with the ball output ratio obtained by the test shooting test device. The payout rate here may be a value of 100 or more, using the value loaded from the acquired ball number area as it is. As signal data related to the ball output rate, information indicating that a specific winning opening has been won and data on the number of discharged balls are output to an external test firing test device as is, and the ball shooting rate is calculated by the test shot test device. It is also possible to have a configuration. In addition, when the payout rate is an abnormal value that is equal to or greater than a predetermined value or equal to or less than a predetermined value, not the signal data (numerical value) related to the payout rate, but the signal data (ON signal) that reports the abnormality in the test signal output data area A configuration that saves and outputs to the test firing test device is also possible (OFF signal when the value is normal). Next, the acquired sphere number area is cleared to 0 (A2311), and the discharged sphere number area is cleared to 0 (A2312).

  After the step A2312, or when the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is "N"), the game control device 100 shows the value of the acquired number-of-balls region for each character shown in FIG. 17B (III). The total value (total number of prize balls) is calculated (A2313). Next, the number of award winning balls (the award winning portion (for big hits)), which is the total number of award balls due to the winning of the award winning jack in the jackpot state, is loaded (A2314), and the number of winning balls for the award winning portion (award winning) Based on the mouth (a big hit), the ratio of the winning character (number of winning balls / total value) × 100 (%) is calculated (A2315). Here, the total value is a total of the number of balls acquired for each character, and corresponds to the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize hole. The character ratio is calculated up to the first decimal place, but since the decimal is difficult to handle, a value 10 times the character ratio may be calculated.

  It should be noted that the number of accessory acquisition balls used to calculate the accessory ratio is not limited to the number of accessory acquisition balls (big prize hole (big win)), but also the number of character acquisition balls (big prize mouth (small win)) And / or it may include the number of winning balls (normally variable winning device). In addition, the number of winning balls (the big winning portion (for small hits)) is the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the big winning mouth during the small hit state. The variable winning device) is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the calculation result in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the character ratio display unit 68 (A2316). Thus, the character ratio can be displayed on the character ratio display unit 68 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). Next, a command corresponding to the result of calculating the accessory ratio (A2315) is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2318). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the accessory ratio on the display device 41. It should be noted that the command here may correspond to a value (0 to 1000) that is 10 times the character ratio (range of 2 bytes).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data regarding the accessory ratio in the test signal output data area (A2319). As a result, via the output processing (A1622 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means, signal data regarding the accessory ratio is output to the relay board 70 and also to the external test-shooting test device, and the information regarding the accessory ratio is notified (displayed). )it can. Then, it is possible to confirm whether or not an error (mismatch) occurs by comparing the accessory ratio output to the test-shooting test apparatus with the accessory ratio calculated by the test-shooting test apparatus. It is also possible to output the data of the number of balls obtained for each character as it is as signal data relating to the character ratio, to the external test-firing test device, and calculate the character ratio by the test-firing test device.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the value in the number of discharged balls area (A2320), calculates the value of (100-number of discharged balls) (A2321), and outputs the segment data corresponding to this calculation result as the discharged ball. The data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the number display portion 66 (A2322). As a result, the number of discharged balls is displayed in a countdown display on the number of discharged balls display unit 66 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). When the count-up display is performed, the segment data corresponding to the value of the discharged ball number area may be saved in the segment area as it is. In addition, a command corresponding to this calculation result is prepared as an effect command (A2323), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2324). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the number of discharged balls on the display device 41 by the countdown display. The command here corresponds to the number of discharged balls (range of 1 byte) of less than 100 displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66. After that, the payout performance monitoring process is ended.

  As a modified example, the value of the number of discharged balls, the value of the number of acquired balls, and the value of the area of the number of acquired balls for each character are transmitted as data to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 causes the output rate and the role. The material ratio may be calculated. Further, in steps A2310 and A2319, signal data relating to the payout rate and the accessory ratio, signal data for notifying that the payout rate and the accessory ratio are abnormal values (above a predetermined value or below a predetermined value), etc. Is output as an external information signal to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and it is information or an abnormal value regarding the payout rate or the character ratio. May be notified (displayed).

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is executed in steps A2020, A2022, and A2025 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). A value in the range of 0 to 3 is set in the status scan counter corresponding to the gaming status. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning port switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2402). When the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2402 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403) and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state off flag indicates a normal state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state without touch regarding a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. (A2407). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the process moves to step A2412. If they do not match (result of A2409 is "N"), the signal state acquired in the target signal control area is saved (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). When the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is "N"), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value- It remains at a value of 1 (A2414). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (the result of A2415 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2415 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2416). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check processing ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure of payout busy signal check processing. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2026 in the winning port switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is ON (A2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2501 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502) and sets an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). Yes (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is ON (result of A2501 is “Y”), the busy status flag is prepared as the determination status (A2504), and the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value in the busy signal state area matches the current payout busy signal state (ON / OFF) (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2509. If they do not match (result of A2506 is "N"), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2509), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or more than the timer comparison value (A2510). When the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  When the monitoring timer is equal to or more than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A2511). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2512), and the payout busy signal check processing is ended.

  The pay-out busy signal check process sets a pay-out busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the pay-out busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed if the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an undefined state until any of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control device 200 can start the payout control continuously for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout processing is possible immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing relating to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the display of the special drawing is set.

  The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a gaming ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variation winning device 37 that constitutes the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is displayed. Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-judgment is performed in which the game result based on the winning prize is pre-judged. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

  The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is executed by the special figure game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game to set the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the effect setting, and the like. The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special display stop display time and information necessary for performing the special figure display process. The process during figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

  When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit. The special figure displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. is executed (A2610). The details of the special figure displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

  When the game process number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the process during opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The special winning opening opening process is executed to set information necessary for performing the special winning hole remaining ball process (A2612). Details of the special winning opening opening process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A2613). The details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

  When the game process number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). The details of the big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A2615). Details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

  If the game process number is "8" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit mid-process to set information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). The details of the small hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

  When the game process number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process that sets information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). The details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is "10" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2618). Details of the small hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. It is determined (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "N"), the processing from step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

  When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A2704 is “N”), the process of step A2707 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A2705), and production command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state / low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the start winning port 36 is not won unless the player hits it left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won if the player is not hit right. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), the right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes the notification (warning) for instructing the right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second start winning hole (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a winning can be made (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the normal electric auditors product is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number (for example, 5), it is determined that the regular electric fraud is occurring. In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In the case where the illegality of normal electric power generation is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning a prize mouth (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). Then, the special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

  The game control device 100 first sets the information regarding the absence of a winning opening, which indicates that there is no winning opening (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802), and when there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process ends. The target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

  When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether the target random number latch register has latch data. It is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

  When the target random number latch register has latch data (the result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the prepared jackpot random number into the target hard random number latch register and prepares it (A2805), and the starting opening The start mouth winning information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random numbers are used in the special figure starting port switch common processing.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

  The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output frequency overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then, (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). When the winning is not in the start winning hole 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when it is a winning to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as a performance command (A2917), and a performance command setting process (A2918) is executed to make the special figure starting mouth switch common. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit for the starting storage is provided. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. The various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916) in the common start port switch process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process of determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variable display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). When the winning is not in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, in the case where the winning is at the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A3002).

  The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination processing when it is during the special figure time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, when it is not during the special drawing time saving (the result of A3002 is “N”), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A3003). When the big hit or the small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the big hit or the small hit is not being made (the result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 makes a big hit judgment process of judging whether or not the big hit random number value is coincident with the big hit judgment value. Is executed (A3004). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). When it is not a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  The game control device 100 is a small hit that determines whether the small hit is a small hit or not depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value when the winning is at the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y"). A hit determination process is executed (A3009). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (result of A3010 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the out is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), Effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure reservation information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

  By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the read-ahead and a read-ahead change pattern command including the change pattern information in the special figure change display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening opening process is being performed (A3101). When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed. A determination is made (A3102).

  When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A3105. If the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether or not the small hitting processing is being performed. (A3103). If processing is being performed during the small hit (result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to step A3105. Further, when the small hitting is not being processed (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed ( A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

  If the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (result of A3104 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to step A3105. Then, the winning a prize counter is set to 0 (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a). (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and effect command setting processing (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), the special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. When the value of the winning prize counter is not 0 (result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3115). When the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3115 is "Y"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the big winning opening remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3115 is "N"), it is small. It is determined whether or not the hit remaining ball is being processed (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (the result of A3116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3116 is " N "), the value of the winning prize counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count number (A3117), and the special winning opening count value reaches the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 "). ) It is determined whether or not the above (A3118).

  When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. When the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119) and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not during the small hitting process (A3121).

  When the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hit (the result of A3121 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and when the process of small hit is being processed (the result of A3121 is "Y"). , The value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, if the number of reserved special characters 1 is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209). The result is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state during customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (A3211), performs production command setting processing (A3212), and sets "0" related to special figure normal processing as a processing number ( A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, if the customer waiting demo has already started (result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure normal process is ended.

  In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) and the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The produced control device 300 performs the setting to display the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (A3201 result is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) to display the special figure 2 hold number. A figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), effect command setting processing is executed (A3204), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

  If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation start process (A3206), and the decoration feature corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. A figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), effect command setting processing is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

  In this way, the special figure 2 pending number is checked before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, and when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0, the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (A3206) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404). The details of the special figure information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Details of the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. Details of the fluctuation start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Then, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

  The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as a process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510) and saves the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601) and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (A3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. (A3604). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3605).

  When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3608).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 is set while the deviation information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “outfall”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process of setting the big hit flag 1 shown in FIG. 30 is performed for the second starting memory.

  The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

  When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the big hit) as a judgment result (A3807), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3803). If it is in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination processing is common to the small hit determination processing in other processing executed during the timer interrupt processing, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined that a small hit.

  As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In addition, in the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is also used for the determination of the small hit. However, it is possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3903), and the small hit. The determination process ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), deviation is set as the judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) ), A big hit symbol random number is loaded (A4002). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4003).

  Then, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of special result (type of big hit) is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends.

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode transition information is information for changing the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), and is used in a big hit ending process described later. That is, the production mode can be shifted by the big hit by the production mode transition information. In addition, as described above, the production mode transition information is set according to the stop symbol pattern of the big hit (whether it is a probability variation big hit symbol / normal big hit symbol or the like), so the big hit pattern type (big hit type) ends. The destination of the effect mode to be changed later is changed. Further, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the destination of the effect mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (the result of A4011). Is “Y”), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area is saved (A4013).

  After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set for the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be switched when the small hit occurs. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the loss stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern. It is saved in the area (A4017), and a decoration special command corresponding to the stop pattern is prepared (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. The symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special map 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) ), A big hit symbol random number is loaded (A4102). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of big hit) is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the universal communication support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends.

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), and is used in a big hit ending process described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), the special figure 2 stop symbol. The setting process ends.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes is set in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of a time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

  The game control device 100 first sets the first-half variation group selection pointer table (A4201) and acquires the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

  Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 area is saved with the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number of holdings, but when there are other holdings, as a result, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations. Note that a fluctuation group includes multiple fluctuation patterns.When determining a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation group. ing.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

  Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation allocation information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. The process ends. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, since the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending tasks is large), in cases other than failure, as a result, the number of pending calls is distributed in the latter half of the fluctuation. Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

  The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and the second half variation pattern which is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set.

  The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares (A4302), and the target fluctuation pattern random number. The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from one storage area (for one reserved number) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the non-hit. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the outfall occurrence rate and one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is off (A4304), and if it is off (result of A4304 is “Y”), performs 2-byte allocation processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (result of A4304 is “N”), distribution processing (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares it (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding). The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the formula 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, the distribution processing is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (A4310). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first-half fluctuation selection table (first-half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number is stored from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reserved 1). 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), it is not necessary to sort, so the sorting value “0”, that is, the code without sorting is defined at the beginning. ..

  Then, when the top data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then, (A4407), the 2-byte allocation process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the selection table (latter half variation group table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (latter half variation group table). A value is acquired (A4403).

  Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A4403 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (A4404), and the calculated new random value is calculated. Is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to generate a new random value. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

  The above-described processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). When it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407) and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of distribution processing. In the distribution processing, the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table (based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  First, the game control device 100 first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). It is checked whether is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number), and are assigned a predetermined value. However, in the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value “0”, that is, the code without allocation, is specified at the beginning.

  Then, the gaming control device 100, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half fluctuation) One distribution value first defined in the group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503. Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number), and first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).

  When the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4505 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the vacant area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

  By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

  Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The changing symbol can be determined from the variable symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, 800 msec is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol pattern, and 2000 msec is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit symbol pattern.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" relating to the process during special figure display (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area ( A4708).

  Then, the game control device 100, in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec). Is saved (A4709).

  After that, the game control device 100 displays the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display device 51. Save to (A4710). Further, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A4711). , The special figure changing process transition setting process ends.

[Processing during special drawing display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure displaying process. 42A shows the first half of the special figure displaying process, and FIG. 42B shows the latter half of the special figure displaying process.

  The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process (A5101), and clears the small hit flag area of the RWM (A5102). Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (A5103), the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (A5104).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5105), and if it is a big hit (the result of A5105 is "Y"), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game. Test signal for the start of the (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 per signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM It saves (A5108) and sets the round number upper limit value table (A5109).

  On the other hand, if the result of checking the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5105 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A5106), and hits the big hit. In some cases (the result of A5106 is "Y"), a test signal regarding the start of the big hit of the first special figure variation display game (special big hit 1) is turned on (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the character continuously operating device is operating). The signal is turned on, the signal is turned on per special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A5109).

  After that, the game control device 100 acquires a round number upper limit value (for example, 4, 16) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A5110). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special map command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A5112), and executes effect command setting processing (A5113). ). After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to be the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as a production command (A5114), and the production command A setting process is executed (A5115). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the upper limit value of the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5116), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5117).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the general figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game, outside the RWM. The data is saved in the information output data area (A5118). In this embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. The turning on / off of the two big hit signals and the three big hit signals is determined by the big winning opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a payout (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and there is no jackpot (a so-called sudden jackpot. When the information is the special winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on if there is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a payout, and is off when the jackpot is a jackpot without a payout.

  After that, the game control device 100, the special winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the normal figure changing display game and the special figure changing display game. ) Is set (A5119), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5120). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5121). As a result, information on the probability state and special time saving state (universal power support state) of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening fraudulent winning prize number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5122), and corresponds to the big winning opening opening information. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A5123). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 is executed (A5124), and the special figure displaying processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 39 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A5106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5125). When the small hit flag is a small hit (the result of A5125 is "Y"), the high-probability-variation-number update process for updating the high-probability-variation-number updating process for managing the number of executions of the special-drawing variation display game in the special-drawing high-probability state is executed. It is executed (A5126). Next, the production mode information check processing relating to the production mode setting is executed (A5127) to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the special result (big hit) probability of the special figure change display game is in a high probability state). It is determined whether or not (A5128).

  When the special figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A5128 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure command from the decorative special figure command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5129), and sets the effect command. The processing is executed (A5130). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5131), effect command setting processing is executed (A5132), and the process proceeds to step A5133.

  Further, when the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A5128 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A5133. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special map high probability is in the middle (in the probability changing state), the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is caused to the player. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to be noticed.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5133). After that, the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (A5134) is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (result of A5125 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a high probability variation number update process (A5135), and an effect mode information check process regarding setting of an effect mode ( A5136). Then, a switching preparation remaining rotation speed (switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the effect mode number is set (A5137), and whether the production remaining rotation speed (reproduction remaining game number) and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match. It is determined (A5138). It should be noted that the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be (rotation speed) or the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.

  When the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (result of A5138 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets “0” related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A5141).

  On the other hand, when the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (result of A5138 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the effect mode switching preparation command as an effect command (A5139), and effects. After performing the command setting process (A5140), “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A5141). The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing prefetch production from several rotations before the production mode is switched (several games before), and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the performance across modes.

  Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A5142), the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A5143), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability variation number updating process (A5126, A5135) in the special figure displaying process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (during the probability change state) (A5201). When it is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5201 is “N”), the high probability variation number updating process is ended.

  If the special figure high probability is in progress (the result of A5201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of times of high probability variation by −1 (subtracts 1) (A5202), and the number of times of high probability variation is 0. It is determined whether or not (A5203). When the number of times of high probability variation is not 0 (result of A5203 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number updating process is ended.

  When the high-probability fluctuation count becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is "Y"), that is, when the high-probability state ends in the special figure fluctuation display game this time, the game control device 100 ends the high-probability notification flag. The area is cleared (A5204), and a signal relating to the end of the high-probability state (for example, turning off two jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A5205).

  Next, the game control device 100 is a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal). Is turned off, the special symbol 2 variable time reduction state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off), and the test signal output data area is saved (A5206). In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since the general figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal are always turned off. After that, the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area (A5207), and the universal figure low probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (A5208).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209). Then, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, turning off the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5210), and the game state display number 2 area is turned off to turn off the first game state display portion 57. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A5211), and the high-probability-variation-number updating process is terminated.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5127, A5136) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is other than a big hit (small hit or miss).

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode shift information is a non-update code (A5401). When the next mode transition information is the code without update (the result of A5401 is “Y”), the effect mode information check processing is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure variation display games, for example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. ..

  Further, when the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (the result of A5401 is “N”), the game control device 100 is the number of remaining production revolutions that is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the production mode is changed. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed is 0 (A5403). When the effect remaining rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5403 is “N”), the effect mode information check processing is ended. Further, when the remaining effect rotation speed becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404). , The address of the table corresponding to the next mode shift information is acquired (A5405).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A5406), and acquires the effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred. Then, it saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5407), acquires the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred, and saves it in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (A5408). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5410). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (result of A5410 is “Y”), that is, when the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check processing ends.

  If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (result of A5410 is “N”), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5411). ), The effect command setting process is executed (A5412). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (A5417), and if it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is "N"), the effect mode information check processing is ended. In the case of a left-handed mode (result of A5417 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5418), effect command setting processing is executed (A5419), and effect mode is set. The information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the switching of the effect mode is announced in advance before the specified number of rotations. By managing the effect mode in the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (A5124) in the special figure displaying process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval interval process shift setting process 1.

  The game control device 100 first sets a process number "3" related to the fanfare / interval process (A5501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (big hit + small hit is output), four big hit signals are turned on (big hit is output)) as external information. Save in the output data area (A5503), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off), and the test signal output data area is saved (A5504). In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since the general figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal are always turned off. After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5505), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (A5506), and the universal figure game mode flag area is set. Save the universal figure low probability flag (A5507).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variable symbol determination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display section) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the high probability state display. Then, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery that saves the command output to the performance control device 300 at the time of power recovery (A5511), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in a high probability state is displayed. The high probability variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (A5512). This ends the high-probability state and the time saving state (universal power support state).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the no-update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, in order to save the signal regarding the right-handed instruction (for example, turning on the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A5516) and turn on the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) during the right-handed operation. The number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5517), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (A5134) in the special figure displaying processing will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare processing shift setting processing 1.

  The game control device 100 first sets "7" for the small hitting fanfare medium processing as the processing number (A5601), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5603), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the big hit 1 signal is turned on ( Big hit + small hit)) is saved in the external information output data area (A5604), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A5605).

  Next, the gaming control device 100 clears the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5606), and saves the fraud monitoring outside period flag in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5607). Next, a signal related to a right-handing instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5608), and the display LED (first gaming state display portion 57) during right-handing is turned on. The number in the right-handed state is saved in the state display number 2 area (A5609), and the small hit fanfare medium processing shift setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / during-interval processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds (R) in the special game state by +1 (A5701), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702). , Production command setting processing (A5703) is performed.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a special winning opening operation determination table (A5704), and acquires an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number (A5705). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (A5706). When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (the result of A5706 is "Y"), the special winning opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5707). If the number of rounds is equal to or smaller than the open switching determination value (result of A5706 is “N”), the special winning opening time for long opening (eg, 29 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5708).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (A5709), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5710). After that, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditor 1 working signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5711), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the mouth count area is cleared (A5712). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5713), and the processing during the fanfare / interval ends.

  In the present embodiment, as the special winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the special winning opening opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), the big winning opening Open information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), big prize opening information 4 (4R: all long open), big prize opening information 5 (16R: all long open), large Winning prize opening information 6 (16R: 1 to 8R is long opening, 9 to 16R is short opening), special winning opening opening information 7 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening) is set. There is.

  Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16”, the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determining value “4”, the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16”. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. A long opening operation is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, and a short opening operation is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (A2612) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of this embodiment.

  The game control device 100 first compares the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of the RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round ( A5901). If it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is "N"), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (A5902), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (A5903), and It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (A5904).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines the remaining sphere processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) as the special figure game processing timer. The area is saved (A5905), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5910).

  When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the remaining sphere processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) as the special figure game processing timer area. (A5906), the interval command is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5910).

  When it is the final round (the result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the remaining ball processing time (for the final time) (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5908), An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared as a production command (A5909), and production command setting processing is executed (A5910).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "5" related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A5911), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5912). After that, OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5913), and the special winning opening opening process is ended.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (A2613) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first compares the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of the RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round ( A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special game state is not the final round (the result of A6101 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a special winning opening operation determination table (A6102) and corresponds to the special winning opening opening information. The open switching determination value to be obtained is acquired (A6103), and the normal interval time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set (A6104).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (A6105), and if the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (A6105). If the result is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A6109. If the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value (result of A6105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening release information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A6106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that executes a round continuation notification effect that notifies whether or not the big hit round continues, and notifies that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, the special winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern is the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long open) and the big winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is When any one of (short open) is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the special winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 2, the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification production, and the big winning opening is opened with long opening in the rounds after the 5th round, and the big winning opening opening information is With the special winning opening information 3, the discontinuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the special winning opening is opened with a short opening in the fifth and subsequent rounds.

  When the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (the result of A6106 is “N”), the game control device 100 moves to the processing of step A6109. Further, when the special winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (the result of A6106 is “Y”), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (A6107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (result of A6107 is “N”), the process moves to step A6109.

  Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “Y”), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the game control device 100 sets the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3. 6 seconds) is set (A6108), and the process proceeds to step A6109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the interval time set in step A6104 or A6108 in the special figure game processing timer area (step A6109), and sets the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing. (A6110). Next, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6111), and a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is turned off) is tested. It is saved in the signal output data area (A6122), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (the result of A6101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the special figure game mode flag that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. The flag is loaded from the area (A6112), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop pattern pattern is set (A6113), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is specified. It is saved in the figure game processing timer area (A6114).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets "6" as the process number related to the big hit ending process (A6115), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6116). After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (A6117), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (A6118). The information of the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the gaming state is cleared (A6119).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the information in the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number (A6120), and stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening. The information in the mouth opening information area is cleared (A6121), and a signal (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is off) regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) is set in the test signal output data area. The game is saved (A6122), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit ending process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit ending process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (A6201). When it is not time saving operation data (result of A6201 is “N”), big hit end setting processing 1 is executed (A6202), and when it is time saving operation data (result of A6201 is “Y”), big hit end setting processing 2 Is executed (A6203).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (especially A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation. (A6205), the production mode number (production mode number) of the production mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Next mode transfer information is acquired and saved (A6208).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A6210). ), The effect command setting process is executed (A6211).

  Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the presence / absence of time saving (universal support), and the effect mode. As the probability information commands, there are a plurality of commands including "high probability / time saving" or "high probability / time saving", and further including information on the effect mode. In the present embodiment, since the probability change state is always generated (the so-called ST state is always generated) when the big hit ends, the probability information commands are “high probability / with time reduction / production mode A” and “high probability / with time reduction / production mode”. B ”,“ high probability / with time reduction / production mode C ”, and“ high probability / without time reduction / production mode A ”. Although not used in this process, there are other "low probability / no time saving / production mode A", "low probability / no time saving / production mode B", and "low probability / no time saving / production mode C".

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes effect command setting processing (A6213). Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6215).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a time saving (universal support) after the jackpot is over (A6216). When there is a reduction in working hours (universal support) (result of A6216 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no time saving (universal support) (result of A6216 is “N”), a left-hand instruction command notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6217), effect command setting processing is executed (A6218), and the process of step A6219 is performed. Transition.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (A6219), and ends the big hit ending process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6202) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

  The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding no time saving state (for example, turning off two jackpot signals) in the external information output data area (A6301), and then a signal regarding high probability state and start without time saving state (for example, Special symbol 1 high probability state signal on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal Off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302).

  Next, save the number without the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303), save the general figure low probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (A6304), and draw the special figure in the special figure game mode flag area. The high probability & no time saving flag is saved (A6305). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation frequency area (A6306), and the signal related to left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). , In order to turn off the indicator LED (first game state display portion 57) during right hitting, save the number in left hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and end the jackpot end setting process 1. ..

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A6203) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of the time saving state (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) in the external information output data area (A6401). Since the signal related to the start of the time saving state is output from during the big hit, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on), and the test signal output data area is saved (A6402).

  Next, save the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6403), save the figure high probability flag in the figure game mode flag area (A6404), and draw the special figure in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the high probability & time saving flag (A6405). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (A6406), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hit mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hit mode is set from during the big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 does not perform the right hit setting.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process shift setting process 2. The special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is executed in step A6219 in the big hit ending process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first sets “0” as a process number related to special figure normal processing (A6501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6502).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, one big hit signal is off, three big hit signals are off, and four big hit signals are off) in the external information output data area (A6503), Save the signal related to the end (for example, turning off the condition device operating signal, turning off the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, turning off the signal for special symbol 1 and turning off the signal for special symbol 2) in the test signal output data area. (A6504).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6505), clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6506), and sets the effect mode transition information area. Clear the information (A6507). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (A6508), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6509).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the discharge ball number area of the RWM to 0 (A6510), and saves the segment data indicating the discharge ball number "00" in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the discharge ball number display portion 66. (A6511). As a result, the number of discharged balls can be displayed as "00" in the number-of-discharged-balls display unit 66 when the big hit ends through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the RWM acquisition ball number area to 0 (A6512), sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A6513), and sets the payout rate to “00”. The displayed segment data is saved in the segment area (for example, red display area) corresponding to the color number (A6514). Note that the segment area (for example, green display area) that does not correspond to the color number is cleared to 0. Thereby, the payout rate can be displayed as "00" in the payout rate display portion 67 at the end of the big hit through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). After that, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 ends.

  In the big hit state (special game state), the total number of prize balls per 100 discharged balls (that is, the winning percentage) is very large. Therefore, at the end of the big hit state, the number of discharged balls area (and thus the number of discharged balls) and the number of acquired balls area (and thus the winning rate) are cleared to 0, and the number of acquired balls (that is, the winning rate) is corrected again. I am trying to start various measurements. Further, when the big hit state ends, the number of discharged balls display and the output rate display are reset to "00". However, since it is more accurate to measure the character ratio continuously after turning on the power of the game machine 10, the acquired number-of-characters-by-character area (and therefore the character ratio) is not cleared to 0 even after the jackpot state ends. Then, the accessory ratio display is not reset and is continuously displayed before and after the big hit.

  As described above, the processing of steps A6510 to A6514 is performed when the big hit ends (at the end of the big hit), the number of discharged balls, the winning rate (total of the number of prize balls), the number of discharged balls, and the winning rate display. And resetting means for resetting to set the initial value (here, 0 or “00”).

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, details of the small hitting fanfare middle processing (A2615) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing during the small hit fanfare.

  The game control device 100 first sets "8" for the small hitting process as a process number (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6702).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the opening time of the special winning opening in the small hit game (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A6703), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, The special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6704). Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

  After that, the game control device 100 clears the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening (A6706), and the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) in the small hit mid-control pointer area. ) Is saved (A6707), and the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the small hitting process (A2616) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the small hit.

  The gaming control device 100 first loads the value of the control pointer during the small hit (A6801), and determines whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (eg, "6") (A6802). .. If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hit operation end value (the result of A6802 is “N”), the small hit mid-control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), and the small hit operation transition setting process is executed (A6804). The hitting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (result of A6802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A6805) and loads. It is determined whether or not the selected flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (A6806). Thereby, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in effect.

  When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A6806 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets "9" for the small hit remaining ball process (A6809). If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the high probability of special figure (the result of A6806 is "N"), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared as an effect command (A6807), and the effect command setting process is executed ( A6808), and "9" relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (A6809).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6810). Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6811), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6812). The process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (A6804) in the small hit medium process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit operation shift setting process.

  The game control device 100 first executes a branch process in accordance with the control pointer (control pointer during small hit) (A6901). When the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6902), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hitting movement transition setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the control pointers are 1, 3, and 5, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A6904), and wins the special winning prize. The on-data is saved in the mouth solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hit operation transition setting process ends.

  Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit mid-point control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of opening and at the end of closing. .. Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit midway control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 msec closing is closed. At the end (that is, at the time of switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 1, and at the end of the second 200 msec opening, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 2. At the end of the second 1500 msec closing, the small hit midway control pointer is updated to 3, and at the end of the third 200 msec opening the small hit midway control pointer is updated to 4, and at the end of the third 1500 msec close The middle control pointer is updated to 5. Then, at the end of the fourth opening of 200 msec, the control pointer during small hit is updated to 6, and the small hit state is finished after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the small hit ending time of 100 msec thereafter. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, and the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (A2617) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first sets "10" for the small hit end process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7202).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A7203), and outputs a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The signal during operation is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information of the special winning opening count area is cleared (A7205), the information of the control pointer area during the small hit is cleared (for example, cleared to 0) (A7206), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit ending process (A2618) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit ending process.

  The game control device 100 first loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7301), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to high probability of special figure (A7302). If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A7302 is “N”), the effect mode information address table is set (A7303) and set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information is acquired (A7304).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A7305), acquires the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and stores it in the RAM. Is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (A7306), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect mode is saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (A7307). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (A7308), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area upon power failure restoration (A7309). When the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (result of A7309 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7319.

  Further, when the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (the result of A7309 is “N”), the game control device 100 sends the prepared probability information command to the transmission command area at power failure recovery. (A7310), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7311). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A7312), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7313). Furthermore, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared as an effect command (A7314), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7315).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A7316), and if it is not a left-handed mode (result of A7316 is “N”), shifts to the processing of step A7319. To do. If the mode is left-handed (result of A7316 is “Y”), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A7317), and after performing production command setting processing (A7318), the step The processing moves to A7319.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7319), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to special figure time saving (time saving state) (A7320). If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special drawing time saving (the result of A7320 is “Y”), the process moves to step A7323. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special time saving and shortening (result of A7320 is “N”), a signal relating to left-handed instruction (for example, turning off the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area ( A7321), in order to turn off the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) being hit to the right, save the number being hit to the left in the gaming state display number 2 area (A7322), and move to the processing of step A7323. To do.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" for special figure normal processing as a process number (A7323), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7324). Save the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit off) to the external information output data area (A7325), and test the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 small hit signal). The data is saved in the output data area (A7326).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the information in the variable symbol determination flag area (A7327), clears the information in the effect mode transition information area (A7328), and clears the information in the special figure game mode flag save area. (A7329). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning hole fraud monitoring period flag area (A7330), and the small hit ending process is ended.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to effect control device 300. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the process executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A7401). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A7402).

  If the transmission buffer is not full (result of A7402 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7403).

  When the transmission buffer is full (result of A7402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A7401.

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A7404), and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A7405). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A7405 is “Y”), the process returns to step A7404.

  Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (result of A7405 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7406), and then sets production command. The process ends.

  As described above, since the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and the effect command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 60 shows the symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-mentioned special figure game process, and the symbol variation control process in the later-described universal symbol game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (general symbols), and setting display data of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

  First, the game control device 100 checks and determines whether or not the fluctuation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the general drawing) is changing (A7501, A7502). In the case of the present embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( An address for stop) and an address for display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

  The game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol of the control target, when the varying flag related to the symbol of the control target is varying (the result of A7502 is “Y”) (A7503). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer is If it is not 0 (result of A7505 is "N"), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  If the blink control timer after updating is 0 (result of A7505 is "Y"), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol of the control target when the changing flag related to the symbol of the control target is not changing (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the varying time.

  The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1. ) Is updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) according to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of performing the above, the display for one cycle is repeated.

  In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval or display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 makes one round. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

  The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control device 100, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 displays the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, and sets the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game and the setting of effects, The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure change process is executed (A7608). Details of the normal / universal processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). Details of the normal figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

  Further, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. The process for displaying a general figure is executed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the process for hitting a general figure (A7610). Details of the processing for displaying a general figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game process number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal hit or to perform the normal electric ball remaining process. The middle processing in the figure is executed (A7611). Details of the per-figure hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining process for setting information necessary for performing the end-of-universal drawing process (A7612). ). Details of the universal figure remaining sphere processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A7608). (A7613). Details of the per-universal-drawing end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A7702). The gaming state of hitting to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is to hit the right (result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. When it is not in the game state of hitting to the right (result of A7702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) for instructing left-handing using the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the number of reserved universal figures after the update. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of universal figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value, the gaming control device 100 (result of A7705 is " N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hoden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the general figure is hit, that is, whether or not the general figure variation display game is in a hit state and the normal variation winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). Then, when the normal drawing is in progress (result of A7801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated number of the general electric counter reaches the upper limit value (for example, 6) (A7804). When the count number reaches the upper limit value (result of A7804 is “Y”), the hit operation end value (for example, 4) is saved in the general-purpose hit control pointer area (A7805).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the general-purpose hitting medium control pointer area (A7805). Finally, the universal figure game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the universal electric prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, when there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more in the hit state of the universal figure, the winning end value is saved in the process control pointer area during the universal figure hit at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. Therefore, the hit state of the universal figure ends in the middle.

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is determined not to be in a normal hit state (result of A7801 is “N”), it is determined that there is no input to the starting opening 2 switch 37a (result of A7802 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (result of A7804 is “N”), the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of universal figure reservations is 0 (A7901). When the number of reserved figures is 0 (result of A7901 is "Y"), "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary processing of figures (A7921), and the processing number is the figure game processing. Save in the number area (A7922). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (A7923), and the ordinary processing routine processing ends.

  Further, when the number of reserved universal figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads the random number per random from the random number storage area for regular figures of RWM (for the number of reserved ones), and RWM The random number per symbol is loaded from the per symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A7902). Then, the random number per universal figure storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the random number storage area per universal figure (for the number of reservations 1) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure variation display game is higher than normal is in high probability of regular figure (during high probability state), that is, whether it is in a time saving state (state of universal communication support). It is determined (A7904). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

  When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7905). , If the figure high probability is in progress (result of A7904 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the figure high probability is set (A7906), and step A7907 is executed. Move to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during the high probability of universal figure and during the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

  If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7908 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number, the game control apparatus 100 saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (A7909). Further, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7910), and the deviation symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

  If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is “N”), that is, if the hit is random, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7912), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol halt symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A7915), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916), and shifts the random symbol per random symbol storage area. (A7917) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7918), the number of reserved universal figures is updated by -1 (A7919).

  That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per general figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area to 3 for the figure retained Will be done. Then, the value for the figure keeping number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure holding number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the processing for setting transition to normal figure processing setting processing (A7920), and ends the normal figure normal processing. It should be noted that the process change setting process during normal figure change will be described later.

[Process shift setting process during change of the universal map]
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process change setting process during normal figure change. The normal figure changing processing transition setting processing is executed in step A7920 in the normal figure normal processing shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first sets "1" as a processing number for shifting to the processing during variation of the universal figure (A8101), and saves the processing number in the universal figure game processing number area (A8102).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the universal figure changing time (for example, 500 msec) in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8103). The universal figure fluctuation time here is common during high probability of universal figure and during low probability of regular figure. The signal related to the start of the general figure fluctuation display game (normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8104), and the fluctuation flag indicating that the general figure fluctuation display game is changing is It is saved in the figure variation control flag area (A8105). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (A8106), and the initial value is set in the universal figure changing symbol number area ( Here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved (A8107), and then the universal figure changing process transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during fluctuations in general figure]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (A7609) in the routine figure game process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of changing the universal figure.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process of displaying a general figure (A8301), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the universal figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) which is the display time of the result of the universal figure variation display game on the universal figure display in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8303). ..

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of variation of the universal figure (normal symbol 1 varying signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the general / universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general / universal figure variation control flag area (A8305), and the general / universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the normal figure displaying process (A7610) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process of displaying a general figure.

  The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or deviance information) set in the normal / general processing (A8401) and clears the RWM hit flag area (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 sets "0" as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (A8414). , Processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A8415). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (A8416), and the processing for displaying the universal figure is ended.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the hit mid-process setting table (A8404) and handles the universal figure stop symbol information. The hit start pointer value (here, either 0, 2, or 4) is acquired and saved in the normal hit hit control pointer area (A8405). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8406). By the above-described processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it is possible to open three times.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as a processing number for shifting to the processing for hitting a normal figure (A8407), and saves the processing number in the figure game processing number area (A8408). After that, the signal regarding the hit of the general figure fluctuation display game (ordinary symbol 1 hitting medium signal is turned on) and the signal regarding the start of ordinary electric power operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A8409). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid, the on data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8410).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the Poden count number area that stores the number of prizes awarded to the ordinary variable prize device 37 (A8411), and determines the number of prizes awarded to the ordinary variable prize device 37 during the irregularity monitoring period of the regular phone. The stored information on the number of illegal prize winning areas stored is cleared (A8412). Lastly, the flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal communication fraud monitoring period flag area (A8413), and the process of displaying the universal figure ends.

[Middle processing per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (A7611) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process of hitting a normal figure.

  The game control device 100 first loads and prepares a control pointer for hitting a normal figure during hitting (A8601), and the value of the control pointer for hitting a hitting figure is set to a value in the upper limit value area for hitting a hit point for hitting a figure (end of hitting). Value) is determined (A8602).

  And, when the value of the control pointer in the universal figure hitting control does not reach the value in the control pointer upper limit value area in the universal figure hitting (the result of A8602 is "N"), the game control device 100 controls the hitting button in the universal figure hitting. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the ordinary electric power operation shift setting process is executed (A8604), and the ordinary figure hitting process is ended. The details of the normal power operation shift setting process will be described later.

  Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hit reaches the value of the upper limit area of the control pointer during the universal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), Without performing the processing for updating (+1) the processing control pointer area during normal figure hitting in step A8603, the normal power operation shift setting processing is executed (A8604), and the processing for hitting normal figure is ended.

[Uden operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation shift setting process (A8604) in the normal figure hitting process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation shift setting process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). If the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the closing of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is blocked. A later wait time (for example, 200 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, and therefore corresponds to the control pointer. The normal electric prize opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, 1700 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8704). Further, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (A8705), and the general electric operation shift setting process is ended.

  Further, if the value of the control pointer is any of 4, the game control device 100 moves to step A8706 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (A7612). To execute, the processing number is set to "4" (A8706), and the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A8707).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the general figure game processing timer area (A8708). After that, the OFF data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area in order to set the ordinary power solenoid 37c to OFF (A8709), and the ordinary power operation transition setting process ends.

[Disposal of remaining spheres by Dentsu]
Next, the details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (A7612) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric remaining ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first sets the process number "5" related to the end process of the universal figure (A8901), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (A8902). Then, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (normal electric auditor product 1 in-operation signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Then, the normal electric number count area for counting the number of prizes to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the middle-control pointer area for normal drawing is cleared (A8906). After that, the processing of the remaining ball of the electric power station is completed.

[Usually end processing]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing end process (A7613) in the general-university game process will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end-of-universal processing.

  The game control device 100 first sets a process number “0” related to the general / universal figure normal process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the general / universal figure game process number area (A9102). After that, the signal regarding the end of hitting of the universal figure fluctuation game (normal symbol 1 hitting medium signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and then ends the universal figure winning process. To finish.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the general figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display section 57, the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50. The settings relating to the drive of the segment LEDs that form the part 58, the third game state display part 59, and the round display part 60 are performed.

  The game control device 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In this embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

  The game control device 100 sets the universal figure hold number display table 1 (A9203) when the output is on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”) Then, the universal figure reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the universal figure reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the universal figure reservation indicator 56 (lamps D15, D16) (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2, so the general figure reservation indicator 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure holding number display table 1 and the display data of the figure holding number display table 2 are different, the figure holding indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9206). If the output is on timing (result of A9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if it is not output on timing (result of A9206 is “N”), special figure 1 hold The number display table 2 is set (A9208), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reserved indicator 54 (lamps D11 and D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9210). If the output is on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if the output is not on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 is held The number display table 2 is set (A9212), the display data corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires the display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. Then, the data is saved in the segment area of the round display portion 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display manners on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. are defined ( A9216). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display section (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display portion 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game status display portion 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process ends.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring processing performed in the magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1312) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  In the game control device 100, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2), the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A9301 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets the magnet irregularity monitoring timer for counting the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A9302), and it is determined whether the timer has timed out (A9303).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer ( (A9304), the magnet irregularity notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet irregularity notification command as an effect command (A9306), and prepares a magnet irregularity flag indicating that a magnet irregularity has occurred as a magnet irregularity flag (A9307). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet irregularity flag matches the value of the magnet irregularity flag area (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet irregularity monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not turned on (the result of A9301 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. Yes (A9308). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A9309). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (A9310). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (result of A9303 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A9309.

  When the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet injustice monitoring process.

  Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the irregularity notification period. When is ended, or when the injustice notification has not been performed from the beginning, a magnet injustice notification end command is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud cancellation flag as a magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, when the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (the result of A9313 is "N"), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (A9314), and the effect command is set. The processing is executed (A9315). Then, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board electric wave fraud monitoring process, presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the electric wave sensor 62 (board electric wave sensor) of the game board, and the start / end of the illegality notification is set.

  In the game control device 100, first, the radio sensor 62 is turned on, that is, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave irregularity notification command as an effect command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave irregularity flag indicating that a board radio wave irregularity has occurred as a board radio wave irregularity flag (A9404). Further, it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (A9409). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, in the case of radio fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not turned on (the result of A9401 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, the game control device 100 defines a radio wave fraud notification timer that defines a radio fraud notification time. If is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (A9406). When the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is "N"), that is, when the time has not expired, the panel radio frequency irregularity monitoring process ends.

  Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the injustice notification period. If the notification has ended, or if the injustice notification has not been performed from the beginning, a radio wave injustice notification end command is prepared as an effect command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409).

  Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (the result of A9409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. If the values do not match (the result of A9409 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (A9410), and effect command setting processing is executed (A9411). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing ends.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. 75A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 75B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the information based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmitting process (A1305), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (A1313). A process of creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting it in an output buffer is performed.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”) or the main frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 The ON data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After the steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). The determination is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

  If the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the processing of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A9510). It should be noted that it can be determined that a magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. If magnet fraud is not occurring (result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the universal communication irregularity is occurring (A9513). In the case where the ordinary telephone fraud is not occurring (result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). If the fraudulent winning flag relating to the special winning opening is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the fraudulent winning opening is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9515).

  On the other hand, in the gaming control device 100, when the magnet illegality is occurring (A9510 result is “Y”), when the board radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9511 result is “Y”), the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring. In the middle (the result of A9512 is “Y”), when the ordinary telephone fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or when the special winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “ Y ”), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9516), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9517). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

  After the steps A9515 and A9517, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9518). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process of editing the winning signal of the starting opening (A9519). Details of the starting port signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100, if the symbol determination frequency control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (A9520). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9521). If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A9521 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is the external information output data. The data is saved in the area (A9522), and the external information editing process ends.

  Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is not 0 (the result of A9521 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol fixed number signal is external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9518) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize to a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) to an external device. Processing.

  If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 first updates -1 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A9603).

  And when the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9603 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by -1 (A9604), and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (the result of A9603 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. Then, (A9608), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (result of A9602 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. Is determined (A9606). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal to external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9607). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A9606 is “N”), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Starting gate signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (A9519) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening signal editing process. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

  The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  When the value of the start-port signal output control timer is 0 (result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the start-port signal output count is 0 (A9703). Then, if the number of times of starting port signal output is not 0 (the result of A9703 is "N"), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated by -1 (A9704), and the starting port signal output control is controlled in the starting port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A9705).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the starting opening signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the starting opening signal editing process.

  Further, when the number of times the starting port signal is output is 0 (result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs off data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device to the external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting mouth signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the starting mouth signal output control timer is in the output on section. (A9706). The fact that the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the starting mouth signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A9706 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 sets ON data for turning ON the starting mouth signal to the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9707), and the starting port signal editing process is terminated.

  Further, when the starting mouth signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A9706 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 sets OFF data for turning off the starting mouth signal for the external device in the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A9708), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Then, effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B1002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Rendering button input processing is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process is executed for accepting an operation (operation of operating means such as the effect button 25) such as change of brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by a player or a person involved in the game shop (hall). (B1010). In addition, in the hall / player setting mode, the player can customize the display and effects on the display device 41.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for adding and clearing production points (B1011). The process of adding the effect points is performed by executing the effect or the operation for which the effect points are added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game, for example, the information of the effect points Information including, for example, can be displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process.

  Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating random numbers such as production random numbers (B1012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B1013). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates effect data according to the contents (effect) to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The process is executed (B1014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1015).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B1016 is “N”), the processing of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (result of B1016 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B1017). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

  The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1018).

  In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B1019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

  Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling the performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to perform the accessory motion effect.

  And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B1008, if the above-mentioned processing of B1020 is completed. After that, the processing from B1008 to B1020 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check processing (B1013) in the above-described main processing (FIG. 78) will be described below with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process is ended.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

  Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that when the copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), The processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

  Next, when the copy is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the command content received in the command area for analysis (B1107) and analyzes the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 80. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has been completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are executed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 79) described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that the command of the type specified by the MODE section can take. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there are variation commands (A4608 and A4609). Then, when the MODE part represents a variable command (result of B1205 is “Y”), variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit system command (B1207). In addition, the big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during the big hit. For example, a fanfare command (A5116), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A5907), An ending command (A5909) and the like. If the MODE part indicates a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the big hit system command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process ends.

  When the MODE part does not represent the big hit type command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure command (A4018, A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol type command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol type command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  The effect control device 300, the command (A2323 in FIG. 18) relating to the number of discharged balls, the command (A2308 in FIG. 18) corresponding to the payout rate (the number of acquired balls), the command corresponding to the calculation result of the character ratio ( 18 may be received as an effect command (single shot system command), and in the single shot system command processing, display setting processing for displaying the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be performed. Note that the effect control device 300 may back up (store) the number of discharged balls, the ball output rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even during a power failure.

  In addition, in the one-shot system command processing, the effect control device 300 executes the following processing, for example. When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command, a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed. When the MODE section represents a command for power failure recovery or a customer waiting demo command, a power failure recovery setting processing for power failure recovery or a customer waiting demo setting processing for displaying a customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like is executed. .. When the MODE part represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command or a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, the special figure 1 reservation information setting process or the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed. When the MODE part represents the probability information command, the probability information setting process is executed. When the MODE part represents an error / illegal command, an error / illegal setting process for reporting or canceling an error or fraud is executed. The error / illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command (A2108), a fraud cancellation command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). When the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching, effect mode switching setting processing is executed.

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is “N”), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The read-ahead symbol system command includes the above-mentioned read-ahead stop symbol command (A3014). Then, when the MODE part indicates the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018). When the MODE part indicates the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Example of display screen layout]
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a layout example of the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a discharge ball number display unit 691 for displaying the discharge ball number, a discharge rate display unit 692 for displaying a discharge rate, and a character ratio display unit 693 for displaying a character ratio. .. In FIG. 81, the values of 57, 36, and 59.3 are displayed as the number of discharged balls, the rate of balls discharged, and the ratio of character products, respectively.

  It should be noted that even if the number of discharged balls, the ball output rate, and the accessory ratio are constantly displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, it is an obstacle, so for example, when the glass frame or the front frame is opened, an error message (glass frame opening error, In addition to the display of the front frame opening error), the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed.

  In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010) that accepts operations by a player, etc., the display / non-display of the number of discharged balls, the rate of balls discharged, and the ratio of character objects can be switched or the number of discharged balls can be selected by the player. Alternatively, it may be possible to select which of the payout rate and the character ratio is displayed. Further, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the number of discharged balls may be displayed as a countdown display or a countup display on the display device 41 depending on the selection made by the player or the like. The selection may be performed by displaying a menu on the display device 41 and operating the operating means such as the effect button 25 by the player.

  Further, during the customer waiting demonstration, the number of balls discharged, the ball output rate, and the character ratio on the display device 41 may be hidden. It should be noted that the latest (latest) number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio may be displayed during the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, but in this case, the display size is set only during the customer waiting demonstration. If it is larger than the other cases, it can appeal to the visitors of the game shop that is not playing.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), a first special symbol in the left area 610a, a second special symbol in the right area 610b, The third special symbol is variably displayed in the middle area 610c (in FIG. 81, the stop symbol is displayed). The number-of-discharging-balls display unit 691, the payout rate display unit 692, and the accessory ratio display unit 693 are provided above the variable display area 610, but are not limited thereto.

  In addition, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio may be hidden or reduced in display size when they interfere with variable display of the variable display area 610 or other effects on the display device 41. It may be displayed or the display size may be increased only when the variable display is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, in the plurality of variable display areas 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, three ornament reduced symbols (special symbols smaller than the ornament special symbol) are variably displayed. When a movie-type reach effect or the like is performed in the center of the display screen, the decorative reduced design may be variably displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, in the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced design may be constantly displayed in a variable manner. The variable display area 615 is commonly used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. The large decorative special pattern of the variable display area 610 and the small special symbol of the variable display area 615 may be similar or may be completely different.

  The hold display 633 (starting memory display) displayed on the hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) includes the special figure 1 holding information set from the decoration special figure 1 holding number command and the decoration special figure 2 holding number command. Screen drawing is performed based on the set special figure 2 suspension information (B1014-B1017). The hold display 633 shows hold (starting memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. As the hold display 633, the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display are displayed side by side on the hold display unit 630 in the winning order (holding order).

  On the hold display unit 630, spherical (circular) hold displays 633 are displayed in a manner arranged side by side on a gutter 635 that is inclined with its left side lowered. Further, a hold-corresponding display 633a (fluctuating hold display) corresponding to the hold (holding during digestion) relating to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the reserve digestion area 640 imitating the frame of the globe (frame). As the earth inside). The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 moves from the left side of the gutter 635 to the hold digestion area 640 every time the special figure variation display game starts.

  Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 for displaying the special figure 1 reserved number by numbers and the special figure 2 reserved number display for displaying the special figure 2 reserved numbers by numbers. A section 660 is provided.

  A navigation character 670 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41. The navigation character 670 is usually arranged so as to be adjacent to and adjacent to the holding correspondence display 633a (holding used area 640) that indicates holding during digestion. The navigation character 670 includes, in addition to the main body 670a, a character name display portion 670b and a meter display portion. In addition, in association with the navigation character 670, a dialogue (may be a notice of dialogue) that the navigation character 670 appears to appear is displayed on the dialogue display unit 680. Note that the dialogue may be output as voice as well as being displayed. In addition, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio may be displayed according to the operation of the navigation character 670 on the screen (the number of discharged balls, the payout ratio, and the character ratio are moved by the navigation character 670. Do the production to display).

[Operation / Effect of First Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the payout control means (payout control device 200 or the like) has a game ball in a winning area (general winning opening 35 or starting winning opening 36) or a variable winning device (normal varying winning device 37 or special variation winning device). When the device 39) is won, it is possible to pay out the number of prize balls determined for each of the winning regions and the variable winning devices. The display means (the character ratio display unit 68, the display device 41, etc.) is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable winning device to the total number of prize balls paid out (the part Object ratio) can be displayed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that the variable winning device is likely to win the prize (the impression that many open states occur), which serves as a motivation (index) for the player to continuously play the game.

  The counting means (the game control device 100 or the like that executes the processing of steps A2015 and A2210) is the number of discharged balls that is the number of game balls discharged from the game area, or the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area. Count the number of shots. The display means (ball output rate display unit 67, display device 41, etc.) can display the ratio (ball output rate) of the total number of award balls obtained by winning with respect to the number of discharged balls or the number of shot balls. Therefore, the player can be made interested in the general winning opening 35. And, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The display means (the number of discharged balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, the accessory ratio display unit 68, the display device 41, etc.) displays the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state. The accessory ratio may be hidden. That is, only when the gaming machine is not in the waiting state for customers, the display means may display the number of discharged balls, the winning rate, and the character ratio. This is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, and can increase the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  The display means (ball output rate display unit 67, display device 41, etc.) displays the total number of prize balls obtained by the predetermined number of game balls each time the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Can be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate can be easily displayed as the total number of prize balls. In addition, the player can be made interested in the general winning opening 35, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The calculating means (the winning opening switch / the game control device 100 for executing the state monitoring process, etc.), if any one of the winning regions and the variable winning devices simultaneously wins at a timing when a predetermined number is reached, each winning prize The total number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls obtained by winning one of the plurality of prizes based on the priority order set for the area and the variable winning apparatus. Therefore, in particular, in the normal game state and the special game state other than the normal electric support state, at the timing when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the maximum possible total number of prize balls (ball-out rate) ) Is required, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  The calculating means (the winning opening switch / the game control device 100 that executes the state monitoring process, etc.) is a target winning area to which the number of prize balls is added, depending on whether a specific game state (universal support state) has occurred. It is possible to change the priority order of each winning area or variable winning apparatus. Therefore, in the specific game state (normal electric power support state), since there are many prizes for the normal variable prize device 37, the prize for the normal variable prize device 37 is preferentially adopted, and the total number of prize balls can be calculated.

  The reset means (the game control device 100 or the like that executes the processing of steps A6510 to A6514) can reset the total number of winning balls (ball output rate) to an initial value when the special gaming state ends. .. In the big hit state (special game state), the total number of prize balls is very large, but after the big hit state, accurate measurement of the total number of prize balls (ball output rate) can be started. In addition, the reset means, at the end of the special game state, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable winning device out of the total number of prize balls paid out (feature ratio) Will not be reset and will be maintained. As a result, the character ratio can be accurately measured regardless of the big hit state (special game state).

  The game information output means (such as the game control device 100 that executes the output process) can output information about the total number of prize balls (ball output rate) and information about the character ratio to an external device. Therefore, if the total number of prize balls output to an external device such as a test shooting test device (ball output rate) is compared with the total number of prize balls determined by an external device (ball output ratio), does a discrepancy occur? I can confirm.

  When the monitoring means (the winning opening switch / the game control device 100 for executing the state monitoring process or the like) monitors and monitors the winning regions and the variable winning devices in the descending order of the number of winning balls. When there is a prize, the total number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls of the prize. Therefore, the maximum total number of prize balls (ball output rate) is preferentially obtained, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the second embodiment, in addition to the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 whose display control is executed by the game control device 100, display control is executed by the payout control device 200. The number of discharged balls display section 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853 are provided. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided in the collective display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10, as in the first embodiment. The number of discharged balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the discharge ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 that are display-controlled by the payout control device 200 may be provided in the upper plate unit. In this way, when the payout number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 or the upper plate unit, the game board 30 is replaced with another game board. However, it can be used as it is without being discarded, which leads to cost reduction.

  In addition, the discharged ball number display unit 851, the ball output rate display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853 are the same as the discharged ball number display unit 66, the ball output ratio display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68, respectively. It is composed of (two or three) 7-segment type (8-segment type including point portions) indicators (LED lamps, display devices).

  FIG. 82 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10. On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that controls the game comprehensively via a switch base 738 is arranged, and the game control device 100 via a control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the device is provided. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper part of the back surface of the game control device 100 is provided. When the game board 30 configured as described above is stored in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 project rearward of the front frame 12. To do.

  A storage unit 750 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and arranges the stored game balls to flow down is arranged on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12. .. A payout unit 790 for paying out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is arranged on one inner side of the front frame 12.

  Further, on the lower back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on the data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24. A ball launch device 742 for launching, a connection terminal 743 for connecting to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are provided.

  The number of discharged balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are arranged on the rear surface (back surface) of the payout control device 200 (payout control board), and the number of discharged ball display unit 66 and the payout rate are shown. Unlike the display section 67 and the accessory ratio display section 68, it is visible only from the back side of the gaming machine 10. The number of discharged balls display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are visible to only a person concerned (employee or the like) of the game store, not to be shown to a general player. The discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are visible only from the front side of the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, when it is not desired to show the display of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio to a general player, the number of discharged balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, the character product on the front surface of the game machine 10. The ratio display section 68 can be omitted. In this case, only from the back surface side of the gaming machine 10, the display of the number of discharged balls, the rate of ball output, and the ratio of character products is confirmed by the number of discharged balls display unit 851, the rate of ball output display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853. it can.

  Further, the payout control device 200 calculates the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the ratio of the accessory based on the payout command, and the discharge control device 200 is provided with the discharge. Display control is performed on the number-of-balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853. It should be noted that the payout command here includes both a payout command (A1719) and an out-ball detection command (A2017) in units of one winning in a winning opening (winning area). The payout control device 200 receives the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio calculated by the game control device 100, and displays the number of discharged balls display unit 851 and the payout rate display provided in the payout control device 200. It is also possible to display on the part 852 and the accessory ratio display part 853.

  The payout control device 200 is composed of a memory such as a CPU (microcomputer) and a RAM, and like the game control device 100, a discharged ball number area for storing the discharged ball number, the number of balls acquired per 100 discharged balls (prize) The memory has an acquired sphere number area for storing the total number of spheres) and an accessory sphere number area for memorizing the number of spheres for each role (see FIG. 17B). The method of calculating the number of discharged balls, the ball output rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the character ratio is the same as that of the first embodiment. The out-ball detection command is used to update the number of discharged balls by +1.

  FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of a payout command (payout number command). The payout command is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). In the payout command, the most significant bit (1st bit) is an out-ball flag indicating that there is a ball in the outlet 30b, and the 2nd to 4th bits are a prize in the winning port. In this case, the winning hole information for specifying the winning hole is shown, and the fifth to eighth bits indicate the number of prize balls as they are. In the winning bit information of the second bit to the fourth bit, "001" is the general winning hole 35, "010" is the starting hole 1 (starting winning hole 36), and "011" is the normal variable winning device 37 (starting hole). 2), "100" indicates a big winning opening (winning during big hit), and "101" indicates big winning opening (winning other than during big hit such as small hit). The number of prize balls is 0 when the out-ball flag is set to 1 (on), that is, when the out-ball 30b is entered. Similar to the first embodiment, the total number of prize balls is stored in the acquired ball number area, and the total number of prize balls for each winning opening is stored in the acquired character number area for each character as the character acquired character number. It

  For example, if the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal notation, the 10 prize balls due to winning in the general winning opening 35 are "1AH", and the 3 prize balls due to winning in the starting opening 1 are "23H". The two prize balls due to winning in mouth 2 are "32H", the 14 prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening (big hit) are "4EH", and the 14 prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening ( The small hit is "5EH", and the notification by the out-ball detection (out-ball detection command) is "80H".

[Operation / Effect of Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the first embodiment is obtained, and the discharged ball number display section 851, the ball output rate display section 852, and the accessory provided on the rear surface (back surface) of the payout control device 200. The ratio display portion 853 makes it possible to visually check the number of discharged balls, the output ratio, and the accessory ratio even from the back side of the gaming machine 10.

[Other Modifications of First and Second Embodiments]
An embodiment in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment are modified as follows is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 controlled by the game control device 100 are not on the front surface of the game machine 10 but on the back surface of the game machine 10. It may be arranged. In FIG. 84, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided on the rear surface (back surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, and the gaming machine 10 is provided. It is visible only from the back side of. In this case, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 can also be shown only to the related persons (employees, etc.) of the game store, not to the general player. .. In addition, if the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are arranged on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, there is a possibility that the appearance of the gaming machine 10 will not be impaired to a general player. is there. Further, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are installed on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. The board (main board) of the game control device 100 is sealed so that it cannot be opened in the case (because it is caulked). Therefore, the number of discharged balls display unit 66, the output rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit No cheating can be performed on the display of 68.

  The number of balls discharged, the ball output rate, and the character ratio are displayed on the collective display device 50 on the front of the gaming machine 10 (the number of ball discharged display section 66, the ball output rate display section 67, the character ratio display section 68). 1 and not all of the display unit (the number of discharged balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853) provided in the payout control device 200 on the back surface of the gaming machine 1 and 1. Only one or two may be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that at least one of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio is not displayed, but at least one is displayed. That is, any one of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the ball output rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 may be omitted, or the discharged ball number display unit 851, the ball output ratio display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853. Either of may be omitted. Further, the number of 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps) is increased, and as the character ratio display section 68, a first display section for displaying the continuous character ratio and a commonly used character ratio ( It is also possible to provide two, that is, a second display section for displaying the total character ratio) and simultaneously display both the continuous character ratio and the so-called character ratio (total character ratio). Further, by pressing the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) (A1016) to turn it on, it is possible to alternately switch the display of the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the character ratio display portion 853. ..

  Further, a common display device in which four 7-segment type display devices are arranged in the horizontal direction is provided without separately providing the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. It is also possible to provide only one and display the number of discharged balls, the rate of balls discharged, and the ratio of character products. With such a common display, each time the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) is turned on, which of the number of discharged balls, the output rate, and the character ratio is displayed is sequentially switched. In this case, the common display displays any one of the number of discharged balls, the ball output rate, and the character ratio together with an identification symbol (alphabet or the like) indicating what is displayed. For example, the number of discharged balls is “h55”, the payout rate is “d30”, the total character ratio is “y50.8”, and the continuous character ratio is “r58.4”.

  In addition, the number of balls discharged, the rate of balls thrown, and the ratio of character products are held as information inside the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 and the microcomputer (CPU) of the payout control device 200, and the display section and display of the game machine 10 are held. Even if the device 41 does not display the number of discharged balls, the ball output rate, and the character ratio, it outputs (or displays) the number of the ball discharged, the ball ratio, and the character ratio to an external device (testing test device, etc.). Good (as a matter of course, the number of discharged balls, the rate of balls discharged, and the ratio of the prizes may be displayed on the display unit or the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10 and output to an external device).

  Further, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio are set by the user program in the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 as in the first and second embodiments. In addition to calculation, the CPU of the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 itself has a calculation function (hardware calculation function), and parameters are set in an internal register ( The number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio may be automatically calculated by firing (discharging) a game ball, setting information each time a prize is detected, or the like. Then, the number of balls discharged from the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 to an external device (inspection device 500 or the like) calculated by a hardware-based calculation function (calculation means) You may output a rate and an accessory ratio.

  If the total number of balls discharged from power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000), or if the number of executions of the variable display game after power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100), as a privilege It may be configured to display the payout rate and the accessory ratio. In this way, the operation of the gaming machine may increase immediately after the opening of the gaming shop, and the accurate accessory ratio can be displayed.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the accessory ratio is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. It may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls acquired in a predetermined number (for example, 400 times) of the special figure variation display game. For example, the predetermined period is a period related to one big hit (from the normal game state before the big hit to the end of the big hit), or a period related to one consecutive chan (runsou) (certain change from the normal game state before the big hit) The time is shortened (until the electric support is completely completed), and the accessory ratio may be calculated separately for each such predetermined period.

  The production control device 300 receives the payout command (A1719) and the out-ball detection command (A2017), and calculates the number of discharged balls, the ball-out rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the ratio of the character role. You may. In this case, the production control device 300 may back up (store) the calculation results of the number of discharged balls, the ball output rate, and the character ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored content even during a power failure. In this way, the number of balls discharged, the rate of balls thrown, and the ratio of character products can be displayed on the display device 41 immediately after the power failure is restored (power is turned on). Further, in this case, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the production control device 300 is selected by switching the calculation method of the accessory ratio displayed on the display device 41 by selection by the player or the like. The accessory ratio may be calculated according to the calculation method and displayed on the display device 41. As described above, the method of calculating the character ratio is only the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special winning opening during the big hit state to the total number of prize balls. Instead, it varies depending on whether or not to include the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the ordinary variable winning device 37 or the large winning opening in the small hit state.

  Also, with 100 balls (number of prize balls to be paid) as one set (1 unit), the number of balls to be acquired for each set (number of balls to be acquired) and the number of balls to be won by a prize hole other than a character It is possible to save (the number of winning balls acquired) in the ring buffer and use it for calculating the ratio of winning characters, the rate of winning balls, and the like. The prizes here are the special variation prize device 39 (large prize hole) and the normal variation prize device 37 (second start prize hole), and the prize prizes other than the prizes are the general prize hole 35 and the start prize hole 36. (First start prize hole). The ring buffer is unclearable to prevent fraud, and the number of acquired balls is always accumulated regardless of the time and the number of special figure variation display games. It is possible to flexibly calculate the character ratio, the payout rate, etc., for each predetermined period or for each predetermined number of acquired balls (number of payout balls), depending on the number of character acquired balls and the number of winning hole winning balls stored in the ring buffer.

  As a storage mode, both the number of winning balls and the number of winning prize winning balls may be stored in the ring buffer as a set (block) of 2 bytes in total, for example, 1 byte each. In addition, since one of the number of winning balls and the number of winning hole winning balls can be subtracted from 100, the other can be calculated. Therefore, only one of the number of winning balls and winning hole winning balls can be stored in the ring buffer. Good. Further, as the number of balls for winning a prize and the number of balls for winning a prize hole, the number of balls for each auction (winning hole) for each winning character (see FIG. 17B) may be stored in the ring buffer.

  The ring buffer may be provided in a nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory mounted on any of the game control device 100 (main board), the payout control device 200 (payout board), and the effect control device 300 (sub board). As a result, it is not necessary to specially back up the number of winning balls and the number of winning holes. The size of the ring buffer is, for example, 600 sets. Assuming that the number of balls launched per minute by the ball launching device is about 100 and the ball output rate is 100%, 100 (1 set) prize balls are paid out per minute, so if 600 sets, the ball output rate is 100%. With this, it is possible to store the number of balls acquired for about 10 hours.

  If there is space in the ring buffer, it may be notified. The staging display device 41 may give a notification on the screen indicating that the ring buffer has a space. This notification may be performed only during the game (other than the customer waiting state), the customer waiting state, or the hall setting mode. In addition, a dedicated LED may be provided in the collective display device 50, the game control device 100, or the like to notify by lighting or blinking. The dedicated LED may not be provided, and the existing LED may be notified in a lighting mode (color or blinking) different from usual. Vacant information indicating that the ring buffer is vacant may be transmitted as a trial shooting test signal or an external information signal, and may be displayed on the trial shooting test device or an external device to notify that the ring buffer is vacant. In addition, the notification may be given by the sound of the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99. Note that configurations other than those described below can be applied to the configurations common to the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, the character ratio (total character ratio (so-called character ratio) and continuous character ratio) is displayed on the display device 41 at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and / or the time saving end timing. To be done. In addition, as for the accessory ratio, a value divided for each special game (big hit) consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds (a value measured by resetting at the end of each special game) is included in the big hit history information about the special game and saved. , Can be included in the big hit history information and displayed on the display device 41.

[Delivery Performance Monitoring Process of Third Embodiment]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of payout performance monitoring processing according to the third embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating process (FIG. 17A). Note that steps having the same contents as the payout performance monitoring process in FIG. 18 have the same step numbers, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In step A2313, the game control device 100 calculates the total value (total number of prize balls) of the value of the number-of-acquired-balls area for each character shown in FIG. It is loaded from the number-of-acquired spheres by role (A9801). The number of balls earned for each character here is the total number of prize balls awarded to the special winning opening during a big hit, the total number of prize balls awarded to the large winning entrance during a small hit (other than during a big hit), ordinarily This is the total number of prize balls awarded to the variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates (a character acquisition ball number / total value) × 100 (%) as a character ratio based on the character acquisition ball number (A9802). Here, as the character ratio, the so-called continuous character ratio (the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special winning opening during the big hit state) and the commonly used character ratio (The ratio of the total winning combination: the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special winning opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37) is calculated. When calculating the ratio of consecutive winning characters, the total number of winning balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit is used as the number of winning balls. When calculating the ratio of all the prizes, the total number of prize balls from the big prize hole during the big hit, and the prizes from the big prize hole during the small hit (except during the big hit) The sum (total) of the total number of balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2) is used. Here, in addition to the ratio of continuous characters and the ratio of all characters, the ratio of large winning prizes (the prize obtained by winning the large winning prize during the big hit state and the small hit state out of the total number of prize balls) Other accessory ratios such as the ratio of the number of balls) may be calculated.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays segment data corresponding to one of the calculation results of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio in order to display one of the calculation results on the character ratio display unit 68. , Save in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display portion 68 (A9803).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the big hit end timing at present (A9804). Here, the big hit end timing can be set variously as long as it can be recognized that the big hit state (special game state) has ended. For example, the jackpot end timing is determined to be the final round in the special winning opening remaining ball processing (FIG. 49) when the remaining ball processing time (for the last) has elapsed (A5908) (the result of A6101 is “Y”). ), The timing at which the processes of steps A6112 to A6122 are executed (at the beginning of the ending). The big hit end timing may be during the ending or at the end of the ending, that is, when the ending time (A6114) has elapsed.

  When the jackpot end timing is currently reached (the result of A9804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the result of calculating the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (A9802) as a performance command ( A2317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2318).

  As a result, at the timing when the special game state ends (big hit end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) on the display device 41. In the special game state (big hit state), the continuous variable character ratio and the total character ratio change more greatly than in the normal game state due to opening of the special variation winning device 39 (large prize hole). Even if the ratio is displayed, the player is confused and wasteful. Therefore, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are displayed at the jackpot end timing immediately after a large change.

  When it is not the jackpot end timing at present (result of A9804 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether it is currently the high probability end timing or the time saving end timing (A9805). Here, the high probability end timing or the time saving end timing (specific game state end timing) can be variously set as long as it can be recognized that the high probability state or the time saving state (universal power support state) has ended. In the case where the big change is always brought to the sure change state (so-called ST state is always made) as in the first embodiment, the high-probability end timing and the time saving end timing are the same timing. It becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), which is the timing when the processes of steps A5204 to A5211 are executed. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, a model having a low probability time saving state (universal power support state) has a time saving end timing different from the high probability end timing.

  When the high-probability end timing or the time saving end timing is currently reached (result of A9805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a command corresponding to the result of calculating the continuous role ratio and the total role ratio (A9802). It is prepared as a command (A2317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2318).

  As a result, at the timing when the specific game state ends (high probability end timing or time saving end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) on the display device 41. .. In the specific game state, the change of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio becomes larger than that in the normal game state due to the opening of the normal variation prize winning device 37 (second starting prize hole) by the support of Poden. Even if the ratio is displayed, it only wastes the player and is wasteful. Therefore, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are displayed at the end timing of the specific game state immediately after the large change.

  If neither the high-probability end timing nor the time saving end timing is currently reached (result of A9805 is “N”), the game control device 100 moves to step A2319 without executing the processes of step A2317 and step A2318.

  Through the above process, when the payout performance monitoring process is executed (when a winning occurs), the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are always calculated, and the jackpot end timing, high probability end timing, and At the time saving end timing (timing immediately after the role ratio greatly changes), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous role ratio and the total role ratio on the display device 41. Note that the continuous accessory ratio and the total accessory ratio may be displayed on the display device 41 only at one of the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing.

  When the big hit end setting process 1 (FIG. 51) is executed, the latent probability change state with high probability and no time saving (without normal electric power support) is set, but after the big hit ends, the latent probability change state is set and the special figure fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times. When the game is executed, a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio may be prepared as a performance command (A2317), and the performance command setting process may be executed ( A2318).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a modification of the payout performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment.

  In FIG. 86, steps A9804 and A9805 and steps A2313 and A9801 to A9803 are replaced in order, and the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are set only at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing. It calculates (A9802), prepares a command corresponding to the calculation result as an effect command (A2317), and executes effect command setting processing. In FIG. 86, when the payout performance monitoring process is executed, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are not always calculated, and the calculation load is reduced.

  As described above, at the jackpot end timing, the high-probability end timing, and the time saving end timing (timing immediately after the role ratio has changed significantly), the continuous role ratio and the total role ratio are calculated, and the effect control device 300. Can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display device 41. The continuous winning character ratio and the total winning character ratio may be calculated and displayed on the display device 41 only at one of the jackpot ending timing, the high probability ending timing, and the time saving ending timing.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 of the third embodiment]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 according to the third embodiment. The special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is executed by the game control device 100 in step A6219 of the big hit ending process (FIG. 50). The steps having the same contents as those in the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 of FIG. 53 have the same step numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  At the end of the big hit, in steps A6510 to A6514, the game control device 100 clears (resets) the number-of-discharging-balls area and the number-of-acquiring-balls area to 0, and the display of the number of discharged balls and the payout rate is initially displayed (“00 )) Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 clears (resets) all the winning sphere counts by role to 0 (A6515), and displays the segment data of the initial display "00.0" of the role ratio as the role ratio display unit 68. It is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment (A6516). Thus, the character ratio can be displayed as "00.0" in the character ratio display portion 68 at the end of the big hit through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

  Also, every time the special game (big hit) ends, all the number-of-balls-acquired spheres for each character are cleared to 0. Before the end, the number of prize balls from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) is stored. Therefore, the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) calculated in step A9802 or character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) transmitted to the performance control device 300 in step A2318 is calculated. , The character ratio (characteristic ratio measured after resetting for each special game) divided for each special game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds of round games. That is, the ratio of the prizes divided for each special game (big hit) is from the end of one special game (from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game. Alternatively, it is the ratio of the winning character to the number of prize balls in the period until the end of the specific game state (high probability state or time saving state).

  The regulations require that the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) be less than or equal to the standard value (for example, continuous character ratio is 60%, total character ratio is 70%). The ratio of the prizes to the number of prize balls in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present is not stable unless the operating time of the gaming machine 10 is long. For example, if a special game (big hit) occurs while the operating time is short and the character ratio exceeds the reference value, the character ratio to the number of prize balls over the entire period shows an abnormal value. There is a possibility that it will be misjudged by the above.

  On the other hand, it is known in advance that the accessory ratios classified for each special game are unstable values and can be values that are far from the reference value. Therefore, instead of the duty ratio in the entire period, the duty ratio divided for each special game from the beginning is calculated and displayed on the display device 41, so that the player or the like himself or herself in addition to the reference value. Whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value is determined based on the knowledge and information of 1.

  Note that, similarly to the first and second embodiments, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (there is no step A6515 and A6516) of FIG. 53 is executed, and the game control device 100 causes the power supply of the gaming machine 10 to be performed. It may be configured such that the character ratio is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls) in the entire period from the throwing to the present. In addition, in the RWM, an area for accumulating and storing the number of accessory balls acquired in each of the accessory-specific acquired ball number areas is provided in correspondence with each of the accessory-specific acquired ball number areas, and the game control device 100 causes the game to play. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the character ratio with respect to the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired) in the entire period from the power-on of the machine 10 to the present time is calculated together with the character ratio divided for each special game (big hit).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment. The one-shot system command process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot system command processing is executed. finish.

  When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents the power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “N”), then it determines whether the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). When the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A3207). It is determined (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is “N”), the MODE part next generates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (A3203). It is determined whether to represent (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  When the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error / illegal command ( B1315). The error / illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command (A2108), a fraud cancellation command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). If the MODE part represents an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), error / illegal setting processing for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

  When the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then commands the MODE section to switch the production mode (for example, A5139 production). It is determined whether or not it represents a mode switching preparation command) (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

  When the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “N”), the production control device 300 then commands the MODE part to count (A3107, A3111 special winning opening count). (B1319). If the MODE part indicates a count command (result of B1319 is "Y"), count information setting processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing ends. Details of the count information setting process will be described later.

  If the MODE part does not represent the count command (the result of B1319 is “N”), then the MODE part responds to the prize ball information (the result of calculating the character ratio of A2317). (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates the information on the prize ball (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the accessory ratio setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended. The details of the accessory ratio setting process will be described later.

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the information about the prize ball (the result of B1321 is “N”), next, the MODE part determines whether or not the command of the symbol stop (B1323). ). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 and the symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1324).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1324 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special drawing (B1325), and after all the symbols stop the game. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1326), and the single-shot command processing is ended. In the process of B1326, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is a flag of “in fluctuation”, “in big hit”, “in small hit” depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

  On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (result of B1323 is “N”), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (result of B1324 is “N”), the effect control device 300 terminates the single-shot command processing.

[Count information setting process]
Details of the count information setting process (B1320) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 88) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. 89. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The count information setting process counts the number of coins acquired in the special game state, and is executed when the MODE part indicates the count among the commands received as the one-shot system command.

  First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the received count command (special winning hole count command) is a normal command (B1401). When the command is normal (the result of B1401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the current gaming machine 10 is in the big hit operation (during the big hit state) ( B1402).

  When the big hit operation is in progress (the result of B1402 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the count number in the current round by +1 to obtain the number of winning balls (the number of prize balls of the special winning opening). Here, 14) is added (B1403, B1404). In addition, when the ending of the jackpot is completed, the number of coins won is cleared to zero. The number of obtained coins is stored in the coin number area in the RAM (for example, the RAM 322).

  Next, the production control device 300 performs update setting of the number of payouts display (B1405), and ends the count information setting process. As the payout number display, the acquired payout number is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

  On the other hand, when the received command is not normal (the result of B1401 is “N”) or when the current gaming machine 1 is not in the big hit operation (the result of B1402 is “N”), the count information setting process is executed. finish.

[Handling ratio setting process]
Next, the details of the accessory ratio setting process (B1322) in the one-shot system command process (FIG. 88) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process executed by the effect control device 300. In the character ratio setting process, the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) and the continuous character ratio are stored, and these are set to be displayed. It is executed when a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio of A2317) is received.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command of the information related to the prize ball is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (result of B1501 is “N”), the accessory ratio setting process ends.

  When the command is normal (result of B1501 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total winning character ratio (B1502). When the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the total auditors product ratio (result of B1502 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B1505. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total character ratio (the result of B1502 is “Y”), the total character ratio is stored in the RAM (B1503), and the total character ratio is displayed on the display device 41. Display setting is executed (B1504).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous winning role ratio (B1505). When the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (the result of B1505 is "N"), the character ratio setting process is ended. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the continuous character ratio is stored in the RAM (B1506) and the continuous character ratio is displayed on the display device 41. Display setting is executed (B1507), and the accessory ratio setting process ends.

  It should be noted that the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received at the jackpot end timing are stored in the RAM (as a set together with the number of coins obtained at the jackpot end timing (final number of coins obtained during the jackpot). For example, it is saved in the big hit history area of the RAM 322 (B1503, B1506). In the jackpot history area, jackpot history 1, jackpot history 2, jackpot history 3, ... Are stored in the order of jackpots generated after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The ratio, the ratio of consecutive characters, and the number of coins obtained are stored as a set. Further, the total winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio are displayed on the display device 41 as a big hit history at the big hit end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The character ratio displayed at the jackpot end timing is from the end of one special game (when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game (big hit). It is the ratio of the accessory character calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the period.

  Further, in the RAM, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received at substantially the same timing at the high-probability end timing and the time saving end timing are associated and stored as one set (pair). Further, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio are simultaneously displayed on the display device 41 at the high-probability end timing and the time saving end timing according to the display settings (B1504, B1507). The ratio of the accessory displayed at the high probability end timing or the time saving end timing is the number of prize balls obtained in the period from the end of the previous special game to the end of the specific game state (high probability state or time saving state). It is the ratio of the accessory to be calculated.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the symbol-based command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The symbol-based command processing is executed in step B1210 of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area in the RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol types include outlying symbols, 4R certainty variation jackpot designs, 16R certainty variation jackpot designs, and the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable system command processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variable system command processing is executed in step B1206 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

  When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and the effect is changing. A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907). Then, the number of special figure fluctuations is updated by +1 (B1908), and the fluctuation system command processing is ended. The number of special figure fluctuations is the number of executions (start number) of the special figure fluctuation display game after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the updated number of special figure fluctuations is the special figure in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). It is saved in the variable count area.

[Big hit type command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, details of the jackpot system command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The big hit system command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

  First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the big hit type command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the big hit type command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). .. The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the fan state is set to the game state flag showing the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2103), and the big hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern).

  Production control device 300, if the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 is executed. The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to be in the round (B2105, B2106), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The interval state is set to the game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents the ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is the ending command, the effect control device 300, the effect corresponding to the character ratio and the number of winning balls during the big hit. A point addition effect display is set as an effect display when adding points (B2111). In the point addition effect display, for example, a character appears on the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect corresponding to the character ratio (both the ratio of the total character and / or the ratio of the continuous character) (B2112). The ending state is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2113), and the big hit system command processing is ended. It should be noted that the ending effect may be set in correspondence with the final number of winning balls.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit type command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit type command process without executing any process. To do.

[Production point control processing]
Next, details of the effect point control processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. The production point control process is executed in step B1011 in the main process (FIG. 78). FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the production point control processing executed by the production control device 300. It should be noted that the production points include owned points, which is a cumulative total of points acquired from past games to the present, and in-game acquisition points, which are points acquired during the current game (predetermined period).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the prefetching effect of the effect point target (the object to which the effect points are given) has been executed (B2501). The pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed based on the pre-reading symbol type command and the pre-reading variable type command, and is an effect such as a continuous effect (continuous notice), a pending change notice, a look-ahead zone notice, or the like. When the pre-reading effect of the effect point target is not executed (the result of B2501 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2504. When the pre-reading effect for the effect point is executed (the result of B2501 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of owned points (B2502), and the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2503).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the variation production of the production point target has been executed (B2504). Here, the variation effect is an effect (notice effect, etc.) related to the result of the special figure variation display game currently being executed. When the variation effect of the effect point target is not executed (the result of B2504 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2507. When the variation effect of the effect point target is executed (the result of B2504 is "Y"), the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of owned points (B2505), and the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2506).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the input condition that is the effect point target is satisfied (B2507). When there is an effect button operation for an effect point to which effect points are given, it is determined that this input condition is satisfied. When the input condition which is the target of the rendering point is not satisfied (the result of B2507 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2510. When the input condition which is the target of the effect point is satisfied (the result of B2507 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the input (here, the operation of the effect button) is added to the number of owned points (B2508), and the number of points acquired during the game is added. Points corresponding to the input (here, the operation of the effect button) are added (B2509).

  After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the addition timing at the ending of the big hit (B2510). If it is not the addition timing at the ending of the big hit (the result of B2510 is “N”), the process moves to step B2513. When it is the addition timing at the ending of the big hit (the result of B2510 is "Y"), the number of owned points is the ratio of the character (the ratio of the total character and / or the ratio of the continuous character), and the winning / winning result of the big hit this time. The points corresponding to the number of balls are added (B2511), and the character ratio (either the total character ratio and / or the continuous character ratio or both) is added to the number of points acquired during the game, and the number of coins obtained in this big hit is dealt with. Add points (B2512).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the character level-up condition is satisfied with respect to the number of points acquired during the game (B2513). For example, it can be determined that the character level-up condition is satisfied when the number of points acquired during the game is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the character level up condition is not satisfied (result of B2513 is “N”), the process moves to step B2516. When the character level-up condition for the number of points acquired during the game is satisfied (the result of B2513 is “Y”), the character level (Lv) corresponding to the character mode (for example, costume) is updated (B2514), and the character mode is changed. Drawing setting of a character level-up effect related to level-up (mode change) is made (B2515). The character level-up effect may be the level-up of the navigation character 670 described above, or may be used for the level-up of characters other than the navigation character 670.

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the point revival condition by password input is satisfied (B2516). The password input is, for example, an input by operating the effect button 25, and the password can be acquired by a mobile terminal (mobile phone or the like) by the mobile terminal interlocking service. The point recovery condition is, for example, that the password is correct. If the point revival condition is not satisfied (result of B2516 is “N”), the process moves to step B2519. When the point revival condition is satisfied (the result of B2516 is “Y”), the number of owned points is set to a value corresponding to the password content (B2517), and the character level (Lv) corresponding to the password content and effect customization information are set. Is restored (B2518). The production customization information is information for each model.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation for drawing the two-dimensional code on the display device 41 (B2519). For example, the two-dimensional code drawing operation is a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 (operation on the touch panel or pressing operation). When there is no two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2519 is “N”), the effect point control process is ended. When there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2520 is “Y”), a password is generated based on the number of owned points, the character Lv, and the production customization information (B2520), and the two-dimensional code corresponding to the generated password is generated. Drawing settings are made (B2521). After that, the production point control processing ends.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
First, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010) according to the third embodiment in the main process (FIG. 78) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hall / player setting mode processing executed by the effect control device 300. By the hall / player setting mode processing, a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of the hall (game shop) or the like can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. be able to.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B2701). When the hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is being executed. When the hall setting mode is in effect (result of B2701 is “Y”), the processing of B2706-B2716 is performed, and the operation of the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) by an attendant of the hall (game shop) or the like. Based on the, various settings and various adjustments are performed.

  When the hall setting mode is not in effect (result of B2701 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not player setting mode is in effect (B2702). When a player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being executed. When in the player setting mode (the result of B2702 is “Y”), the processes of B2720-B2725 are performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  If the player setting mode is not in effect (result of B2702 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2703). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for customers, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. Note that, “waiting for customers” means, for example, the above-mentioned waiting state for customers, and includes a customer waiting demo state in which a video for customer waiting (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B2703 is “N”), the process of B2717 is executed.

  The effect control device 300 draws a screen to start screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y”). Start setting is made (B2704). Then, the hall setting mode flag is set (B2705).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the staff member in the hall, the hall volume adjusting process (B2706), the frame decoration device 18, and the board decoration. Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B2707) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B2708) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving for power saving settings. A setting process (B2709) is executed.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes the logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B2710). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (B2711). When the operation signal for the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input processing (B1009), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B2711 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B2711 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed by the factory default setting (B2712). If there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. When it is not confirmed by the setting at the time of factory shipment (result of B2712 is “N”), the process proceeds to B2714. When it is confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B2712 is “Y”), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments according to the factory default setting is executed (B2713). The factory settings are the default settings stored in the memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or the hall adjusting data) such as the volume and various brightness determined in B2706-B2710 or B2713 is written in the backup memory (eg FeRAM 323) (B2714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B2715). Then, the hall setting mode flag is cleared (B2716).

  When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2717). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input processing (B1009) while waiting for a customer. Note that, “waiting for customers” means, for example, the above-mentioned waiting state for customers, and includes a customer waiting demo state in which a video for customer waiting (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2717 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2717 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B2718). It should be noted that, by this screen drawing, the menu display for making various selections and the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio), volume adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for volume adjustment, LED brightness adjustment. Is displayed on the display device 41 together with the brightness adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for. Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B2719).

  Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment processing (B2720) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B2721) of adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B2722). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B2723). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2723 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode process is ended. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B2723 is “Y”), screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B2724). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B2725). Note that the player setting data (or the player adjustment data) such as the volume and the brightness determined in B2720-B2721 may be erased and is not written in the backup memory.

  In the above, the drawing update setting (such as updating highlight items in the menu display) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B1009).

[Screen transition]
96A and 96B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the third embodiment, and are examples of the screen transition of the entire game.

  FIG. 96A (A) is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure variation display game. In the plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), the out-of-stop symbols of the previous special figure variable display game are displayed. In addition, a reserved digestion area 640 having a rectangular frame is displayed in the lower center of the display screen.

  In the third embodiment, the hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) includes a first holding display unit 630a that displays the first starting memory as a first holding display (first starting memory display), and a second starting memory. The second hold display unit 630b displays the second hold display (second start memory display). Three hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display on the first hold display portion 630a. The second hold display unit 630b does not currently display the hold display 633. The hold display 633b (black) is a hold display whose color has changed from the normal mode due to the hold change notice.

  The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number "3" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number. The indicated number “0” is displayed.

  (A) is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure variation display game. The effect is such that the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display portion 630a moves to the hold exhaustion area 640. Thereafter, a hold correspondence display 633a (changing hold display) indicating a hold (starting memory that was the right to execute this special map change display game) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640. Will be done. Then, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol starts in the variation display area 610, and at the same time, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration reduced symbol starts in the variation display area 615. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650, the number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number is reduced to “2”. In addition, when the result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit, the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 615 and the variable display area 610 is in a common mode (common number), but in the case of a failure, It does not have to be a common mode.

  After that, in (c), the same decorative special symbol (identification information) is stopped in the left area 610a and the right area 610b, and reach is generated. Then, after various reach effects are executed, in (d), a big hit stop symbol is displayed, and thereafter, in the special game state (big hit state), the special variation winning device is played a predetermined number of times (here, 16 times). By repeating the opening and closing times of 39, a round game for a predetermined number of rounds is executed.

  (E) shows the display screen of 8R in the middle of the big hit state (special game state). Here, the big hit round effect is performed, and the number of payout balls (B1404 and B1405 in FIG. 89) obtained during the big hit state is updated and displayed each time a winning at the special winning opening occurs. (F) shows the screen of the final round (16R).

  (B) in FIG. 96B shows the display screen of the display device 41 during the ending when the big hit state ends. During the ending, as the big hit history, the number of coins obtained during the big hit, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received by the performance control device 300 at the big hit end timing are displayed on the big hit history display unit 760. There is. The big hit history display portion 760 includes a character ratio display area 800 for displaying a character ratio. Note that the total character ratio is a so-called character ratio that is generally used, and is therefore displayed as "character ratio". The character ratio displayed here is obtained from the end of one special game (when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game (big hit). Although it is the winning character ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls, it may be the winning character ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game.

  As for the big hit history (history information), the three most recent hits (here, big hit history 1, big hit history 2, and big hit history 3) are displayed, but how many big hit histories are displayed on the big hit history display portion 760. The player can be set in the player setting mode. The jackpot history (number of coins won, ratio of all characters, ratio of consecutive characters) is displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or even if overlapped, it is displayed preferentially to the front side. It is also possible to display the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio by a pie chart or a bar graph instead of a number.

  In addition, as a point addition effect when adding effect points according to the number of wins in a big hit and the character ratio, for example, the character display 770 is displayed on the display device 41 and the dialogue display of the character 770 is displayed. The added value (100 points in this case) of the acquired payout number and the effect points is displayed on the section 770a. The character 770 and the form thereof may be set according to the added value of the effect points (and thus the number of coins obtained and the character ratio).

  Furthermore, as an ending effect (B2112 in FIG. 93) executed during the ending, an effect (decoration) in which a shooting star flows is displayed. The ending effect (including the background) may be set according to the information related to the prize ball such as the number of coins to be won or the character ratio. By the effect according to the character ratio, it is possible to determine the character ratio and the state of the gaming machine, and the interest of the game is improved. In the ending effect, the LED (board decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the center case 40 of the game board 30 is colored in a color (for example, “green”, “yellow”, “blue”) according to the accessory ratio. A decoration effect may be included in which light is emitted in the proportion of the role material becomes lower in order. In addition, the lower the character ratio, the more the number of special figure variation display games that have been consumed before the jackpot may occur, so an ending effect that gives a good impression to the player is set in order to avoid labor. Good. In addition, an ending effect that gives a better impression to the player in order to praise the player may be set as the acquired number of balls is larger. Note that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an effect other than the ending effect (for example, variable effect) is set according to the accessory ratio.

  In (h), a display screen is shown when a specific game state (high probability state or time saving state) "RUSH" occurs after the big hit state ends. In (K), the special figure 1 special figure variation display game or the special figure 2 special figure variation display game is executed in the specific game state. One hold display 633 is displayed as the first hold display on the first hold display portion 630a. Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the second hold display on the second hold display portion 630b.

  In (C), the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific game state (high-probability state or time saving state) “RUSH” is shown. The total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received by the performance control device 300 at the specific game state end timing (high probability end timing or time saving end timing) are displayed in the role ratio display area 800. The specific game state end timing is, for example, a timing at which the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes zero. The character ratio displayed here is the character ratio calculated for the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the end of one special game to the end of the specific game state. It may be a winning character ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the entire period from turning on the power to ending the specific game state. In addition, at the timing of ending the specific game state, an effect according to the character ratio may be executed.

  Note that the total character ratio is a so-called character ratio that is generally used, and is therefore displayed as "character ratio". The total character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or even if they overlap, they are displayed preferentially to the front side. It is also possible to display the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio by a pie chart or a bar graph instead of a number. After that, it shifts to the normal game state.

  FIG. 97 corresponds to (g) in FIG. 96B and shows another example of the display screen of the display device 41 at the ending when the big hit state ends. In FIG. 97, in addition to the obtained payout number, the total character ratio, and the continuous character ratio, the start number, which is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (the characteristic of B1908 in FIG. 92). The number of fluctuations in the figure) is displayed on the big hit history display portion 760. As a result, the player or the like determines whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on the number of starts in addition to the reference value, and erroneous determination is reduced. For example, if a big hit is generated when the number of starts is small (for example, 10 in FIG. 97), the character ratio exceeds the reference value (for example, 60% in the continuous character ratio and 70% in the total character ratio). However, it can be determined that it is not abnormal.

  In this case, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received at the jackpot end timing are stored in the RAM (for example, in the RAM322) as one set together with the number of winning balls and the start number at the jackpot end timing. It is saved in the big hit history area (B1503, B1506).

  Also, in FIG. 97, since the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be unfamiliar to the player, the navigation character 670 appears and the dialogue display unit 680 continuously displays the total character ratio. The explanation and definition of the character ratio are displayed. As a result, the player becomes interested in the character ratio.

  In addition, also in (B) of FIG. 96B, in the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific game state (high-probability state or time saving state) “RUSH”, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio are added. Then, the start number may be displayed in the accessory ratio display area 800.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
FIG. 98 shows an example of a display screen in the player setting mode (B2718 in FIG. 95) waiting for customers. The big hit history is displayed on the big hit history display portion 760. The continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (displayed as “character ratio”) are displayed in the character ratio display area 800 in the big hit history display portion 760. A volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) for volume adjustment and a brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) for LED brightness adjustment are displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the production control device 300 displays the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer), and a state other than waiting for a customer, that is, waiting for a customer. The configuration may be such that the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are not displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 when the demonstration is not being performed or the game ball is being fired. That is, B1504 and B1507 of the accessory ratio setting process (FIG. 90) may be omitted.

  Furthermore, on the display screen of the display device 41, a first selection unit 820 for selecting the number of jackpot history to be displayed and a second selection unit 825 for selecting the display content (display mode) of the accessory ratio are displayed as menu displays. ing. By the first selection unit 820, how many of the big hit histories (a set of the number of winning balls, the total character ratio (character ratio), the continuous character ratio, and the start number) stored in the big hit history area in the RAM It is possible to select whether to display the jackpot history (three in FIGS. 96B, 97, and 98). By the second selection unit 825, it is possible to select whether to display one or both of the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

  The player performs a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 by moving the finger in the vertical direction (movement of the touched portion), and selects a target to be set. By this touch operation, the setting target item (setting item) displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display (see the black frame of the volume adjustment display 810) is selected. That is, the items displayed in the specific display mode such as the highlight display are changed by the touch operation. It should be noted that updating of highlight items in the first selection unit 820, the second selection unit 825, and the like as the menu display is executed in the effect button input process (B1009). Note that selection of the volume and brightness values (B2720 and B2721 in FIG. 95) is performed by a touch operation by the movement of the finger in the left-right direction (movement of the touched portion). Alternatively, the displayed value or the selection of the character may be confirmed by touching the center of the touch panel 25b (B2723 or the like in FIG. 95). Further, the LED 690 portion of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  As described above, in the player setting mode waiting for customers, the menu display allows the player to select the display content (display mode) of the number of displayed jackpot histories and the ratio of accessory characters. Further, in the player setting mode waiting for customers, a volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) and a brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) are displayed, and the volume and brightness can be adjusted to the player's preference.

[Sub display device]
FIG. 99 shows a game board 30 provided with a sub display device 830. Although the example of displaying the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 has been shown above, the sub display device 830 (movable character parts) operable as shown in FIG. A configuration is also possible in which the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed. The operation of the sub display device 830 (movable accessory) is controlled by the effect control device 300 as the board effect device 44.

  In the normal position, the sub display device 830 is housed in the space on the back side of the upper effect unit 40c and most of the sub display device 830 cannot be seen in the front view. However, in the operating position, the sub display device 830 moves to the front side of the display device 41 and is entirely in the front view. Can be seen. Then, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing, the effect control device 300 moves the sub display device 830 to the operating position, and the sub display device 830 displays the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio. indicate. Therefore, at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing, the player pays attention to the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio displayed on the sub display device 830.

[Operation / Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the above-described third embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits the information related to the prize ball to the effect control device (effect control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300), among the total number of prize balls paid out by the payout control device (payout control device 200 etc.), the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable winning device. It is possible to display the accessory ratio, which is the ratio occupied by, on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). Note that the information related to the prize balls is the calculation result of the accessory ratio itself, information for calculating the accessory ratio (the number of prize balls that is the source of the accessory ratio), and the like.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable winning device or the general winning opening 35 or the like) by the display relating to the character ratio. Further, since the interest of the game is improved and the player has an impression that the variable winning device is likely to win the prize (the impression that the open state is often generated), the player becomes a motive (index) to continuously play the game. Furthermore, when the prize ratio is low, there are relatively many prizes in the general winning openings 35 and the like, so by displaying the prize ratio on the display means, the player becomes interested in the general winning openings 35 as well. And the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display history information (big hit history) on the special game a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display device (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). In this case, it is possible to display the accessory ratio divided for each special game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds in the history information. Here, the character ratio divided for each special game includes the character ratio reset and measured each time the special game ends.

  Therefore, instead of calculating the ratio of characters in the entire period, it is possible to calculate the ratio of characters classified for each special game (known to be an unstable value) and display it on the display means. The player or the like is urged to determine whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on his / her knowledge or information other than the reference value, and erroneous determination is reduced.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) may generate a specific game (high-probability state or time-saving state) during a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) special figure variation display game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. .. Further, the game control means (game control device 100) calculates the character ratio, and the calculated character ratio is used as information regarding the prize ball when the special game or the specific game ends, the effect control means (rendering). It may be transmitted to the control device 300). In this case, the character ratio can be displayed at the timing immediately after the character ratio has changed significantly (at the timing when the special game or the specific game ends). If the calculated accessory ratio is directly transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300) and displayed on the display means, the number of transmissions from the game control means (game control device 100) to the effect control device 300 is minimum. The transmission load is reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. Note that the configurations other than those described below can be applied to the configurations common to any of the first to third embodiments.

  Although the fourth embodiment is based on the third embodiment, unlike the third embodiment, the effect control device 300 has a payout command (FIG. 101) (payout command (A1719) and out ball detection command (A2017). ) Is included), and the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) is calculated by itself. Further, the effect control device 300 may calculate (count) the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 and the number of winnings, or may calculate the general winning opening ratio. The general prize-winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the general prize-winning hole 35, out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls). Of the payout performance monitoring process of FIG. 85, the process of transmitting the calculation result of the accessory ratio to the effect control device 300 (steps A9804, A9805, A2317, A2318) is not necessary and is not executed in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a discharged ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an accessory-based acquired ball number area according to the fourth embodiment. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the accessory-based acquired ball number area are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control device 100. The discharged ball number area and the acquired ball number area are the same as those in FIG. 17B of the first embodiment, but two areas, that is, the left general prize, regarding the general winning hole 35 regarding the acquired ball number area for each accessory An area for storing the total number of prize balls for winning the mouth 35 and an area for storing the total number of prize balls for winning the right general prize opening 35 are provided. As a result, the game control device 100 can calculate (count) the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 separately for the left and right sides.

  FIG. 101 is a view showing a payout command according to the fourth embodiment. The payout command according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 101) is different from the payout command of FIG. 83 according to the second embodiment in that there are two types of payout commands corresponding to the right and left general payout openings. is there. For example, in the winning prize information, "000" indicates the left general winning prize 35, "001" indicates the right general winning prize 35, and the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal. The 10 award balls are “0 AH”, and the 10 award balls due to the winning in the right general winning opening 35 are “1 AH”.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command of FIG. 101 not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. In step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), the game control device 100 prepares not only a payout command to be sent to the payout control device 200 but also a payout command to be sent to the effect control device 300 as an effect command, and thereafter, In the payout command transmitting process, the effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed. Similarly, in the game control device 100, in step A2017 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 15A), not only the out ball detection command to be transmitted to the payout control device 200 but also the out ball detection to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The command is prepared as an effect command, and thereafter, the effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In addition, the payout command and the out-ball detection command transmitted to the effect control device 300 are provided with a MODE section indicating that the information is related to the prize ball.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 stores the number-of-characters-acquired-balls area for each character, which stores the number of character-acquired balls acquired from the payout command (FIG. 101), in the RAM ( For example, in RAM322).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The one-shot system command process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). Note that the same processing as the single-shot command processing (FIG. 88) according to the third embodiment is given the same step number, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The information on the prize balls of FIG. 102 according to the fourth embodiment is the payout command of FIG. 101 transmitted from the game control device 100, and the information on the prize balls of FIG. 88 according to the third embodiment is a winning character. This is different from the command corresponding to the calculation result of the ratio.

  If the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1323 is “N”), the effect control device 300 indicates whether or not the MODE part represents the high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count. Is determined (B1327). When the MODE part represents a high-probability fluctuation count command (result of B1327 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes high-probability (time saving) end processing (B1328), and ends single-shot system command processing. When the MODE part does not represent the high-probability variation frequency command (the result of B1327 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot system command processing as it is.

[Handling ratio setting process]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The character ratio setting process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1322 of the single shot command process (FIG. 103).

  In the character ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300, based on the number of prize balls indicated in the payout command, in the RAM of the effect control device 300, the character to the acquired character number area for each character. Add and accumulate the number of balls acquired. Then, in addition to the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the right and left general prize hole ratios are calculated and stored. The character ratio setting process is executed when the effect control device 300 receives a payout command (FIG. 101) as information about the prize ball.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether the received payout command (FIG. 101) is a normal command (B3001). When the payout command is not normal (the result of B3001 is “N”), the accessory ratio setting process ends. When the payout command is normal (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the number of balls acquired for each accessory item corresponding to the payout command (that is, the winning opening information shown in the payout command) in the RAM of the effect control device 300. The number of prize balls indicated in the payout command is added to the area value (B3002). Next, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the values of the respective acquired character count areas, and are stored in the total character ratio area and the continuous character ratio area in the RAM (B3003).

  In addition, in the case of adding and accumulating the number of character acquisition balls (the number of prize balls for each character) to the area for acquiring number of character for each character for the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, the effect control device 300, It is possible to calculate the ratio of the prize to the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) is completed and all the winning ball count areas (which are in the RAM of the effect control device 300) are cleared to 0 every time the special game (big hit) is finished, the effect control device 300 sets the last special game. It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in the period from the end (from the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 before the end of the first special game) to the present.

  Next, the production control device 300 calculates the left general winning a prize ratio and the right general winning a prize ratio from the value of the winning sphere number area for each character for the general award winning prize on the left and right, and the left general winning a prize ratio in the RAM. The area and the right general winning opening ratio area are saved (B3004). Here, the left general prize opening ratio and the right general prize opening ratio are the ratios of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the left and right general prize openings 35, out of the total number of prize balls, respectively. The total number of prize balls is the sum of the values in the acquired number-of-balls region for each character.

  The effect control device 300 can calculate the general winning a prize ratio in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) is completed and all the winning ball count areas by role (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) are cleared to 0, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the last special game. It is possible to calculate the general winning a prize ratio in the period up to the present (before the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

  Further, in step B3004, the general winning a prize ratio may be calculated by adding the left general winning a prize ratio and the right general winning a prize ratio. Further, in addition to the right and left general winning opening ratios, the winning opening ratio of each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening is calculated and stored in the corresponding area in the RAM. You may. Here, the winning prize ratio is a ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the corresponding winning prize, out of the total number of prize balls.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the area for acquiring the number of prize balls for each accessory to which the number of prize balls is added in step B3002 is for the prize ball of the left or right general winning opening 35 (B3005). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the left or right general winning opening 35 has won a prize. If the added number-of-balls-by-role area for each character is not for a prize ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is "N"), that is, if there is no winning in the left or right general winning opening 35, the winning combination The material ratio setting process ends.

  Production control device 300, in the case where the added number-of-winning-balls area for each accessory is for the prize balls of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is “Y”), that is, to the left or right general winning opening 35. When there is a prize, the value of the area for acquiring the number of balls for each accessory added in step B3002 is displayed and set (B3006). Here, the added number-of-spheres-by-features area for each character is the area for number-of-acquired-balls for each prize for the award ball of the left general winning opening 35 when there is a winning in the left general winning opening 35, and the right general winning This is an area for acquiring the number of balls for each prize for the prize ball of the right general winning mouth 35 when the mouth 35 is won. The added value in the number-of-acquisition-balls-by-feature area is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the left or right general winning opening 35. Even if only one of the general winning openings 35 has won, the values of the number-of-acquired spheres for each character of both general winning openings 35 may be set to be displayed. Also, here, not only the total number of prize balls of the left or right general winning opening 35, but also the number of winnings to the left or right general winning opening 35 or the number of winnings to all the general winning openings 35 is counted, A display setting is also possible.

  Due to the above, when the number of prize balls is added to the value of the number-of-balls-by-features area for general prize holes and there is a prize in the general prize hole 35, at least the number of prize balls of the general prize hole 35 that has won this time The total (the number of acquired balls) can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  The effect control device 300 can display the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) is completed and all the winning ball count areas by role (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) are cleared to 0, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the last special game. (Before the end of the first special game, from the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine 10) It is possible to display the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 up to the present.

  Subsequently, effect setting for effecting the winning in the general winning opening 35 is executed (B3007), and the accessory ratio setting process is ended. As an effect corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 35, an LED (board decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 emits light, a sound is output from a speaker, or a movable accessory (board creating device 44). ) Works. By this effect, the interest of the game can be enhanced and the player's interest in the general winning opening 35 is increased.

  It should be noted that the effect control device 300 adds the winning combination even when the area for acquiring the number of spheres for each winning prize for each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening 35 is added. You may display and set the value of the acquired number-of-spheres area for every thing. As a result, the display device 41 (or the sub display device 830 of FIG. 99) can display the total number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) of each winning opening.

  Further, in the accessory ratio setting process, the effect control device 300 may also calculate the number of discharged balls and the payout rate based on the payout command. In this case, the effect control device 300 has, in the RAM, a discharged ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls and an acquired ball number area for storing the total of the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls). The number of discharged balls corresponds to the number of times the payout command (FIG. 101) is received, and the payout rate is the ratio (ratio)% of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls.

  Further, the effect control device 300 may back up the calculation result in the character ratio setting processing (the value of the acquired number of balls area for each character, the character ratio, the general winning a prize ratio, etc.) in the FeRAM 323.

[High probability (time saving) termination processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability (time saving) ending process according to the fourth embodiment. The high-probability (time saving) end processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1328 of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 103).

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the received high-probability fluctuation number command is a normal command (B3201). When the high-probability fluctuation count command is not normal (the result of B3201 is “N”), the high-probability (time saving) end processing is ended. When the high-probability fluctuation count command is normal (the result of B3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the high-probability fluctuation count is 0 (B3202). In the present embodiment, the number of times of high probability variation is also the number of times of short-term variation.

  Production control device 300, if the number of high-probability fluctuations (the number of time-shortening fluctuations) is not 0 (the result of B3202 is “N”), ends the high-probability (time-shortening) end processing. On the other hand, when the number of high-probability fluctuations (the number of time-saving fluctuations) is 0 (the result of B3202 is “Y”), the display settings of the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) and the right and left general prize hole ratios are set. To end the high-probability (time saving) termination process. It should be noted that the sum of the right and left general prize hole ratios may be displayed and set as the general prize hole ratio.

  In this way, the effect control device 300 always calculates the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) and the right and left general winning a prize ratio each time the payout command is received, and the high probability end timing, Also, at the time saving end timing, the display device 41 and the sub-display device 830 can display the accessory ratio and the left and right general prize hole ratio.

[Big hit type command processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit system command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The big hit system command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). The steps having the same contents as those of the big hit system command processing (FIG. 93) of the third embodiment have the same step numbers, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Rendering control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit system command is the ending command, the effect control device 300, the effect corresponding to the character ratio and the number of winning balls during the big hit. A point addition effect display is set as an effect display when adding points (B2111).

  Next, the production control device 300 sets the final winning number, together with the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) and the right and left general winning a prize ratio, as one set of jackpot history, the jackpot in the RAM. It is saved in the history area (B3401). Then, the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed (B3402). In the ending effect setting process, as a part of the ending effect, setting of display of the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) and the right and left general winning a prize ratio is also executed. It should be noted that the sum of the right and left general prize hole ratios may be displayed and set as the general prize hole ratio. The ending effect may be set in correspondence with the final number of coins to be won, the character ratio, and the right / left general prize-winning ratio.

  In this way, the production control device 300 always calculates the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) and the right and left general winning a prize ratio each time the payout command is received, and ends the big hit (ending). ), It is possible to display the accessory ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio on the display device 41 and the sub display device 830.

  The effect control device 300 calculates the character ratio and the left and right general prize hole ratio only at the jackpot end timing, the high-probability end timing, and the time saving end timing, and in the display device 41 and the sub display device 830. It is also possible to display the ratio and the ratio of right and left general winning holes.

[Screen transition]
106A and 106B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fourth embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game. Since FIGS. 106A (a)-(f) and FIG. 106B (ki)-(ko) correspond to FIGS. 96A (a)-(f) and FIG. 96B (ki)-(ko), respectively, they will be described below. The configuration is the same as that in FIGS. 106A and 106B except for the configuration.

  In (A) of FIG. 106A, since there is a winning in the left general winning opening 35, the value of the character-based acquired number of balls area (in the RAM of the performance control device 300) for the prize ball of the left general winning opening 35 is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the left general prize hole 35 is displayed by the total prize ball number display “122 total left general prize hole prize balls”. Here, it is also possible to display the number of winnings to the left general winning opening 35. Also, the total award ball count display is displayed so as not to overlap with other effects (here, reach effect), but when the display range overlaps other effects and becomes an obstacle, the total award ball count display is displayed. It does not have to be done.

  Even if there is a winning in each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2) other than the general winning opening, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning in each winning opening and the number of winnings are displayed. Good.

  In (B) of FIG. 106B, in the big hit history display portion 760 of (B) of FIG. 96B, a general winning hole ratio display area 842 for displaying the right and left general winning hole ratios is provided, and when the big hit ends timing (ending) The right and left general prize hole ratios are displayed in the prize hole ratio display area 842. It should be noted that one jackpot history contains and stores the number of winning coins, the character ratio (continuous character ratio and the total character ratio), and the right and left general prize hole ratios (B3401 in FIG. 106). Further, although the display of the continuous accessory ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. Further, in the player setting mode waiting for customers (FIG. 98), it is possible to select whether or not to display the general winning a prize ratio by the menu display (second selection unit 825).

  The general winning a prize ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of award balls obtained by winning the general winning a prize during the entire period from turning on the game machine 10 to the end of each special game, or one special game. Calculated for the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the general winning opening from the end of (from the time of turning on the gaming machine 10 before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game It may be one.

  In (B) of FIG. 106B, since the right general winning opening 35 has been won, the value of the area for acquiring the number of winning balls for each prize for the prize ball of the right general winning opening 35 (in the RAM of the performance control device 300) is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the right general prize hole 35 is displayed by the total prize ball number display “Right general prize hole total of 152 prize balls”. Here, it is also possible to display the number of winnings to the right general winning opening 35.

  In FIG. 106B (C), when the specific game state (high-probability state or time-saving state) ends, in addition to the character ratio, the right and left general prize hole ratios are displayed in the general prize hole ratio display area 842. It Although the display of the continuous accessory ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. The general winning a prize ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning the general winning a prize during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the specific game state, or the end of the special game. It may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the general winning a prize slot from the time (from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 before the end of the first special game) to the end of the specific game state.

[Operation / Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) sends a payout command (FIG. 101) to the effect control means (effect control device 300) as information related to the prize ball. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can receive the payout command (FIG. 101), calculate the accessory ratio by itself, and display it on the display device (display device 41 or sub display device 830). Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable winning device or the general winning opening 35 or the like) by the display relating to the character ratio. Further, when the prize ratio is low, there are relatively many prizes in the general winning openings 35 and the like, so that the player is also interested in the general winning openings 35 by displaying the prize ratio on the display means. Become.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can calculate the general winning opening ratio from the received payout command and display it on the display means. Therefore, the player is also interested in the general winning opening 35. Further, when the general winning opening 35 is won, the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 and the number of winnings can be calculated from the received payout command and displayed on the display means. As a result, the player's interest in the general winning opening 35 increases.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

  FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 107, with respect to the game board of FIG. 2A, while the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the collective display device 50 are deleted, the collective display device 50 is shown. A first character ratio warning display 844 (first indicator) and a second character ratio warning display 846 (second indicator) are provided.

  In addition, the performance control device 300 displays the specific values of the number of discharged balls, the payout ratio, and / or the character ratio on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 96 to 98. In this case, the performance control device 300 displays the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting state), and a state other than waiting for a customer, that is, a state where a customer waiting demonstration is not being performed, In the state where the game ball is being fired, the accessory ratio may not be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, it is possible to omit steps B1504 and B1507 in FIG. 90, the high-probability (time saving) end process in FIG. 104, and the display setting of the character ratio in step B3402 in FIG. 105.

  The first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 as the first warning notification unit is composed of one LED (light emitting unit) and lights up when the total accessory ratio exceeds the reference value (predetermined value 70%). , The warning display indicating that the total character ratio exceeds the reference value is executed. The second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 as the second warning notification unit is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and lights up when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds the reference value (predetermined value 60%). , The warning display indicating that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds the reference value is executed.

  The discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are high-cost because they are composed of a 7-segment type display device for displaying numerical values, but the discharged ball count display unit 66, Since the ball rate display section 67 and the accessory ratio display section 68 are eliminated and the first accessory ratio warning display section 844 (LED) and the second accessory ratio warning display section 846 (LED) are provided, the cost is reduced. Further, the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 of the collective display device 50 are controlled by the game control device 100 (main board) to be inspected by the test firing test institution. Therefore, the reliability of the display is ensured.

  The first accessory ratio warning display section 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display section 846 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, and on the back surface side of the gaming machine 10. It may be visible only from. Then, the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 may be installed on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. In this case, the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is sealed (caulked) so that it cannot be opened in the case, so the first character ratio warning display 844 and the second character ratio The display on the warning display unit 846 cannot be fraudulent.

  Also, instead of always displaying the warning display of the character ratio, for example, when the glass frame or the front frame is opened, an error message (glass frame opening error, front frame opening error display) and a character ratio warning are displayed. You may do so.

[Ball output performance monitoring process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of payout performance monitoring processing according to the fifth embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating process (FIG. 17A). In FIG. 108, step A9803 of FIG. 85 is replaced with steps A9803a and A9803b. The steps having the same contents as the payout performance monitoring process in FIG. 85 have the same step numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The game control device 100, after calculating both the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio based on the number of character acquisition balls (A9801, A9802), sets a warning display when the calculation result exceeds the reference value. (A9803a). When the calculation result of the total character ratio exceeds the reference value (70%), the warning display for setting the first character ratio warning display portion 844 (LED) to light is set. When the calculation result of the continuous accessory ratio exceeds the reference value (60%), the warning display for turning on the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) is set. When the calculated results of the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio exceed the respective reference values, the first character ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) and the second character ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) are displayed. Set the warning display that lights both.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the warning display in the segment area. As a result, when the warning is displayed, the first accessory ratio warning display section 844 and / or the second accessory ratio warning display section 846 are turned on.

  In addition, in addition to the first character ratio warning display section 844 and the second character ratio warning display section 846, the first character ratio for which display control is executed by the payout control device 200 as in the second embodiment. The warning display unit and the second accessory ratio warning display unit may be provided in the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 calculates the accessory ratio based on the payout command, and when the calculated result of the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value, the first accessory ratio warning display unit and the second accessory ratio warning display. Turn on the section. The first accessory ratio warning display and the second accessory ratio warning display may be provided in the upper plate unit.

  Further, the display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a warning notification unit (first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or second accessory ratio warning display unit 846) so that the accessory ratio becomes a reference value (predetermined value). When it exceeds, a warning display indicating that the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value may be displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. In this case, the production control device 300 determines whether the character ratio calculated by itself based on the payout command (FIG. 101) or the character ratio received from the game control device 100 exceeds the reference value, and the character combination is calculated. When the material ratio exceeds the reference value, a warning display is displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. Further, the upper speaker 19a and / or the lower speaker 19b may be used as a warning notification unit, and the effect control device 300 may be configured to notify by a voice from the warning notification unit when the accessory ratio exceeds a reference value. is there. Further, when the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value, an external device (such as a hall computer) may be notified via the external information terminal 71 that the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value.

[Operation / Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game control means (game control device 100) can notify that the role ratio exceeds the predetermined value when the role ratio exceeds the predetermined value. In this way, when it is notified (displayed) that the character ratio exceeds the predetermined value, the state of the gaming machine (easy to win the variable winning device or general prize) is notified by the notification (display) regarding the character ratio. It is possible to judge whether it is easy to win the prize in the mouth 35 or the like. In addition, when it is notified that the character ratio exceeds a predetermined value, the player may be interested in the general winning opening 35 because the winnings in the general winning opening 35 may be small. The interest of the game is improved.

  The warning display means (the first character ratio warning display section 844 and / or the second character ratio warning display section 846) is controlled by the game control means (game control device 100) and the character ratio exceeds a predetermined value. Can be displayed. The warning display means can be composed of, for example, one LED, but a display (the character ratio display portion 68) for directly displaying the numerical value of the character ratio is unnecessary, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits the information related to the prize ball to the effect control device (effect control device 300), and the effect control device (effect control device 300) displays the character ratio. Can also be displayed. Therefore, the player or the like can confirm the accessory ratio by a numerical value, but the display means controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided in a normal game machine, and a large increase in cost is not achieved. Absent.

  The production control means (production control device 300) may display the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display device (display device 41 or sub display device 830) only while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting state). In this case, the character ratio is shown only to the player or the like who is selecting the game machine (game table) to be used, and the character ratio is not displayed during the game. Therefore, the display of the accessory ratio does not interfere with the effect of the display device 41 during the game. Further, the control of the effect control means (effect control device 300) is simple.

  In addition, the production control means (production control device 300) can display history information (big hit history) about a specific number of times (for example, three times) on the display device (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). is there. In this case, it is possible to display the accessory ratio divided for each special game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds in the history information. Here, the character ratio divided for each special game includes the character ratio reset and measured each time the special game ends.

  Therefore, instead of calculating the ratio of characters in the entire period, it is possible to calculate the ratio of characters classified for each special game (known to be an unstable value) and display it on the display means. The player or the like tries to determine whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on his / her own knowledge and information other than the reference value, and erroneous determination is reduced.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special winning opening count number, which is the number of winnings in one big winning round of the special winning opening device 39, exceeds the upper limit value (e.g. 9) and exceeds the first threshold value (e.g. 10 to 10). When it reaches 11), the first over-winning notification for notifying that an over-winning (so-called over-winning) has occurred is performed. Furthermore, when the special winning opening count number exceeds the first threshold value and reaches the second threshold value (for example, 12 or 11 if the first threshold value is 10), the second for warning an abnormal excess winning prize Notify over-winning. The second over-winning notification is a different form of notification than the first over-winning notification. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the over-prize notification is executed in two stages according to the special winning opening count number.

[Over prize information processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the over-prize notification process according to the sixth embodiment.

  The over-prize notification process is executed by the effect control device 300 each time a game ball is won into the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39. The over-winning prize notification process is counted when a count command (big winning hole count command) is received as information about winning a prize in the big winning opening in step B1319 of the single-shot system command processing (FIGS. 88 and 102). The information setting process (B1320: FIG. 89) may be executed after the count number in the current round (the special winning opening count number) is updated by +1 (after step B1403). The special winning opening count number means the number of winnings to the special winning opening in one open state (open state, round). Further, the special winning opening count number is equal to the number of times the effect control device 300 has received or the number of transmissions from the game control device 100 of the information related to the winning of the special winning opening in one big hit round.

  In addition, the over-win prize notification process is performed when the payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) is received as the information regarding the prize ball (information regarding the winning of the game ball) in step B1321 of the single shot system command process (FIG. 102). It may be executed in the ratio setting process (B1322: FIG. 103). That is, instead of the count number in the count information setting process (FIG. 89), the number of times the payout command is received corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening in the current round can be used as the special winning opening count.

  In the sixth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command (FIG. 101) to not only the payout control device 200 but also the effect control device 300. That is, the game control device 100 prepares the payout command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), and executes the effect command setting process (FIG. 59).

  In the over-prize notification process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special winning opening count number (count number) has been updated by +1, that is, whether or not the special winning opening has received a prize (B3801). When there is no +1 update of the number of big prize holes, that is, when there is no prize in the big prize hole (the result of B3801 is “N”), the over-win prize notification process is ended. It should be noted that the number of special winning opening counts is cleared to 0 each time one big hit round is completed.

  Production control device 300, if there is a +1 update of the special winning opening count, that is, if there is a winning in the special winning opening (the result of B3801 is "Y"), the special winning opening count is greater than or equal to the first threshold value. Or not (B3802). The first threshold value is a value (for example, 10 to 11) larger than the upper limit value (for example, 9) of the special winning opening count number. When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the first threshold value (the result of B3802 is “N”), the over-prize notification process is ended.

  When the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the first threshold value (the result of B3802 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the over-winning winning number (excess winning number) as the over-winning winning number. The number of prize balls of the special winning opening (here, 14) is added (B3803). The number of over-winning balls is the total number of award balls paid out by over-winning during one big hit (during a predetermined game state). When the ending of the big hit is over, the number of over-winning winning balls is cleared to zero.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than a second threshold (B3804). The second threshold is a value larger than the first threshold of the special winning opening count number (for example, 12 and 11 may be used if the first threshold is 10). Persons involved in the hall such as staff at the (amusement store) can change.

  When the special winning opening count is not greater than or equal to the second threshold (the result of B3804 is “N”), that is, when the special winning opening count is greater than or equal to the first threshold and less than the second threshold, the special winning opening count is the upper limit value. The first over-winning notification for notifying that the number exceeds (for example, 9) (that is, occurrence of over-winning) is executed (B3805). The process of step B3805 constitutes a first notification means. In addition, the upper limit value is a special winning opening count number at which the special variable winning device 39 (special winning opening) starts closing.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the second threshold value (the result of B3804 is “Y”), that is, the special winning opening count number exceeds the first threshold value, and further the second threshold value ( For example, when the number reaches 12), the second over-winning notification for notifying the abnormal over-winning (excess winning) is executed (B3806). The process of step B3806 constitutes the second notification means.

  Even when the player is playing a normal game, the special winning opening count may accidentally reach the first threshold value. In addition, as an effect during the jackpot round, the game balls are retained in a retaining portion arranged above the special variation winning device 39 for a predetermined period, and then the retaining portion is opened to drop the game balls into the special variation winning device 39 at once. There is a game machine having such a configuration, but in the case of having such a configuration, the special winning opening count number reaches the first threshold value relatively easily. However, with respect to the second threshold value, the player performs irregular hitting as a special hitting method, or a game ball with a thread is made to enter the special variation winning device 39 and repeatedly put in and out of the special winning opening. It is difficult to reach without cheating.

[Over-winning prize notification mode]
FIG. 110A is a table showing an example of a notification mode of the first over-winning notification and the second over-winning notification. For example, the first over-winning notification and the second over-winning notification are executed using voice and / or image display as a notification method.

  In the first over-winning notification, the effect control device 300 causes the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b to play the voice of the character A (for example, “Amazing!”), And the display device 41 displays the character A and the dialogue (for example, “Amazing!”). !)) Is displayed as an image. In the second over-prize notification, the effect control device 300 causes the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b to play the voice of the character B (for example, “Koh!”), And the character B and its dialogue (for example, “Koh!”) On the display device 41. ) Is displayed as an image. The character A and the character B are different characters. For example, the characters A and B may be the main character and the enemy character in the rendering motif (subject).

  In this way, the second over-winning notification is a different form of the first over-winning notification, and the first over-winning notification gives a comfortable impression to the player, whereas the second over-winning notification is An unpleasant impression is given to the player to give a warning.

  As the voice, a simple sound or music may be used instead of the voice. For example, a blessing sound (a sound that causes a pleasant feeling to the player) may be notified as the first over-winning notification, and a warning sound (a sound that causes an unpleasant feeling to the player) may be notified as a second over-winning notification. Good.

  FIG. 110B is a table showing a light emitting mode of the LED illuminating the inside of the special winning opening as another example of the notification modes of the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification. The first over-winning notification and the second over-winning notification may be executed by using the light emission of the LED illuminating the inside of the special winning opening, in addition to the sound, the image display, or in addition to the sound and the image display as a notification method. .. The LED illuminating the inside of the special winning opening is provided in the special variation winning device 39 as one of the board decoration devices 46.

  In the first over-prize notification, the effect control device 300 causes the LED illuminating the inside of the special winning opening to emit yellow light in the meaning of celebrating the over-winning, and in the second over-winning notification, warning of the over-winning is given. The LED that illuminates the inside of the mouth is made to emit red light. The LED that illuminates the special winning opening normally emits white light. In other light emission modes, the LEDs can be made to blink in different modes as the first over-winning notification or the second over-winning notification.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 111 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the sixth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition from during the big hit round to when the big hit ends (at the ending).

  111 (S) is the same as FIG. 96A (E), and shows the screen of the eighth round (8R) of the big hit.

  In (8), in the eighth round (8R), since the special winning opening count number has exceeded the upper limit value at which the closing of the special winning opening has reached the first threshold value (for example, 10), the first over-winning prize notification is executed. Has been done. In the first over-winning notification, the character A (frog) and its line (for example, “Awesome!”) Are displayed on the display device 41. At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character A (for example, "Amazing!"). It should be noted that, as a display or sound in the first over-winning prize notification, it may be notified more directly that the special winning opening count number has reached the first threshold value (for example, “Amazing! 10 achieved!”).

  In (s), since the special winning opening count number has exceeded the first threshold value and reached the second threshold value (for example, 11) in the eighth round, the second over-winning prize notification is executed. In the second over-winning notification, the character B (snake) and its line (for example, “Koror!”) Are displayed on the display device 41. At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character B (for example, "color!"). It should be noted that, as a display or voice in the second over-winning prize notification, it may be notified more directly that the special winning opening count number has reached the second threshold value (for example, "11 is too many. Caller!"). ).

  111 (c) is the same as FIG. 96A's (f) and shows the screen of the final round (16R) of the big hit.

  (SO) in FIG. 111 corresponds to (KI) in FIG. 96B, but in the ending display device 41 at the end of the special game state (big hit), over-winning into the special winning opening during one big hit The number of payouts (the number of prize balls) acquired by is displayed as "224 cars" as the number of great-balls. Although “both” means the number here, “both” does not have to correspond exactly to the number as long as it reflects the number. For example, it is possible to display "112 cars" with "both" as a unit of two.

  By displaying the number of balls (number of prize balls) obtained by over-winning, the player can have a sense of superiority that many over-winnings can be generated, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Also, hall officials such as the hall staff may be irregularly hit by the player or may be committing fraud if he or she confirms that the number of coins won by over-winning is extremely large. Therefore, the player can be marked as the attention target person.

  Also, in the ending screen of (So), the number of obtained balls is displayed as “2016 cars”, but it is equivalent to 14 prize balls × 9 counts (upper limit number of counts) × 16 rounds = 2016. is there. That is, the number of coins obtained is the number of coins (2240) finally acquired in one big hit, minus the number of coins (the number of outstanding coins) acquired by over-winning. Further, the number of coins (number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the general winning opening 35 during the big hit is displayed as a "bonus". Here, 10 prize balls × about 3 wins per 1R × 16R = 480 are illustrated as the number of payouts obtained by winning through the general winning opening 35.

  Note that, in (SO) of FIG. 111, the right-handed display (“right-handed! →”), which is a notification for instructing the player to right-hand, is omitted, which is omitted in FIG. 96B (K). Is also running. Here, the right-handed display is information relating to the operation of the player on the operation unit (increasing the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 24), and therefore is displayed on the front side in preference to other displays. There is. Here, the right-handed display as information about the player's operation may be displayed dark, and the other displays may be displayed lightly. If the display range of the other display overlaps with the right-handed display, the other display may be displayed. Does not have to be displayed. Further, when the display range of the other display and the display range of the right-handed display overlap, these displays may be displayed alternately. That is, by displaying the information to be displayed based on a preset priority when various displays are mixed, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the display contents. Further, the other display is an effect image display in which a shooting star flows, or a display in the dialogue display portion 770a, but may also include a display in the character 770 or the big hit history display portion 760.

  111 (T) corresponds to (H) in FIG. 96B and shows a display screen when a specific game state (high probability state or time saving state) “RUSH” occurs after the jackpot state ends. Right-handed display continues to be executed after (SO).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010 in FIG. 78) according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 112, the over-prize setting process (B4001) is added to the hall / player setting mode process (FIG. 95) of the third embodiment, but other steps are the same and the same step numbers are given. And the description is omitted.

  For example, when a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined switch on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is operated, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y”). )), The Hall setting mode (B2704-B2716) can be entered.

  Rendering control device 300, after the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B2707), executes the over-win prize setting processing (B4001), and then executes the liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B2708). In the over-winning setting process, a second threshold value is set to notify and warn of an abnormal over-winning (excess winning).

[Display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 in the hall setting mode. By the screen drawing by the screen drawing start setting (B2704), various adjustment displays (meters, gauges, etc.) for making various adjustments, a menu display for making various selections, and the like are displayed on the display device 41.

  The various adjustment displays include a volume setting display 861 for selecting and setting the volume, a brightness setting display 863 for selecting and setting the LED brightness, an over-prize warning setting display 865 for selecting and setting the second threshold, and a liquid crystal brightness ( There is a liquid crystal brightness setting display 867 for selecting and setting the brightness of the display device 41. The menu display includes a power-saving setting display 869 for performing the power-saving selection setting, a logo color setting display 871 for selectively setting the issue color of the logo work, and a selected operation for confirming the selection setting. A setting confirmation operation display 873 that confirms the setting when there is an operator's setting confirmation operation (operation of pressing the effect button 25), and a factory shipment setting display 875 for performing selection setting of whether or not to set the factory shipment. is there.

  In addition, on the display screen in the hall setting mode, an operation method display 877 suggesting an operation method of the effect button 25 and a fourth symbol setting display 879 for setting the fourth symbol of the special figure variation display game are displayed. The fourth symbol (fourth special symbol) is a left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol) on the display device 41 in the decorative special symbol variable display game. As the decoration special symbol (identification information) other than the symbol, it is changed by repetition (flashing) of the lighting display and the extinguishing display, etc., indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being executed. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by the display device 41, a sub display device other than the display device 41, or an LED lamp.

  The over-prize warning setting display 865 is displayed with only one scale (one step) of the meter by default, and shows the default value of the second threshold value. Since the first threshold differs depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10, the default value of the second threshold also varies depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 can set the default value of the second threshold and the first threshold in the model setting process (B1302 of FIG. 88 or FIG. 102) according to the received model designation command (model information). In this way, the default value of the second threshold becomes a value according to the model of the gaming machine 10, so that the selective setting of the second threshold can be simplified.

  For example, if the first threshold value for over-winning is 10, the default value for the second threshold value is 11. The operator (particularly, an amusement shop staff) displays the over-winning warning setting display 865 in a specific display mode (highlighted display (see black frame)) by touching the production button 25 in the vertical direction, and the left and right of the production button 25. The value of the second threshold value is increased or decreased by the touch operation in the direction. When the production button 25 is touch-operated to the right, the number of displayed meters is increased to two scales (two levels) in the over-win prize warning setting display 865, and the second threshold value is displayed as 12 next to the meter. The meter can be adjusted on a scale of 1 to 5 (1 to 5 steps). When the setting confirmation operation display 873 is selected by a touch operation of the effect button 25 in the vertical direction and the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 (operation of pressing the effect button 25) is performed, the selected second threshold value is confirmed. In this way, the second threshold value can be flexibly set (changed) according to the intention of the game shop (hall) side.

  As a modified example of the sixth embodiment described above, the following configuration is also possible.

  Although it is configured that the over-winning notification (the first over-winning notification or the second over-winning notification) is executed each time an over-winning occurs, when the number of big winning openings reaches the first threshold value or the second threshold value ( It may be configured such that the over-prize notification is executed only immediately after) and the over-prize notification is not executed when the special winning opening count number is other than the first threshold value and the second threshold value.

  In a special game state consisting of a predetermined number of round games, the first over-winning notification or the second over-winning notification may be executed only in a specific round (specific round game). In particular, in the final round, since the time until the ending is short, it is not necessary to execute the first over-winning notification or the second over-winning notification so as not to overlap the ending.

  Also, the payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) can be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the game hall internal management device (hall computer) as an external device, and the external device can execute the over-prize notification process of FIG. 109. .. In this case, the external device does not necessarily execute the first over-winning notification, but executes the second over-winning notification.

  Furthermore, the over-prize notification of the sixth embodiment can be applied not only to the over-prize of the big winning port, but also to the over-prize of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port). For example, in a predetermined game state (specific game state, normal electric power support state, etc.), the effect control device 300 determines whether the number of winnings to the second start winning port is the reference value (during one opening of the normal variation winning device 37). For example, the first over-winning notification is executed when the first threshold (for example, three) larger than two is reached, and the second over-winning notification is executed when the second threshold (for example, four) is reached. You may. The effect control device 300 receives the payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) from the game control device 100, and counts the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) as a count number. Therefore, the over-prize notification process of FIG. 109 can be applied. As a result, with respect to the normal variable winning device 37, different over-winning notifications can be executed in two stages to increase the enjoyment of the game and warn against an abnormal over-winning (over-winning).

[Operation / Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 has a predetermined game state (special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game or general figure variation display game) is a predetermined result. It is possible to generate a specific game state (normal support state). The variable prize device (special variable prize device 39 and normal variable prize device 37) is in an open state (open state, operating state) in a predetermined game state, and is in a closed state (non-open state, non-operating state) in the open state. It becomes easy to win game balls. The detection means (count switch 39a (large winning opening switch) and starting opening 2 switch 37a) detects the winning of the game ball into the variable winning device.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) directs information (a special winning opening count command or a payout command) regarding the winning of the game ball when the detecting device detects the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device. It transmits to the control means (production control device 300). The first notification means (B3805 of FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) indicates that the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device (or the number of times of transmitting information relating to winning of the game ball) is one. When the first threshold value is reached in the open state, the first over-winning prize notification (first over-winning prize notification) is executed. The second notification means (B3806 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) reaches the second threshold value, which is larger than the first threshold value in one open state, when the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device is one. In this case, the second excess winning notification (second over winning notification) is executed. For example, the notification mode of the second excess prize notification may be a warning, unlike the notification mode of the first excess prize notification.

  When the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device exceeds the upper limit value (specified number of times, reference value) or the first threshold value and becomes equal to or more than the second threshold value, the number of winnings is abnormally large and the possibility of chance is low. .. However, with the above configuration, when such an abnormal over-winning (over-winning) occurs, it is possible to warn by the second over-winning notification (second over-winning notification).

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can change the second threshold value in accordance with an operation (touch operation or the like) on the operation means (effect button 25) operable by the player. Is. Therefore, the second threshold value for issuing a warning can be easily changed according to the intention of the game shop (hall).

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has the number of winnings to the variable winning device in a predetermined game state (special game state or specific game state) once or more than a first threshold value. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out is totaled (B3803 in FIG. 109), and the total number of prize balls is displayed on the display means (display device 41) at the timing when the predetermined game state ends. Therefore, the player can know how much the over-winning can be generated in the predetermined game state, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, hall personnel such as the hall staff may be irregularly hit by the player or may be cheating if the total number of coins obtained by over-winning is extremely large. Can recognize sex.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control device 300 uses the variable effect setting process (B1905 of FIG. 92) to change the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game as a changing effect (fluctuation effect) to a temporary stop mode ( (Sway fluctuation). The variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) executed by the effect control device 300 constitutes temporary stop executing means.

  FIG. 114 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol (identification information: left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in the decorative symbol variation display game according to the seventh embodiment. At the start of the decorative special figure variation display game, the left symbol 891 (first special symbol), the right symbol 892 (second special symbol), the middle symbol 893 (third special symbol) all start to vary. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time Ta from the start of fluctuation, the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, and the temporarily stopped left symbol (first stop symbol) is shaken and fluctuated. This swing fluctuation serves as a notice effect that gives a notice that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state when the right symbol 892 stops. For example, the reach is generated by increasing the swing width (motion width) of the swing fluctuation after the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, as compared with the case where the decorative special figure variation display game is stopped without the reach being generated. The player is informed of the possibility of doing so.

  Next, after a lapse of a predetermined time Tb from the start of fluctuation, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops and reaches the reach state, and both the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (second stop symbol) are shaken by the vibration operation. Shake fluctuations. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time Tc from the start of variation, the middle symbol 893 is temporarily stopped and is in a symbol confirmation waiting state, the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 (the 3 stop pattern) shakes and fluctuates by vibrating motion. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time Td from the start of the fluctuation, the swing fluctuation ends and the three stop symbols are completely stopped to fix the symbol, and the result (stop symbol) of the decorative special figure variable display game is a big hit result (special result mode). ) Or deviate from the result.

  If the symbol is not fixed, the re-variation may be started before the predetermined time Td elapses to give a pseudo-continuous notice. In particular, in the pseudo continuous notice, the re-changing symbol may be temporarily stopped as the medium symbol 893. In the pseudo continuous notice (pseudo continuous production), the decoration special symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stopped) in a stop mode other than the special result mode, and then pseudo-varied (re-flucted) repeatedly, thus changing a plurality of times. Performs an effect as if the display game is being played continuously.

  After the symbol fixing timing Td when the symbol is fixed, the time (period) for displaying the fixed decorative special symbol is the symbol stop display time (for example, the time from Td until the next decorative special symbol variable display game starts) Then, for example, 600 msec). In the present embodiment, the time (Td-Tc) in the symbol determination waiting state from the intermediate symbol stop timing Tc at which the intermediate symbol 893 is temporarily stopped to the symbol determination timing Td is set longer than the symbol stop display time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player fully have the expectation of changing again in the symbol confirmation waiting state.

  FIG. 115 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the seventh embodiment, and the reach occurrence of (d) from the temporary stop (reach notice state) of one symbol of (na). It is an example of a screen transition showing the state of the decorative special figure variable display game after the temporary stop of the three symbols of (nu) (the state of waiting for symbol determination).

  (Na) of FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Ta, and as the first temporary stop state, only the left symbol 891 temporarily stops due to the fluctuation and starts the reach announcement. At the time of this reach announcement, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 is swinging (vibrating) with a large motion width V1 (first motion width). Since the movement width (amplitude) of the left symbol 891 is large, the player can pay attention and know in what symbol the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped and reach.

  The left pattern 891 swings around the reference position only in the vertical direction (vertical direction), but instead has a large motion width (amplitude) W1 only in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). You may make the fluctuation fluctuation of. The lateral movement width W1 may be the same as or different from the vertical movement width V1. Further, when the left symbol 891 vibrates in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, the vibrations in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction may have the same phase or the opposite phase to perform the swing fluctuation in an oblique direction. Further, the left pattern 891 can move in a circular or elliptical shape by shifting the phase of vibration in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction from the same phase or the opposite phase.

  (D) of FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Tb, and as the second temporary stop state, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped following the left symbol 891 and the reach occurs. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 vibrate and vibrate in the second motion width (V2 or W2). Since the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are operated by swing fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player that they are in a temporarily stopped state where they are not completely stopped.

  The manner of swing fluctuation of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (direction of swing fluctuation of each symbol, operation width, etc.) may be the same or different. If they are the same, the interest of the game is enhanced by the sense of cooperation between the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and if they are different, the player can be surprised.

  The motion width V2 in the vertical direction of the symbol (or the motion width W2 in the horizontal direction) at the time of this reach occurrence is, Smaller than () (V1> V2, W1> W2). Therefore, the fluctuation fluctuation in (d) does not interfere with the reach production of a movie or the like.

  (Nu) of FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of a predetermined time Tc, and as a third temporary stop state, the middle symbol 893 is also temporarily stopped following the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and the three symbols are Start shaking fluctuations. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 vibrate and vibrate in the third motion width (V3 or W3). The mode of swing fluctuation of all the symbols temporarily stopped (direction of swing fluctuation of each symbol, operation width, etc.) may be the same or different. In addition, the third motion width may be set depending on whether or not the special figure variation display game has a special result (big hit). For example, the third motion width may be set to be larger when the result of the decorative special figure variable display game is out of alignment than when it is a big hit. That is, in this case, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that re-variation will be performed even in the case of failure, and improve the interest of the game.

  The operation width V3 in the vertical direction (or the operation width W3 in the left-right direction) of the symbol in the symbol confirmation waiting state is the operation width V1 in the vertical direction of the symbol (or the operation width in the left-right direction) at the time of the reach announcement of (na). Smaller than (W1) (V1> V3, W1> W3), and is (V2 ≧ V3) which is the operation width V2 in the vertical direction (or the operation width W2 in the left / right direction) of the symbol when the reach of (d) occurs. , W2 ≧ W3).

  As described above, the temporary stop executing means (variable effect setting process and the like) has the number of pieces of identification information to be temporarily stopped after the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) being larger than that of the first temporary stop. By executing the stop (later temporary stop), the vibration width of the identification information in the first temporary stop can be set to be larger than the vibration width of the identification information in the second temporary stop. The first temporary stop (first temporary stop) is a temporary stop that is executed first, and is 1 if the second temporary stop (second temporary stop) is the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 115). This corresponds to the temporary stop ((na) in FIG. 115) for the second time. If the second temporary stop is the third temporary stop ((nu) in FIG. 115), the first temporary stop corresponds to the first or second temporary stop ((na) (d) in FIG. 115).

  As described above, the seventh embodiment embodies the following invention.

(1) A display device that can display a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbol), and an effect that can control the display of the variable display game on the display device. In a gaming machine equipped with control means,
The effect control means includes a temporary stop execution means capable of executing a temporary stop for vibrating and displaying at least one piece of identification information on the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game (see FIG. 92). B1905, FIG. 114, FIG. 115),
The temporary stop executing means, after the first temporary stop (for example, (a) in FIG. 115), the second temporary stop (for example, ((in FIG. 115) in which the number of identification information to be temporarily stopped is larger than that in the first temporary stop. D) or (nu)) is executed, and the vibration width (amplitude V1) of the identification information in the first temporary stop is set to be larger than the vibration width (amplitude V2 or V3) of the identification information in the second temporary stop. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

  (2) The game machine according to (1), wherein the effect control means can execute a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop and the pseudo fluctuation after the temporary stop are repeated in the display device.

  (3) The effect control means sets the vibration width of the identification information in the temporary stop according to whether or not the variable display game has a special result (big hit) (1) or ( The game machine described in 2).

[Operation / Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described seventh embodiment, the vibration width of the identification information is such that the second temporary stop executed after the first temporary stop is larger than the first temporary stop executed first (for example, (a) in FIG. 115). (For example, (d) or (d) in FIG. 115). Therefore, the vibration width of the identification information in the temporary stop state can be gradually reduced toward the end of the decorative special figure variation display game (determination of the identification information), and an unprecedented novel effect can be performed. The interest of the game is improved. In the conventional gaming machine, the vibration width of the identification information in the temporarily stopped state is not taken into consideration, and there is room for improvement in the interest of the game.

[Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment]
Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a timing chart for explaining a movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special symbol variable display game according to the first modification. FIG. 117 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the first modification. Note that (d) and (nu) in FIG. 117 are the same as (d) and (nu) in FIG. 115.

  In the first modified example of the seventh embodiment, an example in which reach is developed into SP reach is shown. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), at the time Tba from the start of fluctuation, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped and is in the reach state. Then, at time Tbb, the reach develops into an SP reach. After the SP reach is developed, in order to display the SP reach effect (movie or the like) in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left design 891 and the right design 892 are the upper left and the upper right, respectively, as shown in FIG. To the corner of. Then, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 that have moved to the corners are changed from the normal mode to the special mode so as to erase the others while leaving only the numeral part, and perform swing fluctuation in the temporary stop state. That is, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 located in the corners are displayed and temporarily stopped in a reduced-sized special mode that is smaller than the normal-sized normal mode (FIG. 117 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (nu), at the middle symbol temporary stop timing Tc, the three symbols that have been temporarily stopped after the SP reach is vibrated and shakes. Here, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 have returned to the normal size.

  Here, the variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) and the like executed by the effect control device 300 constitutes an identification information changing unit capable of changing the identification information (decorative special symbol) from the normal mode to the special mode. .. Then, the identification information changing unit (variable effect setting process or the like) executes the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) before the identification information is changed to the special mode, and after the identification information is changed to the special mode. A second temporary stop (a subsequent temporary stop) is executed. Therefore, in the time between the first temporary stop and the second temporary stop, the interest of the game can be enhanced by changing the identification information (decorative special symbol), and a special effect (SP reach effect, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. You can make room for the display.

  By the way, in this modification, the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) corresponds to the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 117), and the second temporary stop (the latter temporary stop) is the third temporary stop. This corresponds to the stop ((nu) in FIG. 117). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) corresponds to the first temporary stop ((na) in FIG. 115), and the second temporary stop (the latter temporary stop) is the second or the third temporary stop. It may correspond to the second temporary stop ((d) (nu) in FIG. 117).

  The time in the symbol confirmation waiting state (Td-Tc) is set longer than the time from time Tba to time Tbb (Tbb-Tba). Therefore, it is possible to make the player fully have the expectation of changing again in the symbol confirmation waiting state.

  Further, in FIG. 116, the motion width (V1, V2, W1, W2, V3, W3) in the swing fluctuation of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and / or the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 is The larger the value, the shorter the time (period) in which the shaking fluctuation continues may be set. On the contrary, the smaller the motion width in the fluctuation of swing, the longer the period (period) of continuous fluctuation of swing may be set. For example, the duration of the swing fluctuation is lengthened by making it inversely proportional to the operation width in the swing fluctuation. That is, when the fluctuation motion of the fluctuation fluctuation is large, the player's expectation that the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative special symbol will continue is high, and conversely, the fluctuation fluctuation time is set short. When the fluctuation motion of the fluctuation fluctuation is small, the expectation that the fluctuation fluctuation continues is low, so conversely, the fluctuation fluctuation time is set longer. This makes it possible to appropriately adjust the symbol determination timing to keep the expectation of the big hit while keeping the expectation of the big hit from the big hit player.

[Modification 2 of Seventh Embodiment]
Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special figure variable display game according to the modified example 2, and FIG. 118A is a case where the result of the special symbol variable display game is a big hit. And (B) shows a case where the result of the special figure variation display game is off, which is off variation. FIG. 119 is a display screen of the display device 41 in the symbol confirmation waiting state in Modification 2, and (nu-1) shows a case where the result of the decorative special figure variable display game is a big hit, (nu-2). Indicates a case where the result of the decorative special figure variable display game is out of order. Note that (nu-1) and (nu-2) in FIG. 119 correspond to (nu) in FIG. 115.

  When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place than when it is a big hit, the fluctuation fluctuation operation time from the temporary stop of the middle symbol to the symbol confirmation timing (the period of the symbol confirmation waiting state) May be made longer and / or the operation width of the fluctuation fluctuation may be increased in this operation time. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation that re-variation will be performed even in the case of failure, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 118, when the symbol determination timings when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit and when the symbol determination timings are time Tda and Tdb, respectively, the period of the symbol determination waiting state when the symbols are lost ( Tdb-Tc) may be longer than the period (Tda-Tc) in the symbol confirmation waiting state in the case of a big hit. As in (nu-1) and (nu-2) of FIG. 119, in the symbol confirmation waiting state, the motion width of the fluctuation fluctuation of the temporarily stopped design is the motion widths V4 and W4 in the case of the deviation, It may be larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 in the case of a big hit (V4> V3, W4> W3). The operation widths V4 and W4 in the case of the out-of-range may be larger than the operation widths V2 and W2 in the reach state (V4> V2, W4> W2), or may be the operation widths V2 and W2 in the reach state or less ( V4 ≦ V2, W4 ≦ W2).

  As shown in (nu-3) and (nu-4) of FIG. 120, the modified example 2 may be applied to the case of the big hit without the re-lottery and the big hit with the re-lottery. That is, even if the modified example 2 is applied, the cases of (No-1) and (No-2) in FIG. 119, which are different from the case of big hit, are replaced with the case of big hit without re-lottery and the case of big hit with re-lottery, respectively. Good. In addition, re-lottery means, for example, changing the regular jackpot design (or probability jackpot design) that has been temporarily stopped to a probability variation jackpot design (or regular jackpot design) by re-changing when winning the re-lottery. Say.

  In (nu-3) of FIG. 120, the probability variation big hit symbol is displayed as, for example, "seven, seven, seven", and in (nu-4) of FIG. 120, the normal big hit symbol is displayed as, for example, "two, two, two". Has been done. In the symbol confirmation waiting state, the motion width of the fluctuation fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is such that the operation widths V4 and W4 in the case of the big hit with re-lottery are larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 in the case of the big hit without re-lottery. It may be increased (V4> V3, W4> W3). Thereby, in the case of a big hit with re-lottery, it is possible to notify the player of the possibility of re-variation due to re-lottery.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 133. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventh embodiments.

  FIG. 121A is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 according to the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU 111a is shown as the CPU core 102. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80 CPU. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU core 102 has a register configuration different from that of the related art (for example, JP2013-233285A).

  The CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) shown in FIG. 121A has a W register 1201A, an A register 1202A, a B register 1204A, a C register 1205A, a D register 1207A, an E register 1208A, an H register 1210A, and an L register, each of which has a width of 8 bits. 1211A is provided.

  These general-purpose registers can also be used as a WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) having a width of 16 bits by combining the W register 1201A and the A register 1202A. Similarly, a BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) in which the B register 1204A and the C register 1205A are combined, a DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) in which the D register 1207A and the E register 1208A are combined, and an H register 1210A. It is also possible to use the HL register 1212A (pair register, register pair) in which the L register 1211A and the L register 1211A are combined.

  Further, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) includes an IX register 1231a and an IY register 1232a each having a width of 16 bits. The IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a are used as indexes when the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 described later accesses data. Further, as described later, the IY register 1232a can be used as a head address designation register for setting the head address of the RAM 111c (work area storage unit) in the address space (or memory space).

  These general-purpose registers form one general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. On the other hand, the CPU core 102 includes another general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 1) 1220B having the same (or similar) configuration as the general-purpose registers included in the register group 1220A of the register bank 0.

  The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes W registers 1201B to L registers 1211B having the same functions as the W registers 1201A to L registers 1211A of the register bank 0. Similar to the register bank 0, these registers can also be used as 16-bit registers as the WA register 1203B to HL register 1212B. Further, the register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes an IX register 1231b and an IY register 1232b having the same functions as the IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes a flag register 1200 having a width of 8 bits.

  The flag register 1200, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 121B, stores the calculation result using the register. Further, a register bank selector (RBS) 1301 (described later in FIG. 121B) of the flag register 1200 selects which of the two general purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is to be used as a calculation target.

  Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is used for calculation by an instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 described later. On the other hand, each register belonging to the unselected register group holds the value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is changed and becomes a selection target.

  The CPU core 102 also includes a DP register 1230. The DP register 1230 can be used, for example, to store the start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space). Various tables and data are stored in the data area.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes an SP register 1233, which has a width of 16 bits, and functions as a stack pointer, and a PC register 1234, which functions as a program counter.

  The stack pointer 1233 indicates the position of the area when storing data (or extracting data) in the stack area. The program counter 1234 indicates the address where the instruction executed by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 described later is stored.

  The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 executes the game control program and performs arithmetic processing using each register inside the CPU core 102. Specifically, the ROM 111b reads the data stored at the address indicated by the program counter 1234, regards the read data as a code, and executes the instruction corresponding to the code. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes the instructions included in a predetermined instruction set.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is exemplified as the arithmetic processing unit, but inside the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 plays a main role to fulfill the function of the arithmetic processing unit. There is. The RAM 111c serves as update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102), and can store and retain the stored information even if a power failure occurs due to a backup power supply. It becomes a storage means.

  The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 corresponds to the instruction of the game control program (game control program) via the access circuit 1243, the address bus 721, and the data bus 722, and the ROM 111b (user program outside the CPU core 102). Data may be exchanged between the ROM), the RAM 111c (user work RAM), and other circuits. The address bus 721 is configured by a 16-bit signal line, and the CPU core 102 outputs the address specified by the address bus 721 and is stored in the address specified by the data bus 722 (addresses of the ROM 111b, RAM 111c, etc.). Input and output data.

  Further, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 stores the address where the next instruction is stored in the program counter 1234 every time the instruction of the ROM 111b is executed one by one. In this way, the game control program is sequentially executed by repeatedly executing the instruction and updating the program counter 1234. When the interrupt signal is received from the interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to the preset address value of the interrupt process.

  Data is transferred to and from the registers provided in the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 and the CPU core 102 by the internal bus 1235.

  The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit that sets an initial value to each register included in the CPU core 102 by hardware.

  When the built-in reset circuit 1240 receives the reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it activates the initial value setting circuit 1241 and sets the initial values in the registers included in the CPU core 102. Then, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 is activated.

  FIG. 121B is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the flag register 1200 according to the eighth embodiment. The value of each bit of the flag register 1200 is set by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 121B.

  An interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag for setting permission / prohibition of interrupt processing by an interrupt signal. Set (value is “1”) enables and clear (value is “0”) disables. ..

  The register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag that selects which of the two general purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is used when the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 in FIG. Is "1"), the register group 1220B of the register bank 1 is selected, and the clear (value "0") selects the register group 1220A of the register bank 0.

  The overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (the value is "1") when a digit overflow occurs in the general-purpose register to be operated by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (the value is "0") in other cases. ..

  The sign flag (SF) 1303 is set (value is “1”) when the most significant bit of the general-purpose register to be operated becomes “1” by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. It

  The half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (the value is "1") when carry (carry) or borrow (borrow) occurs at the 4th bit of the general-purpose register to be operated as a result of performing 8-bit operation. , In other cases, it is cleared (value is “0”).

  The carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (value is “1”) when carry (carry) or carry (borrow) occurs by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. ..

  The zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (value is "1") when a predetermined arithmetic operation result is "0", and is cleared (value is "0") in other cases.

  The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (the value is “1”) when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 and the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set. Alternatively, even when the arithmetic processing is not performed, when the value of the general-purpose register becomes the value of "00h", it is set (the value is "1"). When none of these conditions are satisfied, the value is cleared (value is "0").

  When the CPU core 102 is reset, all bits of the flag register are set to 0.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a procedure of power-on processing executed by each device (game control device 100, payout control device 200, and effect control device 300) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on in the eighth embodiment. ..

  Specifically, FIG. 122 (A) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the game control device 100, and FIG. 122 (B) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the payout control device 200. (C) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the effect control device 300.

  First, the process at power-on of the game control device 100 (FIG. 122 (A)) will be described. This power-on process is not executed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but is executed by various hardware (hardware around the CPU core 102) included in the game control device 100. Processing.

  First, the game control device 100 receives the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10101).

  This reset signal is supplied from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125, the security circuit 725 (see FIG. 121A) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the RAM access control circuit provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 (see FIG. 121). It is input to the reset terminal of the flip-flop circuit in (not shown) and the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit (not shown) provided in the game microcomputer 111. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits data to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication by means of a serial communication circuit. Specifically, when power is turned on, a reset signal is input to these reset terminals by applying a voltage of a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) or less for a predetermined time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a predetermined signal is input. The reset signal is not input when the voltage of 1 is applied.

  Note that, when a reset signal is input from the power supply device 400, the security circuit 725 continues to output the reset signal to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102 until the security check processing described later is completed, and waits for the activation of the CPU core 102. Let

  Further, the reset signal is transmitted from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to various input ports (first input port 122 and the like) and various output ports (second output port 134, third output port 135-1, 135-2, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137).

  When a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit, the voltage levels of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware ( A10102). When a reset signal is input to the reset terminals of the various output ports, all are set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by hardware (A10102).

  Next, the RAM access restriction circuit provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 causes a RAM write-inhibited state in which writing to the RAM 111c is restricted (A10103). It is possible to prevent the RAM 111c from being updated at an incorrect timing by generating the RAM write-protected state when the power is turned on.

  Next, the security circuit 725 (FIG. 121A) to which the reset signal is input executes self-diagnosis processing (A10104). The self-diagnosis process is a process of determining whether or not the security circuit 725 has been initialized.

  If the self-diagnosis processing determines that the security circuit 725 has been initialized, the security circuit 725 executes the security check processing (A10105). The security check process is a process of determining the correctness of the program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3) by using the correctness confirmation information stored in the HW parameter ROM (not shown) of the gaming microcomputer 111. is there.

  When the security check process is executed in the process of step A10105, the process proceeds to the game control device program start preparation process. At this time, the security circuit 725 stops the reset signal output to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102, so that the CPU core 102 is activated. Therefore, the game control device program start preparation process is executed by the CPU core 102. The game control device program start preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

  Next, the power-on process of the payout control device 200 (FIG. 122 (B)) will be described. The payout control device 200 is provided with a microcomputer having the same configuration as the gaming microcomputer 111, as well as various input ports and various output ports.

  First, in the payout control device 200, the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 is transmitted via the Schmitt buffer 132 (A10111). The process of step A10111 is the same as the process of step A10101.

  When a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit of the payout control device 200, the voltage levels of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware. (A10112). When a reset signal is input to the reset terminals of the various output ports of the payout control device 200, all are set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by the hardware (A10112).

  Next, the RAM access prohibition circuit 640 of the payout control device 200 causes a RAM write prohibition state in which writing to the RAM 214 is restricted (A10113). The specific description of the process of step A10113 is the same as the process of step A10103.

  Next, the security circuit 725 of the payout control device 200 to which the reset signal is input executes the self-diagnosis process (A10114). The specific description of the process of step A10114 is the same as the process of step A10104.

  Then, when it is determined by the self-diagnosis processing that the security circuit 725 is initialized, the security circuit 725 executes the security check processing (A10115). The specific description of the process of step A10115 is the same as the process of step A10105.

  Then, the payout control device 200 executes an initialization process when the power is turned on (A10116). The initialization process when the power is turned on is a process for initializing the RAM and the like, and is executed by the CPU of the microcomputer of the payout control device 200. Further, before the RAM is initialized, the RAM write inhibit state generated in the process of step A10113 is released, and the RAM becomes the RAM write enable state.

  Next, the payout control device 200 generates a state in which a command from the game control device 100 can be received (A10117). Then, the CPU of the payout control device 200 determines whether the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10118). In the process of step A10118, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is not the initialization command (result of A10118 is “N”), the process waits until the initialization command is fetched.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is the initialization command (the result of A10118 is “Y”), the payout control device 200 executes the initialization process at the start of communication ( A10119), and proceeds to the payout control device main processing.

  Next, the power-on process (FIG. 122 (C)) of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) will be described.

  First, the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) receives the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10121). The process of step A10121 is the same as the process of step A10101.

  When a reset signal is input to the effect control device 300, the output port of the effect control device 300 and the serial communication circuit (interface chip (command I / F) 331) are initialized by hardware (A10122).

  Then, effect control device 300 executes an initialization process when the power is turned on (A10123). The initialization process when the power is turned on is a process of initializing the RAM 322 and the like, and is executed by the CPU 311.

  Next, the production control device 300 causes a state in which the command from the game control device 100 can be received (A10124). Then, it is determined whether the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10125).

  When it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is not the initialization command (result of A10125 is “N”), the effect control device 300 waits until the initialization command is fetched.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is the initialization command (the result of A10125 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 is the initialization process at the start of communication. Is executed (A10126), and the process proceeds to the effect control device main processing.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating the game control device program start preparation process according to the eighth embodiment. The first half of the game control device program start preparation process (until the reset address is set in the program counter 1234) is not the process executed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3) but the CPU core. This is a process executed by the initial value setting circuit 1241 (see FIG. 121A) included in 102.

  Upon receiving the reset signal from the security circuit 725, the CPU core 102 causes the built-in reset circuit 1240 to operate the initial value setting circuit 1241. At this time, the built-in reset circuit 1240 makes the operation of the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 stand by until the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets the initial value in each register.

  When the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operation, an initial value “29FFh” is set in the stack pointer 1233, an initial value “2800h” (start address of the RAM 111c) is set in the IY registers 1232a and 1232b, and an initial value is set in the DP register 1230. The value "5000h" (start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b) is set, the reset address "4000h" is set in the HL register 1212A, and the value "00h" (16 bits is set in other registers. The value "0000h") is set in the register (A10201). The reset address may be "0000h".

  Next, the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets the value of “4000h”, which is the reset address, in the program counter 1234 (A10202). As a result, the initial value is set in each register. Next, the built-in reset circuit 1240 operates the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 that has been waiting, and the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 shows the address indicated by the program counter 1234 (corresponding to the reset address of the ROM 111b in which the game control program is stored). To start executing the program. The processing after the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 starts executing the program will be described in the game control apparatus main processing of FIG. 124A.

  124A and 124B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main process according to the eighth embodiment. The main processing is executed by the game control device 100. It should be noted that the same steps as the main processing (FIGS. 5A and 5B) according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof is omitted.

  124A and 124B, steps A1004, A1013, A1015, A1034, A1038, A1039, and A1045 of FIGS. 5A and 5B are deleted, and steps A10301-A10304 and A10401-A10405 are newly provided.

  In step A10301, the game control device 100 sets a start address (here, “2800h”) of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register 1232a). In step A10302, the game control device 100 sets a start address (here, “5000h”) of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register 1230).

  In this way, by setting the start address of the RAM 111c or the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b as a reference address in a predetermined register, the address designation in the subsequent code (instruction) is performed with a relative address or an offset address from the reference address. In some cases, it may be sufficient to use (difference from the reference address). In this case, if the relative address and the offset address are limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address “xxxxxh”), the number of bytes of the code (machine language instruction) decreases (for example, (3 bytes instruction is reduced to 2 bytes instruction), the whole program becomes compact and the storage capacity required for storing in the ROM 111b is also reduced.

  The processing from steps A1001 to A10302 can be omitted because it is executed by the hardware (initial value setting circuit 1241) also in the game control device program start preparation processing (FIG. 123), but duplicated software ( It is possible to operate the CPU 111a normally even in a noisy environment by executing the setting process in the program).

  In step A10303, the game control device 100 sets a write enable state of a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM. It should be noted that in the eighth embodiment, the RWM may always be in the read permission state.

  In step A10304, the game control device 100 sets the serial communication circuit of the game microcomputer 111 (which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200).

  The game control device 100 executes the initial value random number update process (A1035) and the random number update process 2 (A10402) after prohibiting the interrupt in step A10401. The random number update process 2 (FIG. 126) of the eighth embodiment is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variable display game, but is different from the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. It will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of times (for example, twice) to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus (A1036), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. If (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036 (A10404). .. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A10404 is "N"), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, the game control device 100 outputs all when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A10404 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure occurs. Off data is output to the port (A1040).

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not turned on (result of A1037 is “N”), the game control device 100 permits the interrupt (A10403), and then returns to the process of step A10401 to prohibit the interrupt. That is, if no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number updating process, the random number updating process 2 and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeatedly performed during the interrupt prohibition period from steps A10401 to A10403.

  During the interrupt disabled period in which interrupts are disabled, there is no change or destruction of information in the register (data stored in the register) due to interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 125), and initial value random number update processing The random number update process 2 and the power failure monitoring signal can be checked normally. On the other hand, the transition period from step A10403 to A10401 is the interrupt permission period during which the interrupt is permitted. However, during this interrupt permission period, processing other than interrupt processing is not executed, so the information in the register is changed by the interrupt processing. There is no problem even if there are such things.

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 5B), when the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check are executed during the interrupt permission period (steps A1034 to A1039), the interrupt process causes the register In order to prevent the information from being changed or destroyed, the register bank 0 used in the main process is switched to the register bank 1 used in the interrupt process (A1003, A1301). The information of the register used in the processing is saved (PUSH) in the stack area of the RAM 111c. However, in the eighth embodiment, it is not necessary to switch register banks or save register information during interrupt processing. That is, basically, only the register bank 0 is used in the eighth embodiment, and there is no problem.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the eighth embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the game control device 100. The same steps as the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) according to the first embodiment are given the same step numbers, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 125, A1301 and A1302 of FIG. 8 are deleted, and steps A10501 and A10502 are newly provided.

  In step A10501, the game control device 100 sets the start address “2800h” of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register) as in step A10301. In step A10502, the game control device 100 sets the start address “5000h” of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register), as in step A10302. In this way, by setting the start address of the RAM 111c or the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space) as a reference address in a predetermined register, the address designation in the subsequent code (instruction) can be performed. In some cases, a relative address or an offset address (a difference from the reference address) from the reference address can be used, and the number of bytes (storage capacity) of the code (machine language instruction) is reduced.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2 according to the eighth embodiment. The random number update process 2 is executed by the game control device 100. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3. The random number update process 2 according to the eighth embodiment is executed by a non-conventional instruction (code) (see FIG. 141 described later) included in the instruction set that the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 can interpret and execute. It is simplified from the random number update process 2 of the embodiment (FIG. 14).

  The game control device 100 first increments (increases by 1) the variation pattern random number 1 and updates it (A10601). Here, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 has a data size of 2 bytes and circulates in the range of 0 to 65535.

  Next, the game control device 100 increments (increases by 1) the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and updates it (A10602), and subsequently decrements (decreases by 1) the fluctuation pattern random number 3 and updates (A10603). The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is 1 byte, circulates in the range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching 240. The fluctuation pattern random number 3 is 1 byte, circulates in the range of 238 to 0, and after reaching 0, returns to 238.

  The fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the seventh embodiment are random numbers whose values circulate because no upper limit values are set.

  In the present specification, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in the storage area (random number generation area) of the RAM 111c, which is an information storage unit that stores various types of information, but other memory such as a memory in the random number generation circuit. It may be stored in the information storage unit.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process according to the eighth embodiment. The hard random number acquisition process is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same step numbers are given to the same processing as the hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 23) according to the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 127, step A10701 is newly provided instead of step A2805 in FIG. In step A10701, the address of the target hard random number latch register is prepared. The hard random number latch register is provided in the game microcomputer 111 and holds a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by a random number generation circuit. The address of the hard random number latch register is used to extract the big hit random number in the common process starting switch common process (FIG. 128) described later.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure starting port switch common processing is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same steps as the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 24) according to the first embodiment are given the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 128, step A10801 is provided instead of steps A2901 to A2904 of FIG. 24, step A10802 is provided instead of A2909 of FIG. 24, and step A10803 is provided instead of A2910 and A2911 of FIG. Step A10804 is provided instead of A2913 and A2914.

  In step A10801, the game control device 100 updates the start port signal output count by +1 (increases by 1) up to a predetermined value (here, 255). As will be described later, the process of step A 10801 is executed by using only one instruction (instruction that has not existed in the past) provided in the instruction set executed by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242. In the present embodiment, the value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area by +1 update. When the number of times the starting port signal is output is "255", the updated value is "0".

  In step A10802, the game control device 100 extracts a big hit random number from the area of the address (A10701) of the hard random number latch register prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 127), and saves it in the big hit random number storage area of the RAM 111c.

  In step A10803, the game control device 100 extracts a big hit symbol random number and saves it in the big hit symbol random number storage area.

  In step A10804, the game control device 100 extracts a small hit symbol random number and saves it in the small hit symbol random number storage area.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure reservation information determination process is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same step as the special figure reservation information determination processing (FIG. 25) according to the first embodiment is given the same step number, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 129, step A10901 is added to FIG. 25, steps A10902 and A10903 are provided instead of A3007 of FIG. 25, and steps A10904 and A10905 are provided instead of A3012 of FIG.

  In step A10901, the game control device 100 loads a big hit random number from the target area for use in the big hit determination process (A3004). Here, the target area is a random number storage area (a special figure 1 reserved storage area or a special figure 2 reserved storage area) related to the special figure 1 reserved (first starting memory) or the special figure 2 reserved (second starting memory). ) Is the latest pending area.

  In step A10902, the game control device 100 loads a jackpot symbol random number from the target area. Here, the target area is the latest reserved area of the random number storage area related to the holding of the special figure 1 (first starting memory) or the holding of the special figure 2 (second starting memory). Then, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (A10903).

  In step A10904, the game control device 100 loads a small hit symbol random number from the target area. Here, since the target area does not have a small hit in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the latest hold of the random number storage area (special figure 1 hold storage area) related to the hold (first starting memory) of special figure 1 Area. Then, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (A10905).

  130 to 133 are program lists showing a part of the program structure of the game control program executed by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control device 100 according to the eighth embodiment. Each program list is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to the Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and is stored in the ROM 111b (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (instructions for the assembler). There is a one-to-one correspondence with the machine language instruction (machine code) that is executed. Any instruction is included in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 as a machine language instruction.

  From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is a "line number" added for convenience, a "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (computation content) of the instruction, an "operand" of the instruction target, and a description facility. It is divided into "comments" attached for. Unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction), the instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (smallest to largest).

  FIG. 130 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the main processing (FIG. 124A) according to the eighth embodiment.

  Line number 0510 is an instruction (code) corresponding to A1001 of the main process (FIG. 124A), and interrupts are prohibited (code “DI”).

  The line number 0520 corresponds to A1002 of the main process, and loads the value “29FFh” as a stack pointer into the SP register (code “LD SP, 29FFH”).

  The line number 0530 corresponds to A1003 of the main processing and loads 0 into the register bank selector (RBS) (code “LD RBS, 0”). Thereby, the register bank 0 is set.

  The line number 0540 corresponds to A10301 of the main process, and loads "2800h" as the start address of the RAM 111c into the IY register (code "LD IY, 2800H").

  The line number 0550 corresponds to A10302 of the main process, and loads “5000h” as the start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b into the DP register (code “LD DP, 5000h”).

  Line numbers 0560 and 0570 correspond to A1005 of the main process. At line number 0560, the value corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG (a value indicating stop firing) is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, C_SHOT_NG”).

  At line number 0570, the numerical value of the A register is output to the port C_OUT01 (that is, the port having the numerical value corresponding to the label C_OUT01) (code “OUT (C_OUT01), A”).

  The line number 0580 corresponds to A1006 of the main process, and inputs a numerical value from the port C_INPUT1 (that is, a port having a numerical number corresponding to the label C_INPUT1) to the A register (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1)").

  Line numbers 0610 and 0620 correspond to A1031 of the main process (FIG. 124B). In line number 0610, the address (the numerical value corresponding to the label D_CTCTBL) of the data table (CTCTBL) required to activate or use the CTC circuit is set to the relative address (D_CTCTBL-5000H) and loaded into the HL register (code. "LQDD HL, D_CTCTBL-5000H"). The relative address is an address based on the start address “5000h” of the data area for the user program.

  Since the "LQDD" instruction uses a relative address (substantially 1 byte) instead of an absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as an operand, the number of bytes of a machine language instruction is 1 compared to a normal LD instruction. Decrease by bytes (decrease from 3 bytes to 2 bytes). The relative address is originally 2 bytes, but since the mnemonic (machine language instruction part) is made to correspond to the value of the upper byte of the relative address, the relative address is actually the lower byte (1 byte). I can show you.

  At line number 0620, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a CTC circuit) is called (code "CALLR P_DEVSET"). The "CALLR" instruction is an instruction that can reduce the number of bytes required from the conventional CALL instruction. The "CALLR" instruction is converted into a 2-byte machine language instruction when calling a process before a predetermined address value (for example, 4C00h), and a 3-byte machine language instruction when calling a process after the predetermined address value. Converted to machine language instructions.

  Note that the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the “LQDD” instruction and the “CALLR” instruction.

  Line number 0630 and line number 0640 correspond to A1032 of the main process (FIG. 124B). In line number 0630, the address of the data table (RNDSET) necessary for starting or using the random number generation circuit (numerical value corresponding to the label D_RNDSET) is set as the relative address (D_RNDSET-5000H) and loaded into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_RNDSET-5000H"). The relative address is an address based on the start address “5000h” of the data area for the user program.

  At line number 0640, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a random number generation circuit) is called (code "CALLR P_DEVSET").

  Line numbers 0650 to 0730 correspond to A1033 of the main process and sequentially store various initial value random numbers (here, initial values at power-on) while updating addresses in a predetermined area of the RAM 111c.

  At line number 0650, the value corresponding to the label R_RNDZINI is loaded into the HL register. The label R_RNDZINI indicates the numerical value of the start address of a predetermined area in the RAM 111c for storing various initial value random numbers.

  In line number 0660, the value (here, lower byte) of a predetermined register "C_SRND0_L" in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code "IN A, (C_SRND0_L)"). The predetermined register is the soft random number register 0.

  In line number 0670, after loading (storing) the value of the A register as a big hit symbol initial value random number into the start address of a predetermined area in the RAM, the address in the HL register is updated from the start address to the next address (code " LQD (HL +), A "). “HL +” means to update the address in the HL register to the next address after loading. The big hit symbol initial value random number is 1 byte, and since the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In this "LQD" instruction, after the value is stored in the area (RAM) corresponding to the address (numerical value) set in the HL register (other register may be used), the value of the HL register is updated (here, +1 update). As a result, the values can be continuously stored in a continuous area (in the RAM), and it becomes unnecessary to calculate the storage destination address as in the conventional case. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the “LQD” instruction.

  At line number 0680, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND1_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  In the line number 0690, the value of the A register as the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored (stored) in the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is set to the next address. (“LQD (HL +), A”). Since the small hit symbol initial value random number is 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  At line number 0700, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  In line number 0710, the value of the A register as the hit initial value random number is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored (stored) in the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code “LQD (HL +), A”). Since the hit initial value random number is 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by 1.

  At line number 0720, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND3_L)”).

  In line number 0730, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register as the hit symbol initial value random number. Here, since there is no initial value random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated (code “LD (HL), A”).

  The line number 0750 is an instruction corresponding to A10401 of the main process, and interrupts are prohibited (code "DI").

  The line number 0760 is an instruction corresponding to A1035 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINI) for executing the initial value random number update process (code “CALLR P_RNDINI”).

  The line number 0770 is an instruction corresponding to A10402 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINC2) for executing the random number update process 2 (code "CALLR P_RNDINC2").

  At line number 0780, the value of the W register is cleared and set to 0 by taking the exclusive OR of the values of the W register (code "XOR W, W").

  Line numbers 0800 to 0820 correspond to A1037 of the main processing, and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In line number 0800, a numerical value is input to the A register from the port C_INPUT1 to which the power failure monitoring signal comes in (code "INA, (C_INPUT1)").

  In line number 0810, the value of the A register and the value C_PDWNSW indicating that the power failure monitoring signal is off (for example, 00000001B in negative logic) are logically ANDed (code “AND A, C_PDWNSW”). The operation result of the logical product of the row number 0810 becomes zero when the power failure monitoring signal is on (for example, 00000000B in negative logic) and the power failure occurs.

  In line number 0820, if the operation result of line number 0810 is zero (Z) (that is, in the case of a power failure occurrence state), jump to the ROM address (address of ROM 111b, branch destination) corresponding to label MAIN90 (conditional branch). Then, the instructions on and after the line number 0860 are executed (code “JR Z, MAIN 90”). When the calculation result of the line number 0810 is not zero (Z) (that is, when the power failure has not occurred), the process proceeds to the instruction of the line number 0830. When the calculation result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set.

  The line number 0830 is an instruction corresponding to A10403 of the main process, and permits interruption (code “EI”).

  The line number 0840 corresponds to the shift of the main process from A10403 to A10401, jumps to the in-ROM address (address in the ROM 111b) corresponding to the label MAIN70, and executes the instruction on and after the line number 0750 (code "JR MAIN70 ").

  Line numbers 0860 to 0880 correspond to A10404 of the main process, and it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks.

  In line number 0860, when the power failure monitoring signal is in the on state (power failure occurrence state), the value of the W register indicating the number of times the on state is detected is updated by +1 (incremented by 1) (code "INC W").

  In line number 0870, the value of the W register is compared with the check count "2" (code "CP W, 2"). When the value of the W register is smaller than the number of checks, the carry flag (CF) is set as the result of the comparison (C). At line number 0880, if the carry flag (CF) is set (when the number of times the ON state is detected has not reached the number of checks), the line number 0880 and subsequent lines are jumped to. Is executed (code “JRC, MAIN80”). When the carry flag (CF) is not set (when the number of times the ON state is detected reaches the number of checks), the process proceeds to line number 0890.

  The line number 0890 corresponds to A1040 of the main processing, and calls a subroutine P_OUTCLR that outputs off data to all output ports (code "CALLR P_OUTCLR").

  FIG. 131 is a program list showing the program structure of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 1000 is a label P_TINT indicating the timer interrupt process. The line number 1010 corresponds to A10501 of the timer interrupt process, and loads “2800h” as the start address of the RAM 111c into the IY register (code “LD IY, 2800H”).

  The line number 1020 corresponds to A10502 of the timer interrupt process, and loads “5000h” as the start address of the ROM data area (for user program) in the DP register (code “LD DP, 5000H”). The instructions at line numbers 1010 and 1020 can be omitted because they have already been executed in the main process (line numbers 0540 and 0550 in FIG. 130).

  In line numbers 1030 to 1140, subroutines corresponding to steps A1303 to A1314 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) are called by the "CALLR" instruction. Line number 1150 is a "RETI" instruction for returning from the timer interrupt processing to the main processing.

  FIG. 132 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the starting opening switch monitoring processing (FIG. 22) according to the eighth embodiment.

  A line number 1500 is a label (P_SIDOSW) corresponding to the starting port switch monitoring process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the starting port switch monitoring process. The starting opening switch monitoring process is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" command in the special figure game process (FIG. 21).

  The line number 1510 corresponds to A2701 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing, and sets the address (the numerical value corresponding to the label D_SIDCHK1) of the starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table to the relative address (D_SIDCHK1-5000H) and loads it into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_SIDCHK1-5000H"). As a result, the starting opening 1 winning monitoring table is prepared.

  The line number 1520 corresponds to A2702 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and calls the subroutine (label P_HRNDGET) of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23) by the “CALLR” command (code “CALLR P_HRNDGET”).

  The line number 1530 corresponds to A2703 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing, and when there is no starting opening winning in the target starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC). , Jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOSW 20 (conditional branch) (code “JR NC, SIDOSW 20”). Note that the carry flag (CF) is set if there is a winning start prize in step A2806 of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23).

  The line numbers 1540 and 1550 correspond to A2704 of the starting opening switch monitoring process. In line number 1540, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that the special drawing time saving is in progress (in the universal communication support state), and whether they match (T: true), It is determined whether they do not match (F: false) (code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN”). When they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  The address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is an addition address obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAMEFLG to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (differential address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, the offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address “xxxxh”), and the code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN” of the line number 1540 is a 3-byte instruction. be able to. As a result, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address becomes 2 bytes and the instruction at the line number 1540 becomes 4 bytes.

  In the line number 1550, when the special drawing is being shortened, that is, when the comparison result in the line number 1540 is a match (T), the line number 1590 is jumped (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOSW10. The subsequent instructions are executed (code “JRST, SIDOSW10”).

  The line number 1560 corresponds to A2705 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and loads the right-handing instruction notification command (the numerical value corresponding to the label C_RIGHTCOM) into the BC register (code "LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM").

  The line number 1570 corresponds to A2706 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code "CALLR P_COMSET").

  The line number 1590 corresponds to A2707 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing, and sets the address (label D_T1HOINF) of the table for setting the information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) to the relative address (D_T1HOINF-5000H). , HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H”).

  The line number 1600 corresponds to A2708 of the starting port switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine (label P_TSIDOSW) of the special figure starting port switch common process (code "CALLR P_TSIDOSW").

  FIG. 133A is a program list showing a partial program structure of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 2000 is a label (P_HRNDGET) corresponding to the hard random number acquisition process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the hard random number acquisition process. The hard random number acquisition process is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" command in A2702 and A2710 of the starting port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22).

  The line number 2010 corresponds to A2801 of the hard random number acquisition process, and clears the carry flag (CF) to zero as the information regarding the absence of the winning in the starting slot, which indicates that there is no winning in the starting slot (code “CLR CF”).

  Line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to A2802 of the hard random number acquisition process, and determine whether or not there is an input to the target switch. At line number 2020, the value stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) is loaded into the A register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code "LD A, (HL +)"). The address currently stored (stored) in the HL register is set in the line number 1510 of the starting opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 132). The value stored in the area of this address is the switch bit data (determination value other than zero) of the target switch, and is "00000001B", for example. The target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

  In line number 2030, the rising information is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2 where the rising information is stored in the switch control area where the information about the target switch is stored, and the logical product is obtained with the switch bit data (judgment value) of the A register. Then, it is determined whether or not the switch is turned on (code “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”). The switch control area is a storage area for storing the detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and is provided in the RAM 111c in the present embodiment. The rising information is information indicating that the target switch has changed from off to on.

  It should be noted that R_SWCTL is the start address of the switch control area, and information on a logic level described later is stored in the first address R_SWCTL + 1 from the start address, and rising information is stored in the second address R_SWCTL + 2 from the start address. When the target switch changes from off to on, the target bit of the 8-bit data of the address R_SWCTL + 2 changes from 0 to 1.

  When there is no winning (ball entry) in the target starting opening (starting opening 1 or starting opening 2) and the target switch is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, and the calculation result ( The logical product) becomes zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, when the bit of the target switch is turned on at “00000001B”), the operation result (logical product) is not zero (for example, “00000001B”). The zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  The "AQND" instruction can determine whether the switch is turned on without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored in the switch control area and stored in the register. Since the on / off judgment of the switch is made without using the register, the judgment can be surely made even if a defect occurs in the register. Further, since the instruction for acquiring the value stored in the switch control area in the register is not necessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing this “AQND” instruction.

  In line number 2040, when the calculation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is ended and the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process (code “RET Z”). That is, when there is no winning in the target starting opening (starting opening 1 or starting opening 2) and the target switch is off, the processing returns to the starting opening switch monitoring processing.

  FIG. 133B is a time chart showing a procedure for detecting “rising information”, which is the rising of the switch. Note that f in the figure is an interrupt cycle, and a timer interrupt occurs at the beginning of the interrupt cycle. Further, d indicates a delay time. The rise of the switch, that is, the determination as to whether or not the switch is turned on is performed by the input processing of A1303 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125). The first physical level, the second physical level, the logical level, and the rising information shown below are updated each time a timer interrupt occurs, and are arranged for each switch provided in the gaming machine into the switch control area. Remembered.

  First, the rise time (23401) and fall time (23402) of the switch will be described. In the entry / exit processing (A1303 in FIG. 125) when the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 111a determines that the level of the switch detection signal is different from the previously set first physical level (from low level to high level or from high level). Change to low level), and the first physical level is newly set to the level of the detection signal. Then, when the detection signal of the switch is different from the previously set second physical level after the elapse of the predetermined delay time d, the second physical level is set to the level of the detection signal. The first physical level and the second physical level differ only in the detection timing.

  At this time, if the first physical level and the second physical level match, it is determined that the detection signal has changed, and the relevant level is set to the logical level. Then, when the logic level changes from the low level to the high level, the rising information is set to ON until the delay time elapses from the occurrence of the next timer interrupt. That is, after the rising information is set to ON, it is set to OFF at the next timer interruption.

  In addition, when the signal levels of the first physical level and the second physical level are different, that is, as indicated by 23403, the level of the detection signal of the switch is detected when the first physical level is detected and when the second physical level is detected. If the values are different from each other, it is determined that noise has occurred and the logic level is not changed.

  Returning to FIG. 133A again, the line number 2050 corresponds to A2803 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and the random number latch register status is input to the A register from the port C_HRDCNT (that is, the port of the numerical value corresponding to the label C_HRDCNT). (Code "INA, (C_HRDCNT)").

  The row number 2060 and the row number 2070 correspond to A2804 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and determine whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register. In line number 2060, the logical product of the judgment value (judgment data) stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) and the value of the A register is obtained (code “AND”). A, (HL +) "). After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). The determination value is other than zero and is, for example, “00000010B”, and the operation result (logical product) of the row number 2060 becomes zero when the random number latch register status which is the value of the A register does not match the determination value. ) Is set and the random number latch register status matches the determination value, the value is other than zero (for example, “00000010B”) and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. If the target random number latch register has no latch data, the bit of the random number latch register status corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, the random number latch register status does not match the determination value, and the operation result (logical Product) becomes zero.

  In line number 2070, when the operation result of line number 2060 is zero (Z) (that is, when there is no latch data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process (code. "RET Z").

  The row number 2080 corresponds to A10701 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) in order to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register. The obtained value (address of the target hard random number latch register) is loaded into the E register (code “LDE, (HL)”).

  In line number 2090, the carry flag (CF) is set as the information regarding the presence of the starting opening winning indicating that there is the starting opening winning (corresponding to A2806 of the hard random number acquisition processing (code “SET CF”)).

  At line number 2100, the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process (code "RET").

  As described above, the code generally described as “AQND r, (R_SWCB)” is the logical product of the judgment value stored in the register r and the value (rising information) of the switch control area of the address R_SWCB. The detection state of the switch (switch bit ON / OFF) can be determined. In this embodiment, R_SWCB is the address of the rising information of the switch control area. When the switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of the rising information is turned on.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “AQND r, (R_SWCB)”.

[Operation / Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
According to the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game based on the detection state of a predetermined switch (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a). The game control means (game control device 100) is provided to perform game control for generating a game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, a ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, a CPU 111a) that performs a required arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( It includes register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means includes a switch control area which is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and which can store the detection state of the switch. The arithmetic processing means stores the value in one of the storage areas of the update information storage means in the storage area based on the value in the storage area and the determination value stored in a predetermined general-purpose register without storing the value in any of the storage areas in the general-purpose register. It is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”) that can determine the state of the value that is set. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch by this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the switch is turned on without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the general-purpose register. Since the switch determination is performed without using the general-purpose register, the determination can be surely made even if a failure occurs in a general-purpose register other than the predetermined general-purpose register. Further, since the instruction for acquiring the value stored in the switch control area in the register is not necessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Ninth Embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments.

  FIG. 134A is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128) according to the ninth embodiment.

  A line number 2500 is a label (P_TSIDOSW) corresponding to the special figure starting port switch common processing, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" command in A2708 and A2715 of the starting port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22).

  The line number 2510 corresponds to A10801 of the common processing of the special figure starting port switch. The code “IQCP (IY + R_SIDOSIG), 255” of the line number 2510 indicates that the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG) stored in the area of the addition address “IY + R_SIDOSIG” as an absolute address in the address space by the “IQCP” instruction is smaller than 255. Is updated by +1 and 0 is substituted if it is not smaller than 255 to initialize the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG). The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times the starting port signal is output, is added with 255 being the upper limit. The “IQCP” instruction will be described in detail in the program list (FIG. 141) described later. The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times the starting port signal is output, may be set to 255 instead of being returned to 0 when the value is 255 or more as in A2901 to A2904.

  Line numbers 2520 to 2550 correspond to A2905 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. In line number 2520, the value stored in the pending information table (the current address area of the HL register) is loaded into the W register as the offset address of the pending number area (code “LD W, (HL +)”). After that, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address. For example, if the target starting port is the starting port 1, the current address in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is the value loaded at line number 1590. The hold information table (A2707, A2714) is a table (for example, a ROM) in which information about a hold due to winning at the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) or the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37, starting opening 2) is set. Within the data area).

  At line number 2530, the value (reserved number) stored in the addition address IY + W is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (IY + W)”). The addition address IY + W is the sum of the value stored in the W register (offset address of the reserved number area) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800h”). The addition address IY + W is an absolute address of the reserved number area. That is, in line number 2530, the current number of reservations in the number-of-holds area is stored in the A register, but the current number of reservations (the number of starting memories) is updated in line number 2560 (A2906) by +1 for this prize. It is the number of holdings before.

  In line number 2540, the number of registers in the A register is compared with the upper limit value (here, 4), and if it is smaller than the upper limit value, the carry flag (CF) is set, and if it is equal to or larger than the upper limit value, the carry flag (CF) is set. Do not set (code "CP A, 4").

  In line number 2550, when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit value and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC) (NC), the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code “RET NC”).

  The line number 2560 corresponds to A2906 of the common process for the special figure starting port switch. In line number 2560, the reserved number, which is the value of the reserved number area corresponding to the in-RAM address IY + W, is updated by +1 as the target special figure reserved number (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) (code "IQNC (IY + W) "). The in-RAM address IY + W is an address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

  Note that the instruction “IQNC” does not store the 1-byte value stored in the address destination area in the register (at least the general-purpose register) of FIG. 121A (the value stored in the address destination area is It is an instruction that directly updates +1 (adds only 1) without temporarily storing it in the register. Therefore, by using the instruction "IQNC", it becomes unnecessary to write three codes, that is, loading into a register, addition processing in a register, and loading into an area of an address destination. It becomes compact. Further, the direct addition of the value stored in the address destination area by "IQNC" does not use a general-purpose register, so that no problem occurs even if interrupt processing occurs.

  Line numbers 2570 to 2600 correspond to A2907 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 2570, the pending number stored in the A register (+1 pending number before updating) is loaded into the C register (code “LD C, A”).

  In line number 2580, the value (starting mouth winning flag) stored in the address area of the HL register at the present time is loaded into the B register (code “LD B, (HL +)”). That is, the starting mouth winning flag (value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is acquired from the hold information table. After that, the value in the HL register is updated to the next address (HL +).

  In line number 2590, the value (starting mouth winning flag) stored in the B register is loaded into the area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (code “LQD (IY + R_SIDOFLG), B”. The addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is the IY register). The value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG is added to the value stored in (RAM start address “2800h”).

  At line 2600, the value of the BC register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code “PUSH BC”).

  Line numbers 2610 to 2650 correspond to A2908 of the common process starting switch common processing. At line number 2610, the value stored in the address currently stored in the HL register (the number of bytes for one hold (7 or 8)) is loaded into the W register (code “LD W, (HL +)”). That is, the number of bytes (7 or 8) for one hold is acquired from the hold information table. After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address.

  As shown in the special figure 1 reserved storage area of the RAM 111c of FIG. 135A, each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved storage area has a 2-byte big hit random number, a 1-byte big hit symbol random number, and a 1-byte big hit random number. Small hitting pattern random number, 2-byte variation pattern random number 1, 1-byte variation pattern random number 2, 1-byte variation pattern random number 3 are stored, and bytes assigned to each special figure 1 hold (first starting memory) The number (number of reserved bytes) becomes 8 bytes. On the other hand, as shown in the special figure 2 reserved storage area of the RAM 111c of FIG. 135B, each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved storage area has a 2-byte big hit random number, a 1-byte big hit symbol random number, and a 2-byte big hit random number. Variable pattern random number 1, 1-byte variable pattern random number 2, 1-byte variable pattern random number 3 are stored, and the number of bytes (number of reserved bytes) allocated to each special figure 2 reservation (second starting memory) is 7 Become a part-time job. Since there is no small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, a 1-byte small hit symbol random number is not stored in each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved storage area.

  In line number 2620, the number of reserved bytes (7 or 8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the number of reserved bytes stored in the A register (+1, which is the number of reservations before updating, 0 to 3), and the WA register The calculation result (reserved number × reserved byte number) is stored in (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is 0 to 24, the operation result is substantially stored in the A register of the lower byte. The number of reservations is the number of start-up memories (the number of start-up memories), and the number of reserved bytes is the number of bytes allocated to each hold (each start-up memory).

  At line number 2630, the value stored at the address currently stored in the HL register (the address of the random number storage area) is loaded into the L register (code “LDL, (HL)”). That is, the address (start address) of the random number storage area is acquired from the suspension information table. The start address of the random number storage area (reserved storage area) is 2830h in the special figure 1 reserved storage area (FIG. 135A) and 2850h in the special figure 2 reserved storage area (FIG. 135B).

  At line number 2640, the value (reserved number × reserved byte number) stored in the A register is added to the start address of the random number storage area stored in the L register (code “ADD L, A”). As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the number of reservations (+1 number of reservations before updating), that is, the head address of the reserved random number storage area generated by this winning. For example, if the hold generated due to this winning is hold 3, the address of the area corresponding to the number of hold in the special figure 1 hold storage area (FIG. 135A) is 30h + 2 × 8 = 40h at the offset address (lower byte), In the special figure 2 reserved storage area (FIG. 135B), the offset address (lower byte) is 50h + 2 × 7 = 5Eh.

  At line number 2650, the H register is loaded with the numerical value "28h" as the upper address of the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number (code "LD H, 28H").

  Line numbers 2660 to 2670 correspond to A10802 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. In line number 2660, the value (2-byte big hit random number) stored in the 2-byte area is input from the address (the target hard random number latch register address) stored in the E register (code “INW WA, (E) ”).

  In line number 2670, the jackpot random number of the WA register is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (in the RAM), that is, in the reserved random number storage area (area corresponding to the reserved number) generated by this winning. Is loaded (stored) (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the big hit random number is 2 bytes, for example, if the address currently stored in the HL register is 2840h, the next address is 2842h. The lower byte (value of the A register) of the big hit random number is stored in the RAM internal area of the address smaller than the upper byte (value of the W register).

  As described above, in the code “LQD (HL +), WA”, the address in the HL register is automatically updated to the next address which is the storage destination of the next time. Therefore, the next time in the continuous RAM area such as the random number storage area. The instruction for calculating the storage destination address of is unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

  Line numbers 2680 to 2690 correspond to A10803 of the common process starting switch common processing. At line number 2680, the value (here, lower byte) of a predetermined register “C_SRND0_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND0_L)”). The predetermined register is the soft random number register 0.

  In line number 2690, the value of the A register as the big hit symbol random number is loaded into the area of the address stored in the HL register at the present time (code “LQD (HL +), A”). After that, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the big hit symbol random number is 1 byte, for example, if the address currently stored in the HL register is 2842h, the next address is 2843h.

  Line numbers 2700 to 2710 correspond to A2912 of the special figure starting port switch common processing.

  In line number 2700, the value of the B register as the starting mouth winning flag (value indicating Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is compared with the numerical value corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (value indicating Special Figure 1), and whether they match is determined. (T), it is determined whether or not they match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”). When they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In the line number 2710, when the comparison result of the line number 2700 does not match (F), that is, when the target starting opening is the starting opening 2 (when the starting opening winning flag indicates the special figure 2), the label TSIDOSW10 is displayed. It jumps (conditional branch) to the corresponding address in the ROM and executes the instructions on and after the line number 2750 (code "JRS F, TSIDOSW 10"). This is because there is no small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, and it is not necessary to acquire and store the small hit random number.

  Line numbers 2720 to 2730 correspond to A10804 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line 2720, the value of a predetermined register “C_SRND1_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “INA, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  In line number 2730, the value of the A register as a small hit symbol random number is loaded into the area of the address stored in the HL register at the current time (code “LQD (HL +), A”. After that, in the HL register at the current time The address is updated to the next address (“HL +”) Since the size random number is 1 byte, for example, if the address currently stored in the HL register is 2843h, the next address is 2844h.

  Line numbers 2750 to 2780 correspond to A2915 of the common process starting switch common processing. At line number 2750, the value (that is, the fluctuation pattern random number 1) stored in the area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)”). The addition address is obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800h”) and the value corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN1 (offset address of the generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is generated). The addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is the absolute address of the generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is generated.

  Here, the offset address R_RNDHEN1 is limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte, and the code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)” in the line number 2750 can be a 2-byte instruction. As a result, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address becomes 2 bytes and the instruction at the line number 2750 becomes 3 bytes.

  At line number 2760, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the WA register is loaded into the 2-byte area (in the RAM) from the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the variation pattern random number 1 is 2 bytes, for example, if the address currently stored in the HL register is 2844h, the next address is 2846h.

  In line number 2770, the value stored in the 2-byte area (in RAM) from addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 (that is, fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)”). The addition address is a value (RAM start address “2800h”) stored in the IY register and a value (offset address of the generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN2 added. The addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 is the absolute address of the generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 is generated. The generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 (1 byte) and the variation pattern random number 3 (1 byte) are generated is continuous and has a total of 2 bytes. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 can be simultaneously loaded into the WA register with one instruction.

  In line number 2780, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the WA register are loaded into the address area (2 bytes in the RAM) currently stored in the HL register (code “LD (HL), WA”). For example, if the address currently stored in the HL register is 2846h, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are loaded in 2846h and 2847h.

  Line number 2790 corresponds to A2916 of the special figure starting port switch common processing, and calls the subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special figure reservation information determination processing (FIG. 129) (code "CALLR P_THOINF").

  Line numbers 2800 to 2820 correspond to A2917 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 2800, the value of the BC register is restored from the stack area of the RAM (code “POP BC”). The value of the B register is a starting mouth winning flag (value indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2), and the value of the C register is the number of reservations (+1 number of reservations before updating).

  In line number 2810, the value corresponding to the label C_THOMD (the numerical value indicating the special figure reservation mode) is added to the value of the B register (code “ADD B, C_THOMD”).

  In line number 2820, 2 is added to the value of the C register (code “ADD C, 2”).

  The line number 2830 corresponds to A2918 of the common process starting switch common processing. A subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process is called and executed (code "CALLR P_COMSET"). The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B register and the C register.

  At line number 2840, the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code “RET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)” is a storage instruction in the RAM area (particularly a random number storage area) indicated by the address value set in the pair register qq. ), The value of the register r (or the pair register dd) is stored, and the address value of the pair register qq is added and updated by a predetermined addition value to obtain the next address value. Note that r is an arbitrary register, and qq and dd (different from qq) are arbitrary pair registers. The predetermined addition value corresponds to the number of bytes in the register, which is 1 for the register r and 2 for the pair register dd. The pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)”.

[Operation and effect of ninth embodiment]
According to the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, a ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, a CPU 111a) that performs necessary arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register group (registers) including a plurality of registers. Banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The register group includes a plurality of register pairs each including two registers. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the address specifies the information stored in the update information storage means. The storage unit (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) extracts a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing a game ball into a starting winning area or a gate), and executes the variable display game. Can be stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means (for example, the RAM 111c). The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) stores the value stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in any one of the storage areas of the update information storage means corresponding to the address set in the other register pair. After that, the storage instruction for updating the address set in the other register pair can be executed. The arithmetic processing means stores the random number stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in the random number storage area of the update information storage means in response to the storage instruction. The storage instruction is, for example, “LQD (HL +), WA” or “LQD (HL +), A”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a storage instruction.

  Since the storage destination address is automatically updated by the store instruction, when storing values continuously in a continuous storage area (for example, RAM area), the calculation of the individual storage destination addresses that was necessary in the past was performed. The instruction for is unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

  Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, in the case of storing random numbers continuously in the random number storage area (for example, the RAM internal area), the instruction for calculating the address of each storage destination, which is conventionally required, is unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
FIG. 134B is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128) according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. It should be noted that the code having the same content as that of FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment is given the same line number and its description is omitted.

  The line numbers 2500 to 2670 are the same as those in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, but in the line number 12010 executed after the line number 2670, the values of the WA register and the WA ′ register are exchanged (code “ XQCH WA, WA '"). In the present embodiment, the WA register is the WA register 1203A (front register) of the register bank 0, and the WA ′ register is the WA register 1203B (back register) of the register bank 1. As a result, the jackpot random number (2 bytes) currently stored in the WA register of register bank 0 is stored in the WA ′ register of register bank 1 before the value of WA register 1203A of register bank 0 is changed (destroyed). It can be temporarily saved.

  At line number 2790, when the subroutine for special figure reservation information determination processing (label P_THOINF) is called, the values of the pair register WA register and WA 'register are exchanged again (code "XQCH WA, WA'"). As a result, the jackpot random number saved (stored) in the WA ′ register of the register bank 1 is returned (restored) to the WA register of the register bank 0 when executing the special figure reservation information determination process (immediately before execution). ), It can be used in the jackpot determination process of the special figure reservation information determination process. In the special figure reservation information determination process, it is not necessary to take out (read out) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM, so that the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced. In addition, since it is not saved in the stack area of the RAM, it is possible to prevent an increase in the RAM capacity.

  The line numbers 12020 and 12030 are the same as the line number 2690, but in order to be able to use the big hit symbol random number acquired in the line number 2680 in a later special symbol reservation information determination process, the big hit symbol random number A It is also stored in the E register in addition to the register (code “LD E, A”).

  The line numbers 12040 and 12050 are the same as the line number 2730, but in order to be able to use the small hit symbol random number acquired in the line number 2720 in a later special symbol reservation information determination process, a small hit symbol random number Is stored in the D register in addition to the A register.

  As described above, the code generally described as "XQCH dd, dd '" corresponds to the value of the pair register dd of the first register bank (for example, register bank 0) and the pair register dd as an exchange instruction. The value of the pair register dd ′ of the second register bank (for example, register bank 1) to be exchanged is exchanged. Therefore, the jackpot random number (2 bytes) stored in the pair register dd of the first register bank can be temporarily saved in the pair register dd 'of the second register bank. Then, the saved jackpot random number can be returned (restored) to the pair register dd of the first register bank at a desired timing and used. Furthermore, it is possible to save without using the stack area of the RAM or the like. Therefore, in the special figure reservation information determination processing and the like, there is no need for an instruction to retrieve (read) a big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM, so that the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. The pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “XQCH dd, dd ′”.

[Operation / Effect of Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
According to the modified example of the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball into a starting winning area or a gate) is established, and the variation display game is executed. A game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege when is a special result. The game control means stores game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The update information storage means (for example, RAM111c) stored. The game control means includes a first register group (for example, register bank 0) and a second register group (for example, register bank 1) including a register group having the same configuration as the first register group. The arithmetic processing means exchanges a value stored in the first register group with a value stored in the second register group, and issues an exchange instruction (for example, an “XQCH” instruction) to store in each register group. It is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means extracts a random number (big hit random number) used in a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state in the variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the extracted random number is stored in the first register. The random number stored in the first register group is saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction while being stored in the group. The arithmetic processing means restores the random number saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction to the first register group before performing the preliminary determination as to whether or not to generate the special game state based on the random number, and then the first register group. Pre-determination is performed using the random numbers returned to the register group.

  Therefore, a value (for example, a big hit random number) stored in the first register group (for example, register bank 0) can be temporarily saved in the second register group (for example, register bank 1) by the exchange instruction. .. Then, by the exchange command, the saved value (eg, big hit random number) can be returned (restored) to the first register group at a desired timing and used. Therefore, the value stored in the first register group can be saved without using the stack area of the RAM or the like. Further, since the value can be saved in the second register group, an instruction to retrieve (read) this value from the RAM is not required, so that the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. In particular, an exchange instruction can be applied to a random number, which is an important value in game control, and the random number can be saved from the first register group to the second register group for protection. The random number saved at a desired timing such as immediately before performing the preliminary determination is restored to the first register group, and the preliminary determination is performed using the random number restored to the first register group. Therefore, the first register group can be freely used until a desired timing after the first register group is saved.

[Tenth Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136A. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments.

  FIG. 136A is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure reservation information determination processing (FIG. 129) according to the tenth embodiment.

  The line number 3000 is a label (P_THOINF) corresponding to the special figure reservation information determination process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure reservation information determination processing is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" command in A2916 (line number 2790 in FIG. 134) of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128).

  Line numbers 3010 to 3050 correspond to A3001 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

  In line number 3010, the address (value corresponding to label R_T2HORYU) corresponding to the reserved number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved number is loaded into the DE register (code “LDY DE, R_T2HORYU”). R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value “2800h” of the IY register, and only the lower address of the reserved number storage area needs to be designated as R_T2HORYU. Therefore, the conventional code (machine language instruction) for loading a value into the DE register has 3 bytes, whereas the code (machine language instruction) with this "LDY" instruction has 2 bytes.

  In line number 3020, the value "R_T2RNDMEM" obtained by subtracting 7 (the number of reserved bytes for the special figure 2 reservation) from the start address (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM) of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 reservation (the special figure 2 reserved storage area) -7 "is loaded into the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for Toku-zu 2 (code" LDY HL, R_T2RNDMEM-7 ").

  In line number 3030, the number of reserved bytes “7” for the special figure 2 reservation is loaded into the W register (code “LD W, 7”).

  In the line number 3040, the starting mouth winning flag stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (inside the RAM) is compared with the numerical value (value indicating special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (code “CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1). )). The addition address is obtained by adding the value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG to the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800h”). When the starting mouth winning flag shows the special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (Z), and when the starting mouth winning flag shows the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set. (NZ).

  In line number 3050, when the start opening winning flag indicates special figure 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), the address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF10 is jumped (conditional branch), and the instructions in line number 3140 and thereafter are executed. Yes (code “JR NZ, THOINF10”). That is, if the start opening 1 is not a prize, the game is branched.

  Line numbers 3060 to 3100 correspond to A3002 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

  In line number 3060, the address corresponding to the label R_T1HORYU corresponding to the reserved number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved number is loaded into the DE register (code “LDY DE, R_T1HORYU”).

  In line number 3070, the value "R_T1RNDMEM" obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes of the special figure 1 reserved) from the start address (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM) of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved (special figure 1 reserved storage area) -8 "is loaded into the HL register as a value (reference value) associated with the address of the random number storage area reserved for Toku-zu 1 (code" LDY HL, R_T1RNDMEM-8 ").

  In the line number 3080, the value of the W register, which is 7 at the present time, is updated by +1 (incremented by 1) to set the number of reserved bytes for the suspension of special figure 1 to "8" (code "INC W").

  In line number 3090, as in line number 1540, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of label C_JTN indicating that the special figure is in a short period of time (in the universal communication support state) (code “CHK ( IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN "). If the comparison result matches during special time saving, the operation result does not become zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the comparison result does not match during special time saving, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  In line number 3100, when the special drawing time saving is in progress, that is, when the comparison results match (NZ), the flow returns to the special drawing starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128) (code “RET NZ”).

  Line numbers 3110 to 3120 correspond to A3003 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

  In line number 3110, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that big hit or small hit is in progress (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates the RAM internal area for storing the special figure game processing number (A2606) with reference to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special figure game processing number “3” of the fanfare / interval processing. If the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is 3 or more during the big hit or the small hit, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), and the value is smaller than 3 whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Causes the carry flag (CF) to be set (C).

  In line number 3120, if the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC) during the big hit or the small hit, the process returns to the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 128) (code “RET NC”).

  Line numbers 3140 to 3170 correspond to A10901 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

  In line number 3140, the number of reservations (special figure 1 number of reservations or special figure 2 number of reservations) stored in the number of reserved storage area corresponding to the address of the DE register is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (DE ) ”).

  In line number 3150, the number of reserved bytes stored in the W register (7 or 8) and the number of reserved bytes stored in the A register (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) (here, 1 to 4) Is multiplied by and the operation result (number of pending bytes × number of pending bytes) is stored in the WA register (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is 7 to 31, the operation result is substantially stored in the A register of the lower byte.

  In line number 3160, the value of the WA register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code “PUSH WA”).

  In line number 3170, the value of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the total of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (reserved number × reserved byte number). The value of the HL register is a value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area, and is a value related to the random number storage area. The value of the A register is the number of reservations × the number of reservation bytes, and is a value based on the product of the number of reservations (the number of starting memories) and the number of bytes assigned to each reservation (each starting memory).

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of the HL register is used as the start address of the random number storage area and the value of the A register is (reserved number-1) x number of reserved bytes.

  Here, the total address value HL + A becomes the head address of the most recently generated latest pending random number storage area (the leftmost side in FIGS. 135A and 135B). In the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest pending jackpot random numbers are stored, and the lower byte of the latest pending jackpot random numbers is acquired (read out) in the A register and the upper byte. ..

  The line number 3180 corresponds to A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination process, and calls the subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) of the big hit determination process (code "CALLR P_BHITJUD"). In the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the latest jackpot random number.

  Line numbers 3190 to 3200 correspond to A3005 of the special figure reservation information determination processing. In line number 3190, the value of the WA register saved in the stack area in line number 3160 is returned from the stack area to the WA register (code “POP WA”).

  In line number 3200, if the result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (when the carry flag is not set (in the case of NC)), the label for performing the process after line number 3300 (the process after A3008 in FIG. 129) A jump (conditional branch) to the ROM address corresponding to THOINF30 (code "JR NC, THOINF30").

  Line numbers 3210 to 3240 correspond to A3006 of the special figure reservation information determination process. In line number 3210, the address (start address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for special figure 1 is loaded into the DE register (code "LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL1").

  The line number 3220 has the same code as the line number 3040, and compares the starting mouth winning flag stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (in the RAM) with the numerical value corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (value indicating the special figure 1). (Code “CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1”).

  In the line number 3230, when the starting mouth winning flag indicates the special figure 1 and the zero flag is set (Z), the command jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF20 (conditional branch), and the commands after the line number 3260 are executed. Execute (code "JR Z, THOINF20"). That is, if the start opening 1 is a prize, the game is branched.

  In line number 3240, the address (start address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for special figure 2 is loaded into the DE register and overwritten (code "LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL2").

  Line numbers 3260 to 3270 correspond to A10902 in the special figure reservation information determination process. At line number 3260, 2 is added to the value of the A register (code “ADD A, 2”). In the A register, a value obtained by adding “2” to (reserved number × reserved byte number) is stored.

  In line number 3270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). At present, the total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area) and the value of the A register (number of reserved × number of reserved bytes + 2). The value of the HL register is a value related to the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is a value based on the product of the number of reservations and the number of bytes allocated for each reservation. Here, the total address value is obtained by adding "2" to the head address of the most recently generated latest pending random number storage area. Then, in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest newly generated big jackpot random number is stored, but the latest big jackpot random number is acquired (read out) in the A register.

  Line numbers 3280 to 3290 correspond to A10903 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

  At line number 3280, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value DE + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (DE + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the DE register (the start address of the jackpot symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot symbol random number). Then, in the area corresponding to the total address value, since the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is stored, the latest pending stop symbol information is acquired (read out) in the A register. In this way, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the big hit symbol random number.

  At line number 3290, a jump is made to an address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF100 (code "JR THOINF100").

  As described above, the code generally described as “LQD qq (or r ′), (dd + r)” is a read instruction that is specified at an address (here, the address specified based on the value of the dd register and the value of the r register). Then, the value (random number) in the RAM internal area (random number storage area) indicated by the total address dd + r) is stored in the pair register qq (or register r ′). Note that r and r'are arbitrary registers, and r'may be different from or the same as r. qq and dd are arbitrary pair registers, and qq may be the same as or different from dd. The total address value dd + r is the sum of the value of the pair register dd (reference address derived based on the first address of the random number storage area) and the value of the r register (value derived based on the number of reserved bytes × the number of reserved bytes). Yes, you can specify a specific random number address (area) for each hold. The pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  Therefore, unlike the conventional method, it is not necessary to execute the code that directly calculates the address at which this random number is stored each time it tries to obtain a specific random number for each hold, and the address can be efficiently specified and the specific address can be specified. Random numbers can be acquired efficiently, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  In the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242), a code “LQD qq (or r ′), () for acquiring the value stored in the RAM address specified from the values of the pair register dd and the register r. A dedicated logic circuit for performing "dd + r)" may be provided.

[Operation / Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, a ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, a CPU 111a) that performs necessary arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register group (registers) including a plurality of registers. Banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The register group includes a plurality of register pairs each including two registers. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the address specifies the information stored in the update information storage means. The storage unit (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) may extract a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and store the random number in the random number storage area of the update information storage unit (for example, the RAM 111c) as the execution right of the variable display game. it can. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) sets the value of any one of the storage areas of the update information storage means to one register or to correspond to the address specified based on the value stored in the predetermined register and the predetermined register pair. A read instruction to be stored in one register pair is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means reads out the random number stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means by the read command. The read instruction is, for example, “LQD WA, (HL + A)” or “LQD A, (HL + A)”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction.

  With such a read instruction, it is not necessary to directly execute the instruction for directly calculating the address where this value is stored every time the value of one of the storage areas is acquired. And the value stored in that area can be acquired efficiently, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  For example, a predetermined register pair (for example, HL register) stores a value related to the address of the random number storage area, and a predetermined register (for example, A register) is assigned the number of starting memories and each starting memory. A value based on the multiplication value with the number of bytes is stored.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is not necessary to directly execute the instruction for directly calculating the address in which the random number is stored every time the random number in any one of the random number storage regions is to be acquired. The address of the area and the random number stored in the area can be efficiently obtained, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

[Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
FIG. 136B is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure reservation information determination processing (FIG. 129) according to the modification of the tenth embodiment. In addition, the code having the same contents as in FIG. 136A of the tenth embodiment is assigned the same line number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The modified example of the tenth embodiment is a special figure pending information determination process executed corresponding to the case where the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 134B) of the modified example of the ninth embodiment is executed. In the special figure starting port switch common processing of FIG. 134B, the big hit random number is temporarily saved in the WA ′ register, and is restored to the original WA register when the special figure pending information determination processing is executed (immediately before execution). .. Therefore, in the special figure reservation information determination process of FIG. 136B, a process of extracting the jackpot random number from the random number storage area of the RAM (process of line number 3000 to line number 3030, process of line number 3060 to line number 3080 of FIG. 136A). , And the processing from line number 3130 to line number 3170) is unnecessary.

  The row numbers 13010 and 13020 are similar to the row numbers 3040 and 3050 in FIG. 136A.

  In line number 13010, the value of the B register as the starting mouth winning flag (value indicating Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is compared with the numerical value (value indicating Special Figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1, and whether they match or not? (T), it is determined whether or not they match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the line number 13020, when the comparison result of the line number 13010 does not match (F), that is, when the target starting port is the starting port 2 (when the starting port winning flag indicates the special figure 2), the label THOINF10 is displayed. It jumps to the corresponding ROM address (conditional branch) and executes the instructions on and after the line number 3180 (code “JRS F, THOINF10”).

  In line number 3180, a big hit determination subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) is called, and the big hit determination process is executed using the big hit random number of the WA register. Thus, it is not necessary to take out (read) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the big hit determination process.

  Line numbers 13030 to 13060 correspond to line numbers 3210 to 3240.

  In line number 13030, the relative address (starting address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for special figure 1 is loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H").

  In line number 13040, as in line number 13010, the value of the B register is compared with the numerical value corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (the value showing the special figure 1) as the starting mouth winning flag (the value showing the special figure 1 or the special figure 2). Then, it is determined whether they match (T) or do not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the line number 13050, when the comparison result of the line number 13040 is coincident (T), that is, when the target starting opening is the starting opening 1 (when the starting opening winning flag indicates the special figure 1), the label THOINF20 is displayed. A jump (conditional branch) is made to the corresponding address in the ROM, and the instructions at line number 13070 and thereafter are executed (code "JRST, THOINF20").

  In line number 13060, the relative address (start address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for special figure 2 is loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H").

  In line number 13070, the jackpot symbol random number stored in the E register in line number 12020 of FIG. 134B is stored in the A register (LD A, E). Therefore, in the special figure reservation information determination process, it is not necessary to retrieve (read) the big hit symbol random number from the random number storage area of the RAM.

  In line number 13080, like the line number 3280 in FIG. 136A, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the big hit symbol random number. At line number 13080, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the HL register (the head address of the jackpot symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot symbol random number). Then, in the area corresponding to the total address value, since the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is stored, the latest reserved stop symbol information is acquired in the A register.

[Operation / Effect of Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the jackpot determination process of the special figure reservation information determination process is executed using the jackpot random number that has been generally saved by the code described as “XQCH dd, dd ′”. In this way, it is not necessary to take out the big hit random numbers from the random number storage area of the RAM at the time of the big hit determination process, and the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced.

[Eleventh Embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 137. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments.

  137 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the variation start information setting process (FIG. 40) according to the eleventh embodiment.

  A line number 3500 is a label (P_TSTASET) corresponding to the fluctuation start information setting process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the fluctuation start information setting process.

  Line numbers 3510 to 3580 correspond to A4601 of the fluctuation start information setting process. In line number 3510, the value of the variable symbol determination flag area of the address "IY + R_TZINF" (variable symbol determination flag) and the value corresponding to the label C_TZ1HEN (value indicating special figure 1) are compared (code "CP (IY + R_TZINF)," C_TZ1HEN "). The label R_TZINF indicates the offset address of the variable symbol determination flag area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. When the variable symbol determination flag shows the special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (Z), and when the variable symbol determination flag shows the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set. (NZ).

  In the line number 3520, when the variable symbol determination flag indicates the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match (NZ), the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET10 is jumped (conditional branch), and the instructions in and after the line number 3570 are executed. Execute (code "JR NZ, TSTASET10").

  In line number 3530, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 4 to the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T1RNDMEM, for example, 2830h) of the random number storage area of special figure 1 reservation (special figure 1 reserved storage area), that is, In the random number storage area, the area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of pending 1 to be digested (for example, the area of addresses 2834h and 2835h in FIG. 135A) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1RNDMEM + 4)”).

  In line number 3540, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 6 to the start address (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM, for example, 2830h) of the random number storage area for special figure 1 reservation (special figure 1 reserved storage area), that is, The areas of the variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of pending 1 to be consumed in the random number storage area (for example, the areas of addresses 2836h and 2837h in FIG. 135A) are cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1RNDMEM + 6)”).

  In the special figure 1 reserved storage area, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number of the reserved 1 to be digested have already been cleared (A3604, A4022, A4023), and therefore from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the reserved 1 By clearing the random number storage area of No. 3, the random number storage area can be shifted (held shift) (A4613).

  At line number 3550, a jump is made to an address in the ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET20 (code "JR TSTASET20").

  In line number 3570, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 3 to the start address (a numeric value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM, for example, 2850h) of the random number storage area of special figure 2 reservation (special figure 2 reserved storage area), that is, In the random number storage area, the area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of pending 1 to be digested (for example, 2853h and 2854h in FIG. 135B) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2RNDMEM + 3)”).

  In line number 3580, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 5 to the start address (a numeric value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM, for example, 2850h) of the random number storage area for special figure 2 reservation (special figure 2 reserved storage area), that is, The area of the variable pattern random number 1 of pending 1 that is consumed in the random number storage area (for example, 2855h and 2856h in FIG. 135B) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2RNDMEM + 5)”).

  Special figure 2 In the reserved storage area, the jackpot random numbers of reserved 1 to be digested and the jackpot symbol random numbers have already been cleared (A3703, A4116), so the random number storage areas of fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of reserved 1 are cleared. By doing so, the random number storage area can be shifted (reserved shift) (A4613).

  The line number 3600 corresponds to A4602 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and loads the first address “D_TZENTIM-5000H” of the first half fluctuation time value table represented by the relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TZENTIM-5000H. )).

  Line numbers 3610 to 3650 correspond to A4603 of the fluctuation start information setting process. In line number 3610, the first-half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded from the first-half variation number area (A4316) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TZENNUM into the B register (code “LQD B, (IY + R_TZENNUM)”). The label R_TZENNUM is an offset address of the first half variation number area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register.

  In line number 3620, the value of the B register is updated by -1 (decrement by 1) (code "DEC B"). The value of the B register becomes, for example, a value of 0 to 9 and can be used also for preparing a variation command (MODE).

  In line number 3630, the value of the B register (for example, the value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the first half fluctuation time value table) (code “ADD HL, B”).

  In line number 3640, the value of the B register (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is further added to the value of the HL register (code “ADD HL, B”).

  By the instruction of line number 3630 and line number 3640, a value that is twice the value of the B register (for example, an even value from 0 to 18) is added to the start address of the first half fluctuation time value table in which the first half fluctuation time values are arranged. To be done. This is because the first half variation time value is 2 bytes, and it is necessary to add even values. After the instruction of the line number 3640 is executed, the value stored in the area of the address (2 bytes in the ROM) stored in the HL register is the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number.

  At line number 3650, the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is loaded (acquired) into the WA register from the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LD WA, (HL)”).

  The line number 3660 corresponds to A4604 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and loads the start address “D_TKOUTIM-5000H” of the latter half fluctuation time value table represented by the relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H. )).

  Line numbers 3670 to 3720 correspond to A4605 and A4606 of the fluctuation start information setting process. In line number 3670, the second half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded from the latter half variation number area (A4310) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TKOUNUM into the C register (code “LQD C, (IY + R_TKOUNUM))”). The label R_TKOUNUM is an offset address of the latter half variation number area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register.

  In line number 3680, the value of the C register is updated by -1 (decrement by 1) (code "DEC C"). The value of the C register becomes a value of 0 to 9, for example.

  In line number 3690, the value of the C register (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the second half variation time value table) (code “ADD HL, C”).

  In line number 3700, the value of the C register (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is further added to the value of the HL register (code “ADD HL, C”).

  By the instructions of line number 3690 and line number 3700, a value twice the value of the C register (for example, an even value from 0 to 18) is added to the start address of the latter half fluctuation time value table in which the latter half fluctuation time values are arranged. To be done. This is because the latter half fluctuation time value is 2 bytes, and it is necessary to add even values. After the instruction of line number 3640 is executed, the value stored in the address area (2 bytes in ROM) stored in the HL register is the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number.

  In line number 3710, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (added by 1) and can be used also for preparing a variation command (ACTION) (code “INC C”).

  In line number 3720, the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number acquired from the area of the address currently stored in the HL register is added to the WA register (code “ADD WA, (HL)”). The WA register stores the total variation time value (first half variation time value + second half variation time value).

  Line number 3730 corresponds to A4607 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and the value of the WA register (addition value by command of line number 3720 (total fluctuation time value)) changes from the special figure game processing timer area (addition address = IY + R_TGAME + 1). 2 bytes area) (code “LQD (IY + R_TGAME + 1), WA”). Here, R_TGAME + 1 is an offset address of the special figure game processing timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The special figure game processing timer area is a 2-byte area of address IY + R_TGAME + 1 and address IY + R_TGAME + 2.

  In line number 3740, the value corresponding to the label C_THMD_C0 is added to the value in the B register (code “ADD B, C_THMD_C0”).

  The line number 3750 corresponds to A4610 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and calls and executes the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “CQLRW (R_THIT_MEM)” is a clear command, and the area of the address value R_THIT_MEM is set as a part of the random number storage area, and the clear data (for example, zero value) is stored in the register of FIG. 121A. ) Is cleared without storing (at least without using general-purpose register). The registers in FIG. 121A are general-purpose registers (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, IX register, IY register) outside the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 and Special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register). Therefore, even if a defect occurs in the register, the random number stored in a part of the random number storage area can be surely cleared. Conventionally, the random number storage area has been cleared by executing an instruction to store clear data (for example, a zero value) in a register or an instruction to store the stored clear data in a random number storage area. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Operation / Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, a ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, a CPU 111a) that performs a required arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( It includes register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the address specifies the information stored in the update information storage means. The storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) can extract a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and store the random number in the random number storage area of the update information storage means as the execution right of the variable display game. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) is configured to be able to execute a clear instruction (for example, "CQLRW" instruction) that clears a part of the storage area of the update information storage means without using a general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means clears the random number storage area of the update information storage means by the clear instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include a clear instruction.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no need to execute an instruction to store clear data (for example, a zero value) in a general-purpose register or an instruction to store the stored clear data in a random number storage area, and the general-purpose register has a problem. Even if it occurs, the random number stored in a part of the random number storage area can be surely cleared. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a game control program, and a storage means (for example, ROM 111b) having a data area for storing data for the game control program, The game control program includes arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing, and a register (DP register) for storing the start address of the data area in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The data area includes at least a variable time value table including variable time values relating to the variable display game. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, "LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H") for designating an area in the data area by a relative address based on the start address stored in the register (DP register). To be done. The arithmetic processing means designates the address of the variable time value table by this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such instructions.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the data is not based on the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space but by the relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the head address of the data area stored in the register. The address of the variable time value table in the area can be specified. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, since the variable time value table has two tables, a first half variable time value table and a second half variable time value table, which are often referred to, there are many benefits of reducing the code amount.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments.

  FIG. 138 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 62) according to the twelfth embodiment.

  The line number 4010 is a label (P_GATESW) corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process.

  Row numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to A7701 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4020, the rising information of the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2, the logical product is obtained with the switch bit data (judgment value) corresponding to the label C_GATE, and the switch is turned on. It is determined whether or not (code “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”). Here, the switch control area is a storage area in which the detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine are stored for each timer interrupt. The rising information (see FIG. 133B) is information indicating that the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) has changed from off to on. In the area of the address R_SWCTL + 2, rising information is stored in the switch control area in which information about the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is stored.

  If there is no game ball passing through the universal starting gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the gate switch 34a is zero, the operation result (logical product) becomes zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, when the switch bit is turned on at "00000100B"), the operation result (logical product) is not zero (for example, "00000100B"). , Zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  In line number 4030, when the operation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is ended, and the process returns to the universal figure game process (FIG. 61) (code “RET Z”). ). That is, when there is no passage of the game ball in the universal figure starting gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is off, the routine returns to the universal figure game process (FIG. 61).

  Row numbers 4040 to 4070 correspond to A7702 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4040, as in line numbers 1540 and 3090, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of label C_JTN indicating that the special figure time saving is in progress (in the universal communication support state) ( Code "CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN"). If the comparison result matches during special time saving, the operation result does not become zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the comparison result does not match during special time saving, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  At line number 4050, if it is during special time saving, that is, if the comparison results match (NZ), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the ROM address corresponding to the label GATESW10, and the instructions at line number 4110 and subsequent lines are executed. Is executed (code “JR NZ, GATESW10”).

  In line number 4060, like the line number 3110, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that the big hit or the small hit is in progress (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). ). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates a RAM internal area (special figure game processing number area) for storing the special figure game processing number (A2606) with reference to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special figure game processing number “3” of the fanfare / interval processing. If the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is 3 or more during the big hit or the small hit, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), and the value is smaller than 3 whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Causes the carry flag (CF) to be set (C).

  In line number 4070, if the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC) during the big hit or the small hit, a jump (conditional branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label GATESW10, and the line number 4110 and the following lines are entered. Execute the instruction (code "JR NC, GATESW 10").

  The line number 4080 corresponds to A7703 of the gate switch monitoring process, and loads a left-handing instruction notification command (a numerical value corresponding to the label C_LEFTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_LEFTCOM”).

  The line number 4090 corresponds to A7704 of the gate switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  Row numbers 4110 to 4130 correspond to A7705 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4110, the A register is loaded with the value (general figure pending number) stored in the general figure pending number storage area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_FHORYU (code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the general-use figure hold number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  In line number 4120, the number of ordinary figures in the A register is compared with the upper limit value (here, 4), and if it is smaller than the upper limit value, a carry flag (CF) is set. ) Is not set (code “CP A, 4”).

  In line number 4130, when the number of reserved universal figures reaches the upper limit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the routine returns to the universal figure game process (FIG. 61) (code “RET NC”).

  The line number 4140 corresponds to A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process, and updates the general figure reservation number, which is the value of the general figure reservation number area of the RAM address IY + R_FHORYU, by +1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The RAM address IY + R_FHORYU is an addition address obtained by adding the value “2800h” stored in the IY register and the value corresponding to the label R_FHORYU. Here, the 1-byte value (general figure pending number) stored in the general figure pending number area of address IY + R_FHORY can be directly updated by +1 without storing it in the register (at least the general register) of FIG. 121A.

  Row numbers 4150 to 4170 correspond to A7707 of the gate switch monitoring process. At line number 4150, the head address (numerical value corresponding to the label R_FRNDMEM) of the random number storage area for universal figure reservation (universal figure reserve storage area) is loaded into the HL register (code “LDY HL, R_FRNDMEM”).

  In line number 4160, the value of the A register is added to the value of the A register in order to double the value of the A register (universal figure reservation number before updating +1, which is 0 to 3) (code "ADD A, A "). As a result, the value of the A register changes from 0 to 6.

  In line number 4170, the value of the A register (value from 0 to 6) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the general-use reservation storage area) (code “ADD HL, A”). At this point in time, the value of the HL register is the address of the hit random number storage area for the most recently generated latest universal figure reservation.

  Row numbers 4180 to 4190 correspond to A7708 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4180, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a winning random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  In line number 4190, the value of the A register as a hit random number is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (the latest random number storage area of the reserved random number in the general figure), and then the address in the HL register. To the next address (code “LQD (HL +), A”). Since the hit random number is 1 byte, and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by 1.

  In line number 4200, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a winning symbol random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND3_L)”).

  In line number 4210, the value of the A register as a winning symbol random number is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (the latest random symbol holding random symbol storing area) (code “LD ( HL), A "). Here, since there is no random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated.

  At line number 4220, the process returns to the universal figure game process (FIG. 61) (code “RET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “CHK (R_SWCB), n” is obtained by taking the logical product of the judgment value n and the value (rising information) of the switch control area and detecting the switch state (switch bit ON / OFF) can be determined. Note that R_SWCB is the address of the rising information of the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of rising information is turned on. The "CHK" command can determine whether the switch is turned on without executing the command for acquiring the value stored in the switch control area and stored in the register. Since the determination of the detection state of the switch is made without using the register, the determination can be surely made even if a defect occurs in the register. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “CHK (R_SWCB), n”.

[Operation and effect of twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game based on the detected state of a predetermined switch (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a). The game control means (game control device 100) is provided to perform game control for generating a game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, a ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, a CPU 111a) that performs a required arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( It includes register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means includes a switch control area which is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and which can store the detection state of the switch. The arithmetic processing means stores the state of the value stored in the storage area based on the value of the storage area and the predetermined determination value without storing the value of any storage area of the update information storage means in the general-purpose register. A command that can be determined (for example, “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”) is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch by this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the detection state of the switch can be determined without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the general-purpose register. Since the determination of the detection state of the switch is performed without using the general-purpose register, the determination can be surely made even if a problem occurs in the general-purpose register, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 139. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. The thirteenth embodiment is an embodiment relating to the program structure of various editing processes.

  FIG. 139A is a program list showing a partial program structure of the segment LED edit processing (FIG. 72) according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 139B is a program list showing a conventional program structure of LED editing processing.

  A line number 4500 in FIG. 139A is a label (P_SEGEDIT) corresponding to the segment LED edit processing, and indicates the ROM address of the program module corresponding to the segment LED edit processing.

  The line number 4510 corresponds to step A9201 of the segment LED edit processing (FIG. 72) and updates the value (flashing control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM by +1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)”). The label R_DSPTIM is an offset address of the blink control timer area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register. Here, the 1-byte value stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM (the number reserved for general-purpose figures) can be directly updated by +1 without storing it in the register (at least the general-purpose register) of FIG. 121A.

  Line numbers 4520 and 4530 correspond to A9202 of the segment LED edit processing. In line number 4520, it is determined whether or not the value (flicker control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM as the blink control timer area matches the output on timing 20h (code “CHK (IY + R_DSPTIM), 20H”). That is, it is logically ANDed with 20h indicating the output on-timing to determine whether a predetermined bit (bit 5 in this case, bit 0 is the least significant bit) of the blink control timer area is 0 or 1. The output on-timing 20h (00100000B) is 32 in decimal number, which corresponds to 128 ms (= interrupt cycle (4 ms) × 32). Since the value of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM is updated by +1 every 4 ms, its bit 5 repeats alternating changes of 0 and 1 every 128 ms, and it is possible to know the desired timing by performing the comparison judgment. it can. When the comparison judgments match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In line number 4530, if the blinking control timer matches the output on timing, that is, if the comparison result in line number 4520 is a match (T), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the ROM address corresponding to label EDIT10. , And executes the instructions on and after the line number 4570 (code “JRST, EDIT10”).

  Line numbers 4540 and 4550 correspond to A9204 of the segment LED edit processing. On line number 4540, the relative address (D_FHOLED2-5000H) is set to the start address (numerical value corresponding to the label D_FHOLED2) of the universal figure reservation number display table 2 and is loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H"). ). As a result, the universal figure reservation number display table 2 is set. The relative address is an address based on the head address “5000h” of the user program data area (in the ROM).

  This "LQDD" instruction uses a relative address (essentially 1 byte) instead of an absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as an operand, so the number of bytes of a machine language instruction is larger than that of a normal LD instruction. It is reduced by 1 byte (for example, reduced from 3 bytes to 2 bytes). Note that the relative address (for example, 000h to BFFh) is essentially 2 bytes, but if the mnemonic (machine language instruction part) is changed corresponding to the value of the upper byte (for example, 0 to B) of the relative address, it is substantially The relative address can be indicated by the lower byte (1 byte).

  At line number 4550, a jump (branch) is made to an address in the ROM corresponding to the label EDIT20 (code "JR EDIT20").

  The line number 4570 corresponds to A9203 of the segment LED editing process, and sets the head address (numerical value corresponding to the label D_FHOLD1) of the universal figure reservation number display table 1 to the relative address (D_FHOLD1-5000H) and loads it to the HL register. (Code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED1-5000H"). As a result, the universal figure reservation number display table 1 is set.

  Line numbers 4590 to 4630 correspond to A9205 of the segment LED edit processing. In line number 4590, similarly to line number 4110, the A register is loaded with the value (general figure pending number) stored in the general figure pending number storage area (in RAM) of addition address IY + R_FHORYU (code “LQD A, ( IY + R_FHORYU) "). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the general-use figure hold number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The addition address IY + R_FORYU is the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800h”) plus the offset address corresponding to the label R_FHORYU. The offset address is a relative address (differential address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  The offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address "xxxxxh"), and the code "LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)" at line number 4590 can be a 2-byte instruction. .. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address becomes 2 bytes, and the instruction at line number 4590 becomes 3 bytes.

  In line number 4610, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register as the display data corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). ). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the head address of the general-use figure reservation number display table) and the value of the A register (general figure reservation number). In line number 4610, display data is acquired from the number-of-universal-drawings reservation display table corresponding to the number of retained-university figures.

  Here, the display data corresponding to the number of public figures held will be described with reference to FIG. 139C. FIG. 139C (I) shows a lighting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking) of the lamps D15 and D16 of the universal figure holding indicator 56. FIG. 139C (II) shows the universal figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2. In the universal figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2, display data (1 byte) corresponding to the figure figure reservation numbers 1 to 4 are arranged and stored for each byte in order from the head address. Therefore, display data corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures is stored in the total address, which is the sum of the start address of the number of reserved universal figures display table and the number of reserved universal figures.

  If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2, so the general figure reservation indicator 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data of the figure hold number display table 2 are different, the figure hold indicator 56 blinks. With bit 0 as the least significant bit, in the present embodiment, bit 5 of the display data is set to “1” when the lamp D15 is turned on, and bit 4 of the display data is turned on when the lamp D16 is turned on. It is set to "1". For example, when the number of reserved universal figures is 2, the display data is "00110000B", bits 4 and 5 are on "1", and the lamps D15 and D16 of the universal figure reservation indicator 56 are turned on. When the universal figure hold indicator 56 blinks with the number of hold 3 to 4, the lamp D15 (or the lamp D16) is lit while the bit 5 (or the bit 4) of the blink control timer area is 1 at the output on timing. , 0, the lamp D15 (or the lamp D16) is turned off.

  In line number 4620, the logical product of the value of the addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3 as the segment area (1 byte) of the universal figure pending display 56 and “11001111B” is obtained, and bits 4 and 5 of the data in the segment area are cleared to zero. (Code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3), 11001111B”).

  At line number 4630, the value of the A register is saved (set) in the segment area (addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3 area) of the universal figure reservation display 56 as display data corresponding to the number of universal figure reservations (code “OR (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3)). , A ”).

  In the program module having the conventional structure of FIG. 139B, two codes “LD HL, R_DSPTIM” “IQNC (HL)” of line number 5010 and line number 5020 are replaced with the code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)” of line number 4510 of FIG. 139A. Correspond. Note that "IQNC (HL)" is not a conventional instruction. The code at line number 4510 in FIG. 139A is 2 bytes “AA77” in machine language, whereas these two instructions require 4 bytes in total, which increases the program capacity. Particularly, in line number 5010, R_DSPTIM is used as an absolute address (2 bytes “2877h”) instead of an offset address (1 byte “77h”), which causes an increase in program capacity. As shown in FIG. 139B, in the machine language stored in the ROM, the beginning of the 2-byte address is the lower byte and the next is the upper byte.

  Further, in the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD A, (R_FHORYU)” at line number 6000 corresponds to the code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)” at line number 4590 in FIG. 139A. In line number 6000, R_FHORYU is used as an absolute address (2 bytes “2861h”) instead of an offset address (1 byte “61h”), so the number of bytes of the code is increased by 1 byte compared to line number 4590. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  Further, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD HL, D_FHOLD 2” at line number 5050 and the code “LD HL, D_FHOLD 1” at line number 5080 are respectively the code “LQDD at line number 4540 in FIG. 139A. HL, D_FHOLD2-5000H "and the code" LQDD HL, D_FHOLD1-5000H "in line number 4570. In the code of line number 5050 and line number 5080, the address designation is performed by the absolute address (for example, "503F" and "5037"), not the relative address (difference from the reference address "5000h", for example, "3F" and "37"). , The number of bytes in the code has increased by 1 byte (from 2 bytes to 3 bytes). Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  Further, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), since the code “LQD A, (HL + A)” of the line number 4610 of FIG. 139A is not present, the number of programs increases from the line numbers 6000 to 6070.

  Further, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the two codes “LD A, (R_SEGDAT + 3)” and “AND 11001111B” of the line number 6040 and the line number 6050 are the same as the code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3) of the line number 4620 of FIG. 139A. ), 11001111B ”. Since two codes are used in the line number 6040 and the line number 6050, the number of bytes of the code is increased by 1 byte from the line number 4620.

  FIG. 140 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the external information editing process (FIG. 75) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  A line number 5500 is a label (P_INFEDIT) corresponding to the external information editing process, and indicates the ROM address (start address) of the program module corresponding to the external information editing process.

  Line numbers 5510 to 5530 correspond to A9501 to A9502 of the external information editing process. In line number 5510, the value stored in the glass frame opening error area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_GLASS is loaded into the A register (code “LQD A, (IY + R_GLASS)”). The label R_GLASS is an offset address of the glass frame opening error area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. As for the value of the glass frame opening error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to "1" when the glass frame opening error is occurring.

  In line number 5520, the logical sum of the value stored in the main frame opening error area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_WAKU and the value of the A register is calculated (code “OR A, (IY + R_WAKU)”). The label R_WAKU is an offset address of the main frame opening error area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register. As for the value of the body frame opening error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to "1" if a body frame opening error is occurring.

  In line number 5530, when a glass frame opening error or a body frame opening error occurs and the logical sum is not zero (F), a jump (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT10 is performed, and line numbers 5570 and later are displayed. Is executed (code “JRS F, INFEDIT10”).

  Line number 5540 corresponds to A9503 and A9504 of the external information editing process. In line number 5540, the logical product of the value of the area of address R_INFDAT2 as the external information output data area (1 byte) and the value for clearing (clear data) “11001111B” is calculated, and the door / frame opening signal and the security signal are The off data is saved in the external information output data area (code “AQND (R_INFDAT2), 11001111B”). The external information output data area is an abnormality control area that indicates the detection state of various abnormalities (ON / OFF of an abnormal signal) for each bit. Bit 4 of the external information output data area (abnormality control area) is a bit that sets the abnormal state (on) of the door / frame opening signal, and bit 5 is a bit that sets the abnormal state (on) of the security signal. , Zero cleared here.

  At line number 5550, a jump (conditional branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT20, and the instructions at line number 5600 and subsequent lines are executed (code "JR INFEDIT20").

  Line number 5570 corresponds to A9505 of the external information editing process. In line number 5570, the logical sum of the value of the external information output data area (area of address R_INFDAT2) and the on-data “00010000B” of the door / frame opening signal is calculated and set in the external information output data area (abnormality control area). Save the ON data of the door / frame opening signal (set ON) (code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00010000B”).

  Line number 5580 corresponds to A9506 of the external information editing process. In line number 5580, the logical sum of the value of the test signal output data area (area of address R_SKNDAT) and the on-data “01000000B” of the gaming machine error status signal is calculated and set in the test signal output data area (abnormality control area). The ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved (set to ON) (code “OQR (R_SKNDAT), 01000000B”).

  Line number 5600 corresponds to A9507 of the external information editing process. In line number 5600, if the value (security signal control timer) of the security signal control timer area of the addition address IY + R_SECUTIM is not 0, -1 is updated, and if it is 0, 0 is maintained (code "DQCP (IY + R_SECUTIM), 0"). ). The label R_SECUTIM is the offset address of the security signal control timer area. This "DQCP" instruction decrements the value stored in the security signal control timer area without getting it in the arrester.

  The line number 5610 corresponds to A9508 of the external information editing process. In line number 5610, when the operation result of line number 5600 is zero (Z), that is, when the security signal control timer is 0, the line number 5640 is jumped (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT30. The subsequent instructions are executed (code “JR Z, INFEDIT30”).

  Line number 5620 corresponds to A9509 of the external information editing process. The on-data “0010000B” of the security signal is saved (set to ON) in the external information output data area (abnormal control area) of the address R_INFDAT2 (code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00100000B”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “AQND (R_ERR), ... 0 ... B” is a value stored in the abnormal control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. And a clear value (clear data) "... 0 ... B" are ANDed to clear a predetermined bit in the abnormal control area. Each bit in the abnormality control area indicates that a predetermined abnormality (error signal) has occurred. Therefore, the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred can be cleared without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored in the abnormality control area in the register. Therefore, even if a defect occurs in the register, the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality control area can be surely cleared. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, as described above, the code generally described as “OQR (R_ERR), ... 1 ... B” is stored in the abnormal control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. And a set value (setting data) “... 1 ... B” are ORed to set a predetermined bit in the abnormality control area to ON. Therefore, the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred can be set ON without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored in the abnormality control area in the register. For this reason, even if a defect occurs in the register, the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality control area can be reliably set to ON. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  In the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242), the code “AQND (R_ERR), ... 0 ... B” and the code “OQR (R_ERR) ,. A dedicated logic circuit for executing the above may be provided.

[Operation and effect of thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, a ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, a CPU 111a) that performs a required arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register group including a plurality of general-purpose registers ( It includes register banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means includes an abnormality control area which is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and which indicates the detected state of abnormality of the gaming machine in bit units. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, an “OQR” instruction) for setting a predetermined bit in one of the storage areas of the update information storage means without using a general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means sets a predetermined bit of the abnormality control area of the update information storage means by this command when an abnormality of the gaming machine is detected. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such instructions.

  As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even if a problem occurs in the general-purpose register, it is possible to reliably set the bit in the error control area indicating that the error has occurred. And, since the instruction for storing the value of the abnormal control area in the register is unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a game control program and includes a storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) having a data area for storing data for the game control program. .. The game control device 100 is provided with a register (DP register) for storing the start address of the data area in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) is an instruction that specifies an area in the data area by a relative address based on the start address stored in the register (DP register) (for example, "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H").

  Therefore, an instruction to specify an area in the data area by a relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the data area stored in the register, not by an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space Can be used. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a head address designation register (IY register) for storing the head address of the update information storage means in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) is an instruction that specifies an area in the update information storage means by an offset address based on the start address stored in the start address specification register ( For example, "LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)").

  Therefore, instead of an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space, an area within the update information storage unit is defined by an offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage unit stored in the register. You can use an instruction that specifies Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, the storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) sets the number of start memories that are the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Can be stored in. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) specifies one of the storage areas of the update information storage means by the offset address based on the start address stored in the start address specification register, and sets the value of the storage area to a predetermined general purpose. An instruction (eg, “LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)”) to read to the register is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) reads out the number of starting memories stored in the reserved number area by this command.

  Therefore, instead of the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space, the offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the head address of the update information storage means stored in the register is used as a hold in the update information storage means. You can use instructions that specify a number of areas. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, since the reserved number area is often referred to in various processes of the game control program, there are many benefits of reducing the code amount.

[Fourteenth Embodiment]
In conventional game machines, a plurality of instructions are combined to cause the CPU to execute each execution content at the conditional branch and branch destination, but in the present embodiment, one instruction makes each execution at the conditional branch and branch destination. And let the CPU execute. As a result, even if the control content is the same as the conventional one, the code amount of the program can be made smaller than the conventional one, and in the ROM storing the program, the capacity required for storing the program code can be made compact. .. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to thirteenth embodiments. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to the program code (program list).

  FIG. 141 is a program list for explaining a part of the program structure according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, the program code of the random number updating process 2 using the instruction peculiar to the present embodiment will be described, and three instructions (mnemonics) of “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” that are the gist of the present embodiment will be described. Will be mainly described. The random number update process 2 is labeled as “P_RNDINC2” and is called in step A10402 of the main process (FIG. 124A) and step A1307 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125).

  The code “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)” in line number 6010 corresponds to A10601 in the random number update process 2 (FIG. 126). This code has the content (instruction) of adding 1 to the value of the variable pattern random number 1 (R_RNDHEN1), which is a 2-byte random number, in 2 bytes as it is, by the instruction (mnemonic) "IQNCW". Here, R_RNDHEN1 is a label indicating the start address of the random number area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is stored (stored), and R_RNDHEN2 appearing below stores (stores) the fluctuation pattern random number 2. R_RNDHEN3 is a label indicating the address of the random number area, and R_RNDHEN3 is a label indicating the address of the random number area in which the variation pattern random number 3 is stored (stored). The random number area is also called a random number counter area because random numbers are added or subtracted in the random number area. In the present specification, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in the storage area of the RAM 111c that is the update information storage unit that stores the information updated by the arithmetic processing unit (CPU 111a, CPU core 102). It may be stored in other information storage means (excluding the register).

  That is, the instruction "INCNCW" converts the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area into the value stored in the address destination area without using the register (at least the general register) in FIG. 121A. It is an instruction to directly add +1 without temporarily storing it in the register of FIG. 121A. A storage area corresponding to an address (address) is called an address destination area or an address destination. Therefore, by using the "IQNCW" instruction, it is not necessary to write three codes, that is, loading into a register, addition processing in a register, and loading into an address destination, and the program is more compact than a conventional program. Become. In addition, directly adding the value stored at the address destination by "IQNCW" does not use the register, so that the interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring during the load from the register to the address destination, or There is no need to save to the stack or switch banks when enabling interrupts. 121A is a general-purpose register (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register IX register, IY register) outside the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242. And special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register).

  As will be described later, there is an instruction “DQECW” that decrements a predetermined 2-byte area as an instruction similar to “IQNCW”, and “DQECW” does not use the register (at least the general register) of FIG. 121A. Is an instruction for directly subtracting -1 from the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area. Further, as an instruction similar to the addition instruction “IQNCW” for the address destination 2-byte area, there is the above-mentioned instruction “IQNC” which is an addition instruction for the address destination 1-byte area, which is similar to “DQECW”. There is an instruction called "DQEC" which is a subtraction instruction for the 1-byte area at the address destination.

  The code “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240” in line number 6030 corresponds to A10602 in FIG. This code uses the instruction "IQCP" to update the value of R_RNDHEN2 by +1 when the value of R_RNDHEN2 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 stored at the address destination) is smaller than 240 (increment processing), and R_RNDHEN2 When the value of is not smaller than 240, 0 is assigned to R_RNDHEN2 to initialize the variation pattern random number 2. That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 circulates in the range of 0 to 240 with 240 as the upper limit, and returns to 0 after reaching 240.

  Explaining the instruction "IQCP" again, the value before the comma in the operand is defined as the target value (value stored at the address destination), and the value after the comma is defined as the judgment value (here, 240). It is determined whether the value stored in the address is smaller than the judgment value, and if it is smaller, the value stored in the target address is incremented, and if it is not smaller, 0 is set as the initial value. Is an instruction for substituting the value stored in the address to be initialized.

  Conventionally, in order to execute the relevant instruction, a code (“JP”, “JR”, etc.) for dividing the condition depending on whether R_RNDHEN2 is smaller than 240 or not smaller than 240 is described. It had been. Further, as a branch destination instruction of the condition, a code that increments R_RNDHEN2 when R_RNDHEN2 is smaller than 240 is described, and a code that substitutes 0 into R_RNDHEN2 is described when R_RNDHEN2 is not smaller than 240. It was That is, at least three codes (instructions) have been described in the past, but in the present embodiment, since they are described by one code, the program capacity is reduced. Note that, for example, the machine language instruction of the code "IQCP (vw), n" (vw is the direct value of the address) when directly designating the address is 5 bytes, but the address is an arbitrary register qq (= WA, BC , DE, HL, IX, IY), the machine language instruction of the code “IQCP (qq), n” when the address is indirectly specified becomes 3 bytes (however, the instruction to load the address into the pair register qq is Will be required).

  The code “DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238” in line number 6050 corresponds to A10603 in FIG. This code initializes R_RNDHEN3 by substituting 238 into R_RNDHEN3 when the value of R_RNDHEN3 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored at the address destination) is 0 by the instruction "DQCP", and other than that. In the case (that is, other than 0), the value of R_RNDHEN3 is updated by -1 (decrement processing). That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 circulates in the range of 238 to 0 with 238 as the upper limit, and returns to 238 after reaching 0 as a result of decrement (the initial value 238 is set). Thus, in the instruction "DQCP", the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined to be 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value designated by the operand is stored in the predetermined area.

  Describing the instruction "DQCP" again, the value before the comma is the target value (the value stored at the address destination), and the value after the comma is the initial value (238 here) and is stored at the target address. The value stored in the target address is decremented when it is not 0, and the initial value is stored in the target address when it is 0. It is an instruction that substitutes the value and initializes it.

  Similarly to the “IQCP” instruction, the “DQCP” instruction can be described with one code, although the content was conventionally described with at least three codes. In addition, since “DQCP” and “IQCP” cause the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) to execute the instruction content without using the registers 1220A and 1220B, like “IQNCW”, The setting of interrupt prohibition is not necessary, the PUSH and POP instructions of the register value are unnecessary, or the bank switching is unnecessary. The CPU core 102 (in the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the instructions of “DQCP”, “IQCP” and “IQNCW”.

  Although the code for updating the random numbers has been described for the three instructions "IQNCW", "IQCP", and "DQCP" that are the gist of the present embodiment, "IQNCW", "IQCP", and "DQCP" are described. May be used to update the timer and the counter, respectively.

  Further, "IQNCW" may be one that adds the address value itself, and "IQCP" and "DQCP" respectively judge the address value itself and initialize the address value / address value according to the result of the judgment. It can be added (increased) or subtracted (decreased).

  Further, the program code of the random number updating process 2 given here is an example for realizing the control content in the random number updating process 2. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 updates the random number value by increment, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 increments. The random number value is updated by and the random number value of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated by decrement. In updating each random number value, it is possible to arbitrarily combine whether to use the instruction to increment or the instruction to decrement. ..

  FIG. 142 is a program list for explaining a part of the special figure game processing according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, a program code of special figure game processing using an instruction peculiar to the present embodiment will be described, and one instruction (mnemonic) “DQECW” which is the gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described. .. The special figure game process corresponds to the label "P_TGAMEPRC" and is called in step A1309 of the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 8 and 125).

  The code in the line number 6510 corresponds to A2601 in the special figure game process (FIG. 21). This code is a content for calling a subroutine (starting opening switch monitoring process) corresponding to the label “P_SIDOSW”.

  The code in line number 6520 corresponds to A2602 in FIG. This code is a content for calling a subroutine (special winning opening switch monitoring processing) corresponding to the label “P_CNTSW”.

  The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” in line number 6540 corresponds to A2603 in FIG. As described above, the label R_TGAME indicates the address (here, an absolute address) of the special figure game processing number area in which the special figure game processing number (A2606) is stored, and the address “R_TGAME + 1” obtained by adding 1 to the address is The start address (absolute address here) of the special figure game processing timer area, which is a 2-byte area, is shown. This code is an instruction for the area of the address “R_TGAME + 1”. Specifically, if the value of the area of the address destination of R_TGAME + 1 is not 0, the value of the special figure game processing timer, which is a 2-byte numerical value, is updated by -1, and if the value of the area of the same address destination is 0, This is an instruction for substituting the numerical value (= 0) specified by the operand as the value of the special figure game processing timer and maintaining 0. As described above, in the instruction “DQCPW”, the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined to be 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value designated by the operand is stored in the predetermined area. A code using an addition address of “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” can also be used. The code "DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0" using an absolute address as "R_TGAME + 1" is 6 bytes in a machine language instruction, while the code "DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0" using an offset address as "R_TGAME + 1" Is a machine language instruction and has 5 bytes, so the number of bytes (capacity) is small.

  The code in line number 6550 corresponds to A2604 in FIG. 21, and if the value at the destination (special figure game processing timer area) of the address of R_TGAME + 1 is not 0 (time is not up), the label “TGAMEPRC10 in line number 6610 is displayed. Is executed by jumping to the address in the ROM corresponding to "," and the instructions on and after the line number 6620 are executed.

  The code in line number 6570 corresponds to A2605 in FIG. 21, and has the content of loading the start address D_TGAMEPRC of the special figure game sequence branch table into the HL register.

  The codes in line numbers 6580 to 6600 correspond to A2606 and A2607 in FIG.

  At line number 6580, the value (special figure game processing number) stored in the special figure game processing number area (in RAM) of the addition address IY + R_TGAME is loaded into the A register (code “LQD A, (IY + R_TGAME))”). .. The label R_TGAME is an offset address of the special figure game processing number area based on the value "2800H" of the IY register.

  At line number 6590, the special figure game processing number which is the value of the A register is doubled.

  In line number 6600, first, the total address HL + A is acquired by adding the value of the A register after doubling to the start address of the special figure game sequence branch table stored in the HL register. The reason for doubling is that since the branch destination address value in the special figure game sequence branch table is 2 bytes, it is necessary to add an even value (the special figure game processing number includes an odd value).

  Then, the code "CALL (HL + A)" of the line number 6600 indicates that a subroutine call by the processing number is performed by the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A (area in the special figure game sequence branch table). is there. The value of the HL register does not change to (the value of the HL register + the value of the A register) by this code, and the value of the head address of the special figure game sequence branch table is maintained. The subroutine call corresponds to A2608 to A2618 in FIG. The branch destination address value is the start address of the subroutine. In the present embodiment, in the branch process of the special figure game sequence table in the special figure game process, the instruction “CALL (HL + A)” refers to the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A to execute the subroutine. Although it is described that a call is made, “CALL (HL + A)” may be used in the branch process of the universal figure game sequence table in the universal figure game process. That is, "CALL (HL + A)" is used as the code of A7607 of the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the code in line number 6620 corresponds to A2619 in FIG. 21, and the code in line number 6630 corresponds to A2620 in FIG. The code in line number 6650 corresponds to A2621 in FIG. 21, and the code in line number 6660 corresponds to A2622 in FIG.

  Here, to explain the instruction "DQCPW" again, the value before the comma is the target value (the 2-byte value stored at the address), and the value after the comma is the initial value (here 0), This is an instruction for determining whether or not the target value is 0, decrementing the target value if it is not 0, and substituting the initial value for the target value if it is 0. “DQCPW” is a 2-byte version of the above-mentioned “DQCP”. In other words, it is an instruction for directly determining 2 bytes for the target value and directly updating the target value by 1 from the 2-byte value according to the determination result.

  In addition, "IQCPW" as a 2-byte version of "IQCP" is also specifically devised in the present invention for the operation of an area for storing a 2-byte value. It is an instruction that directly determines and updates the target value directly by +1 from the value of 2 bytes according to the determination result. That is, in the "IQCPW" instruction, the upper limit value is defined, and when the value of 2 bytes stored in the predetermined area is smaller than the upper limit value, the value is directly updated by +1. When the upper limit value is reached, the value of 2 bytes is updated. Return to 0.

  FIG. 143 is a program list for explaining a part of the special figure game sequence branch table according to the fourteenth embodiment. As described above, the special figure game sequence branch table is labeled as "D_TGAMEPRC" and is referred to for the subroutine call of the special figure game processing.

  There is a "DW" mnemonic in the code, but this mnemonic is a pseudo-instruction that specifies to the assembler that one stage of the table is 2-byte data.

  In FIG. 143, the special figure game sequence branch table is shown as an instruction group of pseudo instructions for setting the subroutine name (label) in association with the branch destination address value. The branch table is a list of branch destination address values (start addresses of subroutines) that are sequentially set (stored) in the ROM 111b by these instruction groups. That is, the special figure game sequence branch table in the ROM 111b is obtained by replacing the labels (P_TUSUL, P_TSTOP, etc.) in FIG. 143 with the branch destination address values.

  The pseudo instruction at line number 7010 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2608 in FIG. 21, and the pseudo instruction at the line number 7020 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2609. The pseudo instruction at line number 7030 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2610, and the pseudo instruction at the line number 7040 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2611. The pseudo instruction at line number 7050 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2612, and the pseudo instruction at the line number 7060 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2613.

  The pseudo instruction at line number 7070 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2614, and the pseudo instruction at the line number 7080 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2615. The pseudo instruction at line number 7090 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2616, and the pseudo instruction at the line number 7100 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine A2617 and the setting of the line number 7110. The pseudo instruction corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2618.

[Operation / Effect of Fourteenth Embodiment]
According to the fourteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means stores game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The update information storage means (for example, RAM111c) stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and is capable of storing a 2-byte random number value (for example, variation pattern random number 1) for determining the mode of the variation display game, or game control. A 2-byte timer area capable of storing a 2-byte timer value (for example, the value of the special figure game processing timer) for measuring the progress of The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an addition instruction (for example, “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)”) that adds the 2-byte value stored at the target address without storing it in the general-purpose register. Further, the arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a subtraction instruction (for example, “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0”) that subtracts the 2-byte value stored at the target address without storing it in the general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means is a 2-byte random value in a random number area (for example, a random number generation area of the variable pattern random number 1) or a 2-byte timer area (for example, special figure game processing timer area) in accordance with an addition instruction or a subtraction instruction. Add or subtract the timer value of.

  The addition instruction or the subtraction instruction is, for example, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, or “DQCPW”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. The addition instruction or the subtraction instruction does not store in the general-purpose register, that is, without using the general-purpose register, and directly adds (increases) the target value of the instruction (the value stored in the storage area of the address destination) or It is an instruction to subtract (decrease). "IQCP", "DQCP", "IQNC", and "DQEC" are addition or subtraction instructions for adding or subtracting the 1-byte value stored at the target address without storing it in the general-purpose register. The same effect as “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, and “DQCPW” is obtained.

  When any of the addition or subtraction instructions such as “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, “DQEC”, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, “DQCPW” is used for updating the random number value, the random number counter area is used. Since the random number counter is incremented or decremented without acquiring the value stored in the (random number area) in the general-purpose register, the random-number counter is not updated due to a malfunction of the general-purpose register, and the random numbers are biased. It can be prevented from occurring. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. Further, the codes by these instructions are not limited to the codes (for example, "IQCP (vw), n") when the address is directly specified by the direct value vw, but the address can be any register qq (= WA, BC, DE, HL). , IX, IY) once and then indirectly specifying the address (eg, “IQCP (qq), n”).

  In addition, when either the addition instruction or the subtraction instruction is used for updating the timer, it is possible to avoid the situation where the progress of the game is not progressed because the timer is not updated due to the malfunction of the register. When it is used, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the winning is not reflected and the time saving continues at a predetermined number of times without ending.

  Further, as a feature of the addition instruction or the subtraction instruction, conventionally, it is necessary to describe a plurality of codes, but in the present embodiment, it is possible to represent one code, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity. .. For example, the "IQCP" instruction requires only 5 bytes for one code, and the "IQCPW" instruction requires only 6 bytes for one code. However, since multiple codes are not required, the program is compact as a whole. Therefore, the program capacity is reduced.

  In addition, since the target value of the instruction (the value stored at the address destination) is directly added (incremented) or subtracted (decreased) without using the general-purpose register, during the period in which the process represented by the one code is executed. Since it is not necessary to set the interrupt prohibition to protect the value of the general-purpose register, the program capacity (corresponding to the code amount required for the interrupt disable setting and the interrupt enable setting) can be reduced accordingly.

  Furthermore, since the value that is the target of the instruction is added or subtracted without using the general-purpose register, the value of the general-purpose register is saved in the stack or the register bank is switched during the period in which the process represented by the one code is executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and the program capacity (the amount of code for saving and restoring the value of the general-purpose register or the amount of code for bank switching and returning the bank) can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address and can store a random number value for determining the mode of the variable display game ((for example, a variation pattern. A random number area (random number generation area) of the random numbers 2 and 3. The arithmetic processing means compares the value stored at the target address with a predetermined determination value without storing it in the general-purpose register, and the result of the comparison is If the predetermined judgment value is smaller, the increment process is executed on the value stored in the target address, and if the result of the comparison is that the predetermined judgment value is not smaller, the target address is An increment instruction for initializing the stored value (for example, "IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240") is configured to be executable. , The value of the random number counter area is compared with a predetermined judgment value, and when the predetermined judgment value is smaller, the increment processing is executed to the value of the random number counter area, and when the predetermined judgment value is not smaller, Initializes the value in the random number counter area.

  Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value stored in the target address is zero without storing it in the general-purpose register, and if the result of the determination is affirmative, the arithmetic address is stored in the target address. If the stored value is initialized and the result of the determination is negative, a decrement instruction (for example, "DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238") that performs decrement processing on the value stored at the target address can be executed. Is composed of. The arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value of the random number counter area is zero by the decrement instruction, initializes the value of the random number counter area when it is zero, and sets it to the value of the random number counter area when it is not zero. Executes decrement processing.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, by using the increment instruction and the decrement instruction, loading to the general-purpose register, addition processing and comparison processing (judgment processing) in the general-purpose register, and random number counter area (address destination area) are performed. It is not necessary to write three codes called load, which makes the program more compact and reduces the program capacity than the conventional program. In addition, direct addition or subtraction of the value stored in the random number counter area (area of the address destination) by the increment instruction or decrement instruction does not use a general-purpose register, which causes a problem even if interrupt processing occurs. There are no advantages.

  Further, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the game control program storage means includes a table area having a plurality of storage areas specified by one address. For example, the table area is an area for storing the special figure game sequence branch table in the data area. The table area stores, for each storage area, the address of a subroutine selected as the game progresses. The game control means is provided with a first register that stores the top address of the table area, and a second register that stores a value acquired according to the progress of the game. The arithmetic processing means derives an address value obtained by adding the value stored in the second register (corresponding to the special figure game processing number) to the value stored in the first register (starting address value of the table area), and the derived address. The instruction (for example, "CALL (HL + A)") that calls the processing of the address stored in the value is configured to be executable. By this instruction, the arithmetic processing means calls a subroutine of an address stored in a specific storage area in the table area to control the progress of the game. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such instructions.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, a subroutine call can be executed without separately providing an instruction for calculating the address of the subroutine, so that the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced.

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
In the fifteenth embodiment, “CQPW” and “CQHKW”, which are instructions for comparing a value stored at an address destination with a predetermined value without storing it in the register (at least a general register) of FIG. 121A, will be described. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to the program code (program list).

  FIG. 144 is a program list explaining a part of the program structure according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, a program code corresponding to a modified example 1 of the special figure game process using an instruction peculiar to the present embodiment will be described, and an instruction “CQPW” which is the gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described.

  The code of the modified example 1 of the special figure game processing in the fifteenth embodiment is, in particular, the special figure game processing in the fourteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 142 in which the line numbers 7540 to 7570 corresponding to A2603 to A2604 in FIG. Since it is different from the code of, it will be described below.

  Specifically, the code “CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” at line number 7540 is stored in the 2-byte special figure game processing timer area corresponding to the address “R_TGAME + 1” (here, an absolute address) by the instruction “CQPW”. This is the content (command) of comparing the stored value of the special figure game processing timer (value to be determined) with the comparison value (here, 0).

  In the instruction “CQPW”, the value before the comma in the operand is defined as the value to be determined (determination target value), and the value after the comma is defined as the comparison value (here, 0). Then, as a result of comparing the determination target value and the comparison value, it is an instruction to determine whether the determination target value and the comparison value are the same or not.

  The code "JR Z, TGAMEPRC10" in line number 7550 jumps to the label TGAMEPRC10 (address corresponding to the label TGAMEPR) when the determination results are the same (when the special figure game processing timer is up). It is the content.

  The code "DQECW (R_TGAME + 1)" in line number 7560 is a special figure game processing timer stored in a 2-byte area when the above determination results are not the same (when the special figure game processing timer is not up). In this process, -1 is updated (only 1 is subtracted) from the value of.

  The code “JR NZ, TGAMEPRC20” in line number 7570 is the content that jumps to the code labeled TGAMEPRC20 when the results of the above determination are not the same.

  In this way, “CQPW” is an instruction that compares a defined determination target value with a predetermined comparison value and returns a determination result (comparison result) as to whether they are the same or not.

  FIG. 145 is a program list of a modified example 2 of the special figure game process according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the "CQHKW" instruction coded at line number 8040 will be described. The code of the modified example 2 of the special figure game process is different from the code of modified example 1 of the special figure game process shown in FIG. 144 only in the line number 8040.

  The code "CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)" at line number 8040 is an instruction for determining (confirming) whether the value of the special figure game processing timer stored in the 2-byte area is a predetermined value by the instruction "CQHKW". is there. For example, 0 is defined as the predetermined value (predetermined set value). Therefore, the code has a content of determining whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0.

  Then, as a result of the determination by CQHKW, if the timer value is equal to 0, jump to TGAMEPRC10 (according to the code in line number 8050), and if not equal, the timer value is updated by -1 (code in line number 8060). ), Jump to TGAMEPRC20 (according to code in line number 8070).

  Both “CQPW” and “CQHKW” are instructions that can execute the determination process without fetching the value of the address destination area into the register. The value of the address destination area is loaded into the register, and the determination is made. Since there is no need to store the code in the area of, the code amount can be made compact. Further, since the two instructions do not require a code for register protection or bank switching, the program capacity can be reduced. In the above, as the "CQPW" instruction or the "CQHKW" instruction, a code whose address is directly designated by the absolute address "R_TGAME + 1" (6 bytes of "CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0" for machine language instruction or 4 for machine language instruction) Although the byte “CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)” is used, the number of bytes in the machine language instruction can be reduced by 1 byte by using the addition address IY + R_TGAME + 1 with “R_TGAME + 1” as the offset address (“CQPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1)”. ), 0 ”and“ CQHKW (IY + R_TGAME + 1) ”and the like).

[Operation / Effect of Fifteenth Embodiment]
According to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means stores game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The update information storage means (for example, RAM111c) stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and has a timer area (for example, a special figure game processing timer area) capable of storing a timer value for measuring the progress of the game control. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a comparison instruction (for example, a “CQPW” instruction) that compares a value stored at a target address with a predetermined comparison value without storing it in a general-purpose register. The timer value in the timer area is compared with a predetermined comparison value. Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means can execute a judgment command (for example, "CQHKW" command) for judging whether the value stored in the target address is the same as the predetermined set value without storing it in the general-purpose register. According to the determination command, it is determined whether the timer value in the timer area is equal to a predetermined set value. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such comparison instructions and determination instructions.

  As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when either the comparison instruction (“CQPW” instruction) or the determination instruction (“CQHKW” instruction) is used for updating the timer, the timer is not updated due to a malfunction of the general-purpose register. It is possible to avoid the situation where the game progresses slowly. When a comparison command (“CQPW” command) and a determination command (“CQHKW” command) are used to update a counter (rotation speed region or high probability fluctuation frequency region), the occurrence of winning is not reflected in a predetermined start. It is possible to avoid the situation where the time-saving state or the probability variation state continues without being terminated by the number of times. Note that the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these comparison instructions and determination instructions.

  Further, since the target value of the instruction (the value stored in the address destination area) is directly compared or determined without storing it in the general-purpose register, that is, without using the general-purpose register, the one code represents In the period of executing the process, it is not necessary to protect the value of the general-purpose register by setting the prohibition of interrupt, and the program capacity can be reduced accordingly (the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced).

  Further, since the general-purpose register is not used, it is not necessary to save the value of the general-purpose register to the stack or switch the register bank to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and the program capacity can be reduced accordingly (game control The code amount of the entire program is reduced).

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
In the sixteenth embodiment, as a data compression method for which a Z80 CPU for gaming machines can execute arithmetic processing, a novel compression method which has never existed and a reading method thereof will be described. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining a conventional data table in explaining the compression method of the sixteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, an assembly language code corresponding to the conventional second-half variable group table is also shown.

  The latter half fluctuation group table is a table for allocating fluctuation pattern random number 1 that circulates values from 0 to 65535, random number values 0 to 61999 are fluctuations without reach, 62000 to 64499 are normal reach system, 64500 to 65099 are SP1. This table is referred to by the 2-byte allocation processing for allocating 65100 to 65399 to SP2 system reach and 65400 to 65535 to SP3 system reach.

  Of the latter half fluctuation group table, the table 1 for the special figure 1 deviation is labeled as “D_KOUGGRP_T1HZ1” as shown in the row number 8500, and the table is a table in which the data contents of 1 byte in 4 bytes are assembled in 5 rows ( Table format). The code of each line is described from the left side with a pseudo instruction (DW), distribution value, and table name. On the right side of the comment column of the data table, the machine language code (in ROM) that is paired with the code in assembly language is written. Data) is described.

  Specifically, the assembly language code “DW 62000, D_KOU_HZ01” on line number 8530 is a pseudo-instruction that the distribution value is also 2 bytes corresponding to the random value being 2 bytes. "DW" is specified in the assembler. Further, the numerical value subtracted from the random number value is 62000, and the table corresponding to the distribution has the table name “D_KOU_HZ01”. Although detailed description is omitted here, the variation content is further determined with reference to D_KOU_HZ01.

  The machine language code (machine language data) corresponding to the code in assembly language at line number 8530 is “5A00 30F2005B”, and “5A00” means the address in the ROM from which the data is read. In the ROM, 1 byte (2 digits in hexadecimal notation) of data is stored for each address, and the following 8-digit machine language code "30F2005Bh" is actually stored from address 5A00h to address 5A03h. The data is “30h”, “F2h”, “00h”, and “5Bh”. Then, the 8-digit machine language code is divided into “30F2h” and “005Bh”.

  Here, since the upper order and the lower order are exchanged, "30F2" is replaced with "F2h" of the lower two digits and "30h" of the upper two digits and read as "F230h" by the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242, and "F230h" is read. Corresponds to the distribution value “62000”. Further, "005B" means an address in which "5B00h" in which the upper order and the lower order are exchanged corresponds to D_KOU_HZ01.

  Next, the machine language code for four more stages will be described. In the machine language code at line number 8540, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ02 is "5B02h" and the distribution value is "09C4h".

  In the machine language code of line number 8550, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ03 is "5B06h" and the distribution value is "0258h". In the machine language code of line number 8560, the address of D_KOU_HZ04 is “5B10h” and the distribution value is “012Ch”. In the machine language code of line number 8570, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ05 is “5B16h” and the distribution value is “0088h”.

  Here, each address of the data table is from the first row (row number 8530) to the fifth row (row number 8570) of the table in order from the top, "5B00h" "5B02h" "5B06h" "5B10h" "5B16h". Is. Since the first digit "5h" of these five addresses is common, the 4-bit data corresponding to "5h" is deleted and stored in the ROM, and the 4-bit data corresponding to "5h" is read when reading. The compression method of the present embodiment is to supplement and execute arithmetic processing. Specifically, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 147 to 148.

  FIG. 147 is the latter half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, and also shows the corresponding assembly language code. The label name is "D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1", which is the same as the conventional second half variation group table shown in FIG. 146, and the special table 1 is the deviation table 1.

  The pseudo-instruction BTA {16,12} described in the line number 9030 is a set of 16-bit (8 bits × 2) binary data of the table and 12 bits (12 bits plus 8 bits to supplement 4 bits). It indicates that the assembler creates data as a set of 2).

  The numerical part of BTA {16,12} is an example, and the pseudo-instruction is written in the format of BTA {numerical value 1, numerical value 2}, and the assembler is to read the bit number of numerical value 1 and the bit number of numerical value 2 in order. specify. Such a reading format is continued until the code "ENDBAT" at the line number 9140. Numerical value 1 and numerical value 2 are arbitrary numbers from 1 to 16.

  Next, the data structure for one stage in the table will be described. The code "62000, D_KOU_HZ01-5000H" in line number 9040 describes the distribution value 62000, which is a 2-byte numerical value, and D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, which is the relative address of the referenced table (second half variation selection table), and D_KOU_HZ01. -5000H is the reference for the first stage data. In other words, since the DP register (table pointer) stores the first address 5000H of the data, the address specified by the row number 9040 may be the difference from the address stored in the DP register. Therefore, the assembly language is described as D_KOU_HZ01-5000H for convenience.

  When this is confirmed by the machine language code, the machine language code corresponding to the code in the assembly language of the first stage is “30F200h” from addresses 5A00h to 5A02h and “4Bh” at address 5A03h. Of these, "F230h" obtained by exchanging the upper and lower sides of "30F200h" is the distribution value of 62000, and "00h" is the difference "B00h" from the address "5000H" specified by the DP register, except "B". It is a value. Further, “4Bh” stored in the address 5A03h is a numerical value obtained by combining the data in the first row and the data in the second row as described later. Therefore, here, only the data stored in the address 5A03h is described with a line break.

  Similarly, from the address in the second table having a distribution value of 2500 to the address in the fifth table having a distribution value of 136, all are indicated by relative addresses minus 5000h. This relative address is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. That is, as described above, the first digit "5h" of the addresses "5B00h", "5B02h", "5B06h", "5B10h", and "5B16h" is deleted from the table in order from the top of the table. Since "Bh", which is the second digit of the address, is also common, it is possible to further compress 4 bits of data per stage by deleting "5Bh" of the first digit and the second digit. Is.

  This is visualized more clearly in FIG. 148 below. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the compression method of the sixteenth embodiment. The left side of the figure illustrates the interpretation of the pseudo-instruction BTA {16,12} by the assembler, and the right side of the figure illustrates the compressed data stored in ROM.

  First, the data contents of the first stage of the table and the storage in the ROM will be described. Explaining in the way of moving the viewpoint from the left side to the right side of the drawing, the data content of the first stage of the table is the relative value “0B00h” of the table corresponding to the distribution value “F230h”. Expressing this as a binary number, "F230h" is "1111001000110000B" and "0B00h" is "0000101100000000B".

  The reference address of the latter half variation selection table as the absolute address of the first stage of the table described with reference to FIG. 146 is “5B00h”, but in the present embodiment, 5000h is stored in the DP register (table pointer). Therefore, the relative address in each stage of the table is the absolute address minus 5000h.

  Next, the actual data stored in the ROM will be described. “1111001000110000B” corresponding to “F230h” is divided into 1-byte units, and the lower 8 bits “00110000B” is stored in the ROM at address 5A00h (arrow 1 in FIG. 148) and the upper 8 bits “11110010B”. Is stored in the address 5A01h (arrow 2 in FIG. 148). This is the part corresponding to "16" of BTA {16, 12}.

  The hexadecimal notation of the data stored in the address 5A00h and the address 5A01h is “30h” and “F2h”.

  Further, “0000101100000000B” corresponding to “0B00h” is divided into 1-byte units, and the lower 8 bits “00000000B” are stored in the address 5A02h. Exactly, the arrow 3 in FIG.

  Next, the upper 8 bits can be divided into the upper 4 bits “0000B” and the subsequent 4 bits “1011B”. Then, the upper 4 bits "0000B" are deleted (compressed), and the 4 bits "1011B" following the upper 4 bits "0000B" are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A03h (arrow 4).

  In other words, the relative address obtained as a result of subtracting 5000h from the absolute address "5B00h" in the first row of the table is "0B00h", but "0" of the upper first digit of the numerical value "" 0 "B00h" is "0". Since the upper 4 bits "0000B" correspond to "," the upper 4 bits "0000B" are deleted. Up to this point, the storage of the first-stage data of the table in the ROM has been described.

  Next, the storage of the data in the second row of the table will be described. In the table data in the second row, the binary number data of “09C4h” corresponding to the distribution value 2500 is “0000100111000100B”. This binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits, and lower 4 bits. Then, the lower 4 bits are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A03h.

  That is, the address 5A03h stores the first-stage data “1011B” as the lower 4 bits (arrow 4), and the second-stage data “0100B” as the upper 4 bits (arrow 5). ). Therefore, a part of the table data of the first row and a part of the table data of the second row are stored together at the address 5A03h (arrows 4 and 5).

  Subsequently, in the table data in the second row, the middle 8 bits "10011100B" are stored in the address 5A04h (arrow 6), and the upper 4 bits "0000B" are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A05h. ..

  Then, the binary number data of "0B02h" corresponding to the relative address of the table data in the second row is "0000101100000010B". Here too, the binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits, and lower 4 bits.

  The upper 4 bits "0000B" is the numerical value of the result obtained by subtracting 5000h from the absolute address "5B02h" in the second row of the table, and the first higher digit of the relative address "" 0 "B02h". It is deleted because it corresponds to “0”.

  The lower 4 bits "0010B" are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A05h (arrow 8), and the middle 8 bits "101100B" are stored in the address 5A06h (arrow 9). Up to this point, the storage of the second stage data of the table in the ROM has been described.

  As with the first and second rows, the table data in the third row is stored as a relative address in the ROM after the portion common to other table data is deleted, and finally the table data for five rows is stored. Are stored in the area of addresses 5A00h to 5A11h of the ROM.

  Here, the supplement of the insufficient binary data will be described.

  As for the data of the reference destination address (the address of the latter half variation selection table) of the fifth stage, which is the lowermost stage of the table, the lower 8 bits "000101010B" is stored in the address 5A10h (arrow 10), and the middle 4 bits "1011B". Is stored in the address 5A11h as the lower 4 bits (arrow 11), and the upper 4 bits “0000” are deleted.

  Under this condition, the data stored in the address 5A11h is only the lower 4 bits, and the storage state of the data in the ROM falls into an irregular state. Therefore, in the address 5A11h, the insufficient upper 4 bits of the binary data are simulated. It is automatically supplemented by the interpretation of the instruction (arrow 12).

  In the present embodiment, the data corresponding to “5h” is generated because the first digit “5h” is common among the addresses “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h”. Although it has been compressed, since "Bh", which is the second digit of the address, is also common, by compressing "5Bh" of the first digit and the second digit, it is possible to further compress 4 bits per stage. ..

[Operation / Effect of Sixteenth Embodiment]
In this way, since the common part as each reference address (relative address in the present embodiment) of the table is compressed and stored in the ROM, 4 bytes, which is the capacity of one stage of the table data, should be originally stored. Since a storage area of 20 bytes is required for the capacity of 5 stages, the ROM capacity can be reduced because the storage area of 5 bytes from 5A00h to 5A11h is 18 bytes in total.

  In addition, when storing data in the ROM, if it is not based on a fixed law (for example, a fixed number of bits, a fixed bit length) for each type of data, how many bits will be required when the CPU 111a reads the data? I don't know, I can't read it (I can't interpret it). Therefore, the read range is defined in consideration of the range of bit lengths common to all related tables of the same type. The definition is a code of the above BTA {numerical value 1, numerical value 2}, and in the present embodiment, as an example, all the binaries of the latter half variation group table (including not only for special figure 1 but also for special figure 2). Data (binary data) is defined as 16 bits (corresponding to numerical value 1) as a distribution value and 12 bits (corresponding to numerical value 2) as an address of the latter half fluctuation selection table.

[17th Embodiment]
In the seventeenth embodiment, reading of the compressed data stored in the ROM will be described. As the reading of the compressed data by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102), in the present embodiment, an instruction "LQDB" starts from bit 0 of the address pointed to by the DP register (table pointer) and starts from an arbitrary bit position specified. Bit length data can be read. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the data read format of the seventeenth embodiment. Here, the data from address 5A00h to address 5A10h is read by the code "LQDB BC, (HL) .16", and the data at address 5A11h is read by the code "LQDB HL, (HL) .12".

  The LQDB instruction is written in the format of “LQDB register name, (register name) .read bit length”, and is stored in the DP register as the address value and in the register pair (pair register) after the comma (register name). This is an instruction to read the data of the read bit length starting from bit 0 of the address value calculated by adding the stored values (the number of bits) and store it in the register pair of the register name before the comma. The register pair of the register name may be a different register pair or the same register pair. If the number of bits is small, the register name may indicate a single register instead of a register pair. In a single register, the read bit length is any bit length from 1 to 8 and in a register pair the read bit length is any bit length from 1 to 16. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the LQDB instruction.

  First, assuming that the address value 5000h is designated in the DP register and the value obtained by multiplying A00h by 8 and converted into the number of bits is stored in the HL register, it is stored in the addresses 5A00h and 5A01h. The reading of the data to be read will be described. The read command here is “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”.

  When the instruction is executed, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the HL value is A00h, a process of reading 16-bit data from 5A00h obtained by adding A00h to 5000h is executed. The (A00h * 8) th bit counting from bit 0 of 5000h shown by arrow 13 is the base point of reading. Note that in FIG. 149, A00h is described as A00h * 8 in the sense that it is multiplied by 8 for bit conversion (bit conversion), but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

  The 1-byte data stored at the address 5A00h is “00110000B” and the 1-byte data stored at the address 5A01h is “11110010B”. Therefore, the 16-bit length is “1111001000110000B”. (Arrow 14). The data is expressed in hexadecimal as F230h, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register. F230h corresponds to a distribution value of 62000.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where the distribution progresses and the address of the latter half variation selection table in the last line is read by the code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains 5000h and the value of (HL register) is A10h * 8.

  When the instruction is executed, the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the HL value is A10h * 8. Therefore, the process of reading 12 bits from bit 0 of 5A10h obtained by adding A10h to 5000h is performed. Executed. The data read here is "101100010110B" (arrow 15), but since the HL register of the storage destination has an area of 2 bytes, "0000B" is provided for the insufficient 4 bits for the 2-byte area. Is added as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction (arrow 16).

  The data "0000101100010110110B" read from the address 5A10h and the address 5A11h by this supplement of "0000B" is 0B16h when expressed in hexadecimal, and is stored in the HL register.

  Next, the program contents for reading the compressed data by the LQBD instruction will be described with reference to the actual code.

  FIG. 150 is a program list of the variation pattern setting process of the seventeenth embodiment. The program list of the variation pattern setting process described here will be described as a program module that is a caller of the 2-byte allocation process described below.

  The code “LD HL, (HL)” in line number 10020 corresponds to A4302 in FIG. 37, and is the content for acquiring the address of the latter half variation pattern group table.

  The code "LD WA, (DE)" in line number 10030 corresponds to A4303 in FIG. 37, and is the content of rotating the variation pattern random number from the target area.

  The code “CALLR P_SELW” in line number 10050 corresponds to A4305 in FIG. 37, and is the content of a subroutine call for the 2-byte allocation process.

  FIG. 151 is a program list of a conventional 2-byte allocation process. This module is called by the fluctuation pattern setting process described above, but is a process executed in a system in which the data stored in the ROM is not compressed. The 2-byte allocation process is labeled as "P_SELW".

  The code in line number 10510 corresponds to A4401 in FIG. 38, and the value stored in the address of the latter half variation pattern table fetched in the HL register in the variation pattern setting process of the calling source is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING). The contents are determined by comparing whether or not If they are the same, the zero flag is set as the determination result (Z).

  The code on the line number 10520 corresponds to A4402 in FIG. 38. If it is a code without distribution, it jumps to the part labeled SELW20. If it is not a code without distribution, it reads the code on the next line. ..

  The code of the row number 10590 and the row number 10600, which is a partition labeled SELW20, corresponds to A4407 in FIG. 38, and is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (absolute address of the latter half variation selection table). It is the content to do.

  Line numbers 10530 to 10570, which form one section and are labeled as SELW10, correspond to the loop processing (A4403 to A4406) in FIG. The code “SUB WA, (HL)” in line number 10540 corresponds to A4403 and A4404 in FIG. 38, and the distribution value acquired from the latter half fluctuation group table is the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1 stored in the WA register. Is the content to be subtracted from.

  The code "JRC C, SELW20" in line number 10550 corresponds to A4405 in FIG. 38. If the result of the subtraction is a value smaller than 0, jump to SELW20, and if not, code in the next line. Is the content to be read.

  The code “ADD HL, 4” in the line number 10560 corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38, and is the content of adding 4 bytes to the address value of the latter half variation group table and updating it to the address of the next stage of the table.

  The code "JR SELW10" at line number 10570 also corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38 and has the content to jump to SELW10.

  Next, the program contents of the seventeenth embodiment for reading the data compressed by the LQDB instruction will be explained. FIG. 152 is a program list of the 2-byte allocation process of the 17th embodiment. The 2-byte sorting process of the seventeenth embodiment is also labeled as "P_SELW" and called by the above-described variation pattern setting process. The label SELW10 portion corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the label SELW20 portion corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code "SQLLA HL, 3" (conversion instruction) in line number 11010 has the content of shifting the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register by 3 bits to the left. By the 3-bit left shift, the binary data for the lower 13 bits are substantially raised to the power of 2 (8 times). That is, the address value stored in the HL register is multiplied by 8 and converted into the number of bits (the address value is converted into bits).

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16” (read instruction) at line number 11020 is an instruction for reading data stored in ROM after being compressed as an instruction peculiar to this embodiment. Starting from bit 0 of the indicated address, 16 bits of data having a designated bit length are taken into the BC register.

  The code “CQP BC, C_NOTHING” in the line number 11030 is the content of determination by comparing whether the value stored in the BC register is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING). If they are the same, the zero flag is set as the determination result (Z).

  The code “JR Z, SELW20” at line number 11040 is the content that jumps to SELW20 (jumps to the code at line number 11110) if it is a non-sorting code, and otherwise reads the next line.

  Explaining the SELW 20 part first, the code “ADD HL, 12” of the row number 11120 is the content of adding 12 to the bit-converted value stored in the HL register.

  The code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12” (read instruction) in the line number 11130 is a content that loads 12-bit binary data into the HL register among the values stored in the HL register. As a result, the relative address of the second half variation selection table is acquired in the HL register.

  The code “ADD HL, 5000H” on line number 11140 is updated to the address of the data (absolute address of the latter half fluctuation selection table) corresponding to the distributed result by adding the value 5000h of the DP register to the address value of the HL register. It is the content to do.

  Next, the process returns to SELW10. The code "LQDB BC, (HL) .16" in the line number 11060 is the content of reading the next 16-bit distribution value data.

  The code “SUB WA, BC” in line number 11070 is the content of subtracting the distribution value from the random number value.

  The code "JRC, SELW20" at line number 11080 jumps to SELW20 if the result of the subtraction is negative (jumps to the code at line number 11110), otherwise reads the next line. is there.

  The code "ADD HL, 16 + 12" in the row number 11090 is the content for adding the number of bits stored in the HL register by 16 + 12 bits. As a result, the HL register stores a bit-converted address (corresponding to the position of bit 0 of the distribution value) in which the next distribution value is stored.

  The code "JR SELW10" of the line number 11100 is the content to return to the beginning of the loop processing.

[Operation / Effect of Seventeenth Embodiment]
According to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege in the case of. The game control means includes game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, and arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is assigned. The arithmetic processing means uses a conversion instruction (for example, "SQLA HL, 3") for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by integrating a predetermined number of address values of the storage area read from the game control program storage means, and the bit conversion value as a starting point. A read command (for example, “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”) that reads a predetermined bit length is configured to be executable. The data having a predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing the mode of the variable display game and a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads a distribution value and a value associated with the distribution value by a read command, and selects a mode of the variable display game based on the value associated with the distribution value. Derive an address. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a conversion instruction and a read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is an address (relative address in FIGS. 147 and 148) of the latter half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, by this conversion instruction, for example, the address value fetched in the register is shifted to the left by 3 bits, that is, by the operation of multiplying 2 by 8 which is 8 bits. It is possible to calculate the address value by In addition, this read instruction allows data to be read with a specific bit as a read base point.

  Further, by combining the address value stored in the DP register and the bit-converted address value, a further specific bit in the 1-byte area of the address destination specified by the DP register can be used as the read base point.

  In addition, since the bit length to be read can be set according to the compression format indicating how many bits have been deleted from the original data, the compressed data is read and then converted into 2-byte data. Can be restored.

  Further, according to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball into the starting winning area or the gate) is established, and the variation display game is executed. A game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state in which a special benefit is given to a player when a special result is obtained. The game control means includes game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, and arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program. The game control program storage means stores binary data of a specific bit length for each storage area to which one address is assigned. The arithmetic processing unit divides the binary data into a bit length smaller than a specific bit length from a plurality of storage areas having consecutive addresses and reads the binary data, and if the division does not reach the specific bit length, the binary data of 0 is read. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a read instruction (for example, “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”) that is read as a specific bit length. The data of a specific bit length is a distribution value for distributing the modes of the variable display game or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads the distribution value or a value associated with the distribution value by a read command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing this read instruction. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is an address (relative address in FIGS. 147 and 148) of the latter half variation selection table.

  As described above, in reading the compressed data in the seventeenth embodiment, the length of the read data is less than 8 bits with reference to the 1-byte length (8-bit length (specific bit length)). If there is no such data, the arithmetic processing means can supplement 0 data to all of the insufficient number of bits (digits), so that compressed data (data deleted by compression) is automatically restored.

[Eighteenth Embodiment]
In the eighteenth embodiment, compression of a bit number (bit length) that is not a divisor or multiple of 8 bits will be described as reading of compressed data using the LQDB instruction. In the present embodiment, as an example, an example in which 11 bits of data of 32 bits are compressed will be described. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventeenth embodiments.

  FIG. 153 is a latter half variation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, and also shows corresponding assembly language codes. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, which is the same as the latter half variation group table shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the special table 1 is the deviation table 1.

  In the latter half fluctuation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, the absolute address of each stage (the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table) is “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h”. The data corresponding to the “5h” is compressed due to the common “5h”. On the other hand, in the eighteenth embodiment, the absolute address value (D_KOU_HZ01) of the first-stage table is used as a reference, and the relative address value of the second-stage and subsequent tables is the result of subtracting the absolute address value of the previous stage. The differential address value is stored. This difference address value becomes a value associated with the distribution value in the table (associated value). Since the absolute address of the first table is 5B00h (D_KOU_HZ01) and the absolute address of the fifth table is 5B16h (D_KOU_HZ05), 5 bits of 16h (10110B in binary notation) are the difference. Eleven bits are compressed with the minutes left.

  Further, in the latter half variation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, the table data in the first row is not compressed, but the table data in the second to fifth rows is compressed. Therefore, the pseudo instruction “BTA” is coded in the line number 9540 next to the line number 9530 in which the table in the first stage is coded in order to create data in the assembler for the data in the second to fifth stages. ing.

  The assembly language code "DWD_KOU_HZ01-5000H, 62000" in line number 9530 corresponds to the first-stage table (without reach) in the uncompressed state, and is the 2-byte numerical value 62000 and the reference. D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, which is the address of the table (second half variation selection table), is described. Note that 5000h is stored in the DP register. When the machine language code (machine language data) created by the code of the line number 9530 is confirmed, “00h”, “5Bh”, “30h”, and “F2h” are stored as data of 4 bytes from the address 5A00h. Of these, "00h" stored at address 5A00h, "5Bh" stored at address 5A01h, and "30h" stored at address 5A02h and "F2h" stored at address 5A03h are classified into upper and lower, respectively. The fact that they have been replaced is as described above.

  The pseudo-instruction “BTA {5, 16}” at line number 9540 has the content that specifies that the read length of data is 5 bit length and 16 bit length. Unlike the latter half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, the latter half variation group table of the present embodiment describes the reference destination address of the table first for each stage and then the distribution value. Although details will be described with reference to FIG. 154 below, 5 bits are stored as the reference destination address of the table and 16 bits are read as the distribution value.

  The code "D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01,2500" in line number 9550 compresses the difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the first stage table from the address value of the second stage table (normal reach system) D_KOU_HZ02, and the distribution value. It is coded as the previous source data.

  Similarly, the code "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02,600" of the line number 9560 is the difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the second stage table from the address value of the third stage table (SP1 system) D_KOU_HZ03, and the distribution value. And are coded as original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code "D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ03,300" of line number 9570 is the difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the third stage table from the address value of the fourth stage table (SP2 system) D_KOU_HZ04, and the distribution value. And are coded as original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04, 136” in line number 9580 is the difference between the address value of the table D of the fifth row (SP3 system) and the address value of the table of the fourth row, and the distribution value. And are coded as original data before compression. Then, the code "ENDBTA" in line number 9590 ends the specified range of the read format of the compressed data in the assembly language.

  Next, referring to FIG. 154, data compression of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating the compression method of the eighteenth embodiment.

  Here, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ01" is 5B00h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ02" is 5B02h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ03" is 5B06h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ04" is 5B10h, and the address value of "D_KOU_HZ05" is the value of 5B10h and "D_KOU_HZ05" is the value. In this case, "D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01" is the difference "02h", "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02" is the difference "04h", "D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ03" is the difference "0Ah", "D_H003" and "D_KOU_HU03.

  Therefore, it is possible to compress 12 bits by leaving 4 bits of "0Ah" (1010 in binary notation), but in another table not illustrated, the 4 bits are insufficient as a difference notation. Therefore, also in FIG. 154, 11 bits are compressed while leaving 5 bits.

  Next, the data of the second stage of the table read by the assembler by the pseudo instruction BTA {5,16} will be described.

  Of the data in the second row of the table, "02h" which is "D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01" is originally "0002h", and thus is expressed as a binary number "00000000000010B". Of these, the upper 11 bits are compressed, and the lower 5 bits "00010B" are stored as the lower 5 bits of the address 5A04h (arrow 17 in FIG. 154).

  Next, among the data in the second row of the table, the distribution value 2500 is represented by a binary number, which is “1001110001000100B”. Since the storage capacity for the upper 3 bits still remains in the previous address 5A04h, the 16-bit data is divided into the lower 3 bits, the middle 8 bits, and the upper 5 bits. Then, the lower 3 bits "100B" are stored in the address 5A04h as the upper 3 bits (arrow 18). That is, the address 5A04h stores the data "10000010B" by combining the differential address value "00010B" as the lower bit and "100B" which is a part of the binary data of the distribution value.

  Further, among the distribution values “1001110001000100B”, the middle 8 bits “10001000B” are stored in the address 5A05h (arrow 19), and the upper 5 bits “10011B” are stored as the lower 5 bits of the address 5A06h. (Arrow 20).

  Next, since the storage capacity for the upper 3 bits is left in the ROM address 5A06h, the lower 3 bits "100B" of "04h" which is "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02" in the data in the third row of the table is 100B. Is stored as the upper 3 bits of the address 5A06h (arrow 21). Therefore, the address 5A06h is stored by combining part of the table data in the second row and part of the table data in the third row.

  In the data in the third row and the data in the fourth row of the subsequent table, 11 bits of the differential address value are deleted to have a length of 5 bits, and the distribution value has a length of 16 bits, which is a 1-byte storage area ROM. Is stored in each address destination of. At this time, the table data of 5 bit length and 16 bit length are appropriately divided and stored in the ROM so that all of 8 bits are filled in at each address destination.

  Next, the storage state of the data in the fifth row of the table in the ROM will be described. Of the data in the fifth row of the table, "D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04" is "06h" (0110 in binary notation), and the 5-bit length of this is "00110B", but the lowest one bit is divided. Stored in the address 5A0Bh, and the upper 4 bits “0011B” are stored in the address 5A0Ch as the lower 4 bits (arrow 22).

  Next, of the data in the fifth row of the table, the binary data “0000000010001000B” of the distribution value 136 is divided into the lower 4 bits, the middle 8 bits, and the upper 4 bits, and the lower 4 bits “1000B” is the address. The upper 4 bits are stored in 5A0Ch (arrow 23), and the middle 8 bits are stored in address 5A0Dh (arrow 24).

  Then, the upper 4 bits "0000B" is stored in the address 5A0Eh as the lower 4 bits (arrow 25), but since the address 5A0Eh has a capacity for the upper 4 bits, the portion corresponding to 4 bits is stored. 0 data "0000B" is replenished (arrow 26).

  FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the reading format of the data of the eighteenth embodiment by the CPU 111a. Here, the data from address 5A00h to address 5A0Dh is read by the code "LQDB BC, (HL +). 16", and the data at address 5A0Eh is read by the code "LQDB C, (HL +). 5".

  First, assuming that the address value 5000h is designated in the DP register and the value converted into bits by multiplying A02h by 8 is stored in the HL register, the data stored in the address 5A02h and the address 5A03h are stored. Readout will be described. The read command here is “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16”. Compared with the code in FIG. 149, the code has (HL +) and “plus” added, which means that the number of bits read out to the HL register is added after being read to the BC register. Is.

  When the instruction is executed, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value in the HL register is A02h, a process of reading 16 bits from 5A02h obtained by adding A02h to 5000h is executed. The (A02h * 8) th bit counting from the bit 0 of 5000h shown by the arrow 27 is the read base point. A02h * 8 is a left shift operation for 3 bits by the SQLA instruction.

  The 1-byte data stored at the address 5A02h is “00110000B”, and the 1-byte data stored at the address 5A03h is “11110010B”. Therefore, the 16-bit length of the data is “1111001000110000B”. (Arrow 28). The data is expressed in hexadecimal as F230h, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register.

  Then, since "F230h" is read to the BC register, the HL register becomes "5020h" which is 5010h + 16 obtained by adding 16 which is the read bit length. Note that 5010h is the number of bits (A02h * 8). Since 5020h = A04h * 8 remainder 0, the next read position is bit 0 of address 5A04h (arrow 29). Here, 5020h (20512 in decimal notation) is a value obtained by multiplying A04h (2564 in decimal notation) by eight, and the calculations here are all bit-converted.

  Next, an explanation will be given of the case where the distribution progresses and the data stored in the address 5A0Bh and the address 5A0Ch of the latter half variation selection table is read by the code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains 5000h and the value in the HL register is A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  When the instruction is executed, the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the HL value is A0Bh * 8 + 7. Therefore, at 5000h, bit 7 (arrow 30) of “5A0Bh” that is A08h * 8 + 7 is read. It will be the base point. Then, a process of reading bits 5 to 5 of "5A0Bh" is executed by the instruction. Since the data length stored in the bit 7 of the address 5A0Bh is only one bit, the lower four bits are read from the next address 5A0Ch as the additional four bits (arrow 31).

  The data read here is “00110B” (arrow 30 and arrow 31) corresponding to the difference “06h”, but since the storage destination C register has a 1-byte area, the 1-byte area is "000B" is supplemented as a part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction for the insufficient 3 bits (arrow 32).

  Since the difference “06h” is read to the C register, the HL register becomes “5064h” which is 505Fh + 5, which is obtained by adding 5 which is the read bit length (arrow 33). Since 5064h = A0Ch * 8 remainder 4, the next read position is bit 4 of address 5A0Ch. Note that “505Fh” is the value of A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  In FIG. 155, the distribution value in the first row of the table is arranged in ROM without using the assembler pseudo instruction “BTA”, but the LQDB instruction does not depend on the arrangement of such table data, and the arbitrary value of the data area is Data of an arbitrary number of bits (with an arbitrary bit length of 1 bit to 16 bits) can be read from the position.

  FIG. 156 is a program list of the 2-byte allocation process of the 18th embodiment. The 2-byte sorting process of this embodiment is also labeled as "P_SELW" and called by the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 150). The label SELW10 portion corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the label SELW20 portion corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code "LD DE, (HL +)" in the line number 11510 is the content of loading the address of the reference second half variable group table into the DE register from the area corresponding to the address currently stored in the HL register. The address of the latter half variation group table serving as a reference is the reference destination address of D_KOU_HZ01 (the address of the latter half variation selection table), which is 5B00h when the absolute address is used and 0B00h when the relative address is used. After that, the value of the HL register is updated.

  The code “CQPW (HL), C_NOTHING” of the line number 11520 is the content of determination by comparing whether the updated data at the address destination is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING).

  The code "JR Z, SELW20" of the line number 11530 is a content that jumps to the SELW20 portion when the code is the non-sorting code, and otherwise reads the next line.

  The code "SQLLA HL, 3" in the line number 11540 is the content of shifting the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register to the left by 3 bits. By the 3-bit left shift, the binary data for the lower 13 bits is substantially raised to the power of 2 (8 times), and the address value is converted into bits.

  Explaining the part of SELW 20 first, the code “LD HL, DE” of the line number 11620 loads the address value stored in the DE register into the HL register, and the address value of the data corresponding to the distribution result ( The contents are updated to the address value of the latter half fluctuation selection table).

  Next, return to the SELW10 part. The code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5” (additional read instruction) at line number 11560 is calculated from the bit position (read start position in ROM indicated by the number of bits) stored in the HL register as follows. This is the content of reading 5-bit data and storing it in the C register. As shown in FIG. 155, the C register stores any of the differences “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h”. After that, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the read bit number.

  The code “ADD DE, C” in the line number 11570 is the content of adding the difference stored in the C register to the value of the DE register. In this way, the difference “02h” “04h” “0Ah” “06h” is sequentially added to the address 5B00h (or the relative address 0B00h) of the second-half variation group table serving as the reference, and added to the value of the DE register. I will go.

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16” (additional read instruction) at line number 11580 is the following from the bit position (read start position in ROM indicated by the number of bits) stored in the HL register. This is the content of reading 16-bit data into the BC register. After that, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the read bit number. As shown in FIG. 155, the BC register stores the distribution value.

  The code “SUB WA, BC” in line number 11590 is the content of subtracting the distribution value from the random number value. By repeatedly executing the code of line number 11590, the distribution values 62000, 2500, 600, 300, 136 are sequentially subtracted from the random number value.

  The code “JR NC, SELW10” of the line number 11600 returns to the beginning of the loop processing when the subtraction result is not negative, and reads the next line when the result is negative. When the result of the subtraction becomes negative, the updating of the value of the DE register at the line number 11570 is stopped, and the value of the address value of the data (the address value of the latter half variation selection table) corresponding to the distributed result is finally determined. Will be obtained by the value of the DE register.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the reference destination address value of the table in each stage is not the difference from the reference destination address value of the table in the previous stage (FIG. 153), but in the table in the first stage. It can also be applied when the difference is from the reference address value. That is, "D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01" is coded in the second row and "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ01" is coded in the third row of the latter half variation group table labeled "D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1". Further, the present embodiment may be applied assuming that “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fourth row and “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fifth row.

  In the case of FIG. 157, the difference values “02h” “04h” “0Ah” “06h” described in the table on the left of FIG. 154 are replaced with “02h” “06h” “10h” “16h” and data Is applied to apply the present embodiment.

[Operation / Effect of 18th Embodiment]
As described above, according to the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate) is established, and the variation display game is executed. A game control means (game control device 100) is provided for performing game control for generating a special game state in which a player is provided with a privilege when a game has a special result. The game control means includes game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) that stores a game control program, and arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is assigned. The arithmetic processing means is a conversion command (for example, "SQLLA HL, 3") for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by accumulating a predetermined number of address values of the storage area read from the game control program storage means, and the bit conversion value as a starting point ( A specified bit length to be read is specified as the start position), and an addition read instruction (for example, "LQDB" that calculates a value obtained by adding a value corresponding to the specified bit length to the bit conversion value every time data of a specified bit length is read BC, (HL +). 16 "). The data of the predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing the modes of the variable display game or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads the distribution value or a value associated with the distribution value by the addition read command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation execution means (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may include such a conversion instruction and an addition read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address of the latter half variation selection table (difference address value in FIGS. 153 and 154).

  As described above, in the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to read data from an arbitrary position of the data area with an arbitrary bit length of 1 bit to 16 bits by the addition read instruction (LQDB instruction).

  Therefore, by setting the read position according to the state of the data arranged in the ROM and setting the read bit length, it is possible to read the compressed data and restore the data, and to the extent of compression (delete). (Bit length) can be arbitrarily determined. Further, after reading the distribution value or the value associated with the distribution value by the addition read command, the next read position is set by the executed addition read command without executing other commands. , Continuous reading can be easily executed.

  In addition, when the data read continuously by an arbitrary bit length has a bit length less than 8 bits or 16 bits, 0 data is automatically set for the insufficient digits (the insufficient number of bits). The data can be read as 8-bit or 16-bit data regardless of the compression state of the data arranged in the ROM.

[19th Embodiment]
The nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 164. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighteenth embodiments.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
The hard random number acquisition process according to the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) according to the eighth embodiment.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing according to the nineteenth embodiment. The special figure starting port switch common processing is executed by the game control device 100. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 128) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The game control device 100 first updates the start port signal output count by +1 (increases by 1) with a predetermined value (here, 255) as an upper limit (A10801), and selects one of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (A2905).

When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.
If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then, (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and the decoration corresponding to the starting mouth switch and special figure reservation number to be monitored. The special figure reservation number command is prepared as an effect command (A2917), and effect command setting processing (A2918) is executed.

Specifically, for example, in the case where the starting opening switch to be monitored is the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) and the special figure 1 holding number is “4”, the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing As the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations, the address of the area for the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM, that is, the random number storage area for the reservation (first starting memory) of special figure 1 ( The address of the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 reserved storage area) is calculated.
Further, for example, when the starting opening switch to be monitored is the normal variable winning a prize device 37 (starting opening 2) and the special figure 2 holding number is "4", the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing holding number As the address of the random number storage area corresponding to, the address of the area for holding number 4 in the special figure 2 random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM, that is, the random number storage area (special figure storage area related to the reservation (second starting storage) of special figure 2 The address of the reserved number 4 area in the (2 reserved storage area) is calculated.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915).
Specifically, when the address of the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is calculated in step A2908, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the fluctuation pattern of the reserved number 4 area. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is saved in the random number 1 storage area, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is saved in the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of the holding number 4 area, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 fluctuation is stored in the holding number 4 area. The pattern random number 3 is saved.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts a big hit random number from the area of the address (A10701) of the hard random number latch register prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 127), and saves it in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (A10802).
Specifically, when the address of the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is calculated in step A2908, a jackpot random number is prepared in step A10701 as shown in FIG. 159, for example. It is extracted from the address area of the hard random number latch register and saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the reserved number 4 area.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the jackpot symbol random number from the random number region (a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) and saves it in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage region (A10803).
Specifically, when the address of the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is calculated in step A2908, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the jackpot pattern of the reserved number 4 area is shown. Big hit symbol random numbers are saved in the random number storage area.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912).
If the winning is not in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"), then the special drawing reservation information determination processing is executed (A2916), and the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is ended.
On the other hand, in the case where the winning is to the starting winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is “Y”), the small hit symbol random number is extracted from the random number area (the predetermined register in the random number generation circuit), and the small hit symbol of the RWM. It saves in the random number storage area (A10804), executes the special figure reservation information determination processing (A2916), and ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.
Specifically, when the address of the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is calculated in step A2908, as shown in FIG. 159, for example, as shown in FIG. A small hit symbol random number is saved in the symbol random number storage area.

  The result of the special figure 1 variable display game has a small hit, whereas the result of the special figure 2 variable display game has no small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159, while the reserved number 1 area to the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM random number storage area are areas of 8 bytes, respectively. , The reserved number 1 area to the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 2 random number storage area of the RWM random number storage area are areas of 7 bytes each.

  FIG. 160 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158) according to the nineteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the code having the same content as that of FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment is given the same line number and its description is omitted.

Line numbers 2500 to 2590 and line numbers 2610 to 2650 are the same as those in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. That is, in FIG. 160, the line number 2600 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment is deleted.
The line numbers 22010 to 22030 are the same as the line numbers 2810 to 2830 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment.

  Line numbers 22040 to 22070 are the same as line numbers 2750 to 2780 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, and correspond to step A2915 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158).

  That is, in step A2915 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158), first, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is extracted from the random number area (generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is generated) and loaded into the WA register ( The row number 22040) and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area of the RWM are loaded with the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the WA register (row number 22050). Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are extracted from the random number area (generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are generated) and loaded into the WA register (line number 22060) to change the RWM. The fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the WA register are loaded into the pattern random number 2 storage area and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (line number 22070). Therefore, the random numbers set in the WA register at the end of step A2915 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158) are the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3.

Line numbers 22080 to 22100 correspond to step A10802 of the common process starting switch common process (FIG. 158).
In line number 22080, the value (2-byte jackpot random number) stored in the 2-byte area from the address stored in the E register (address of the target hard random number latch register) is input to the WA register (code "INW WA, (E)").

At line number 22090, the jackpot random number of the WA register is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (in the RAM), that is, in the reserved random number storage area (area corresponding to the number of reservations) generated by this winning. Load (remember) (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”).
At line number 22100, the jackpot random number of the WA register is loaded (stored) in the DE register (code “LD DE, WA”). As a result, the jackpot random numbers are stored in the DE register as well as the WA register.

  That is, in step A10802 of the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 158), the jackpot random number is extracted from the hard random number latch register and loaded into the WA register (line number 22080), and the WA is hit in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM. The jackpot random number of the register is loaded (line number 22090), and the jackpot random number of the WA register is loaded to the DE register (line number 22100). Therefore, both the random number set in the WA register and the random number set in the DE register at the end of step A10802 in the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158) are jackpot random numbers.

  The line numbers 22110 to 22120 are similar to the line numbers 2680 to 2690 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment and correspond to step A10803 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158).

Line numbers 22130 to 22140 correspond to step A2912 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158).
In the line number 22130, the starting mouth winning flag stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (in the RAM) is compared with the numerical value corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (value indicating the special figure 1) to determine whether they match (T), It is determined whether or not they match (F) (code “CPJ (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1”). When they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.
In the line number 22140, when the comparison result of the line number 22130 does not match (F), that is, when the target starting port is the starting port 2 (when the starting port winning flag indicates the special figure 2), the label TSIDOSW10 is supported. To jump to the address in the ROM (conditional branch), and execute the instructions on and after the line number 22180 (code “JRS F, TSIDOSW 10”). This is because there is no small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, and it is not necessary to acquire and store the small hit random number.

Line numbers 22150 to 22160 correspond to step A10804 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158).
At line number 22150, the value of a predetermined register “C_SRND1_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the W register (code “IN W, (C_SRND1_L)”).
In line number 22160, the value of the W register is loaded as a small hit symbol random number into the area of the address stored in the HL register at the present time (code “LQD (HL +), W”. After that, in the HL register at the present time Update the address to the next address ("HL +").

That is, in step A10803 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158), the jackpot symbol random number is extracted from the random number area (predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) and loaded into the A register (line number 22110), The jackpot symbol random number of the A register is loaded into the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (line number 22120).
Also, in step A10804 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158), a small hit symbol random number is extracted from the random number area (a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) and loaded into the W register (line number 22150). , The small hit symbol random number of the W register is loaded into the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (line number 22160).
Therefore, at the end of step A10804 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158), the random number set in the DE register is a big hit random number, and the random number set in the A register is a big hit design random number, The random number set in the W register is a small hit symbol random number.

The line number 22180 is the same as the line number 2790 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. That is, the line number 22180 corresponds to step A2916 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158), and calls the subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special figure holding information determination processing (FIG. 25 in this embodiment) ( Code "CALLR P_THOINF").
The line number 22190 is the same as the line number 2840 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. That is, in line number 22190, the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code “RET”).

  As described above, in the nineteenth embodiment, the random number set in the DE register at the start of the special figure holding information determination process (step A2916) of the special diagram starting port switch common process (FIG. 158) is a jackpot random number. Yes, the random number set in the A register is a big hit symbol random number, and the random number set in the W register is a small hit symbol random number (except when the target starting port is the starting port 2).

[Special map reservation information determination process]
The special figure reservation information determination process according to the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 25) according to the first embodiment.

[Operation / Effect of 19th Embodiment]
In the case of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the random number storage area of the RWM, a big hit random number → a pattern random number (a big hit pattern random number, a small hit pattern random number) → a fluctuation pattern random number (a fluctuation pattern random number 1, a fluctuation pattern random number) 2, the fluctuation pattern random number 3) is stored in this order.

  Then, in the case of the eighth embodiment, in the special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 129), the jackpot random number is loaded from the target area in the RWM random number storage area (step A10901), and the jackpot random number is determined. Used in the process (step A3004), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM (step A10902), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A10903). , The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM (step A10904), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (step A10905).

Further, in the case of the eighth embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (FIG. 37) of the special figure reservation information determination processing, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area of the random number storage area of the RWM and prepared ( Step A4303), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used for 2-byte distribution processing (step A4305) or distribution processing (step A4306), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area of the random number storage area of the RWM to prepare. Then, (step A4308), the variation pattern random number 2 is used for the distribution process (step A4309), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM to prepare (step A4314). , The variation pattern random number 3 is used for the distribution process (step A4315).
That is, in the eighth embodiment, the big hit random number value, the symbol random number value, and the variation pattern random number value used for the preliminary determination (prefetch determination) are the values read from the random number storage area of the RWM.

On the other hand, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 158, in the random number storage area of the RWM, fluctuation pattern random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, fluctuation pattern random number 3) → big hit random number → design Random numbers (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) are stored in this order.
In the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 25), the jackpot determination is performed without performing the process (step A10901) of loading the jackpot random number from the target region in the random number storage region of the RWM. Processing (step A3004) is performed. Then, in this big hit determination process, the value of the DE register (big hit random number value) is used.

Further, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the special figure reservation information determination processing (FIG. 25), the processing is stopped without performing the processing (step A10902) of loading the jackpot symbol random number from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM, and the processing is stopped. A process (step A3007) of acquiring symbol information is performed. Then, in this process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the value of the A register (big hit symbol random number value) is acquired.
In addition, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 25), the process of loading the small hitting symbol random number from the target region of the random number storage region of the RWM (step A10904) is not performed, A process (step A3012) of acquiring the stop symbol information is performed. Then, in this process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the value of the W register (small hit symbol random number value) is acquired.
Therefore, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, the value of the big hit random number of the prefetch target, the value of the big hit symbol random number of the prefetch target, and the value of the small hit symbol random number of the prefetch target are not read from the random number storage area of RWM (FIG. 159). ..

Further, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 37) of the special figure reservation information determination process, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target region of the RWM random number storage region and prepared ( Step A4303), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used for 2-byte distribution processing (step A4305) or distribution processing (step A4306), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area of the random number storage area of the RWM to prepare. Then, (step A4308), the variation pattern random number 2 is used for the distribution process (step A4309), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM to prepare (step A4314). , The variation pattern random number 3 is used for the distribution process (step A4315).
Therefore, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment and the like, the value of the variation pattern random number to be read ahead is read from the random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM.

  That is, in the nineteenth embodiment, the variation pattern random number value used in the preliminary determination (prefetch determination) is the value read from the random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM, but the big hit random number value used in the preliminary determination (prefetch determination). The symbol random value is not a value read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159) but a register value (in the present embodiment, a DE register value, an A register value, a W register value).

In order to read the desired random number from the RWM random number storage area, it is necessary to calculate the address of the area in which the desired random number is stored. However, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the address is read from the RWM random number storage area. By reducing the number of random numbers, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation process and also to reduce the storage capacity of data and the like for the address calculation process.
Also, as shown in FIG. 159, the random numbers read from the random number storage area of the RWM (variable pattern random numbers in the case of this embodiment), the random numbers not read from the random number storage area of the RWM (in the case of this embodiment, jackpot random numbers, symbols) By storing in a region closer to the beginning than (random number), the address calculation becomes easy.

  Further, the random numbers not read from the random number storage area of the RWM (in this embodiment, the big hit random number and the pattern random number) are stored in the register after the random numbers read from the random number storage area of the RWM (the variation pattern random number in the present embodiment). Remembered. That is, the random number that uses the value of the register in the preliminary determination is stored in the register immediately before executing the preliminary determination. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number and the pattern random number whose register values are used in the preliminary determination are the registers (DE register, A register) immediately before the preliminary determination (special figure hold information determination processing) is executed. Register, W register). Therefore, since it is easy to protect the state where random numbers (random numbers that use the value of the register in pre-determination) are set in the register, it is not necessary to program in consideration of the usage status of the register, etc. Efficiency is improved.

  According to the nineteenth embodiment described above, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the case of playing, a plurality of types of random numbers are extracted and registered based on the satisfaction of a start condition (in the case of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern random number is a WA register, The big hit random number is stored in the WA register and the DE register, the big hit design random number is the A register, and the small hit design random number is the W register), and the random number stored in the register is stored in the random number storage area of the storage means (game control device 100). The random display storage control means (game control device 100) and the random number extracted by the random number storage control means are executed by the variable display game corresponding to the random number. (In this embodiment, JP diagram starting opening switch common processing) pre determination process for determining before being provided with pre-determination means that performs a (game controller 100), the. The plurality of types of random numbers include a first type of random number (in the case of this embodiment, a big hit random number, a big hit pattern random number, a small hit pattern random number) and a second type of random number (in the case of this embodiment, a variation pattern random number). ) Is included, the pre-determination means reads the first type random number from the register to perform the pre-determination process, while the second determination type random number is read from the random number storage area to perform the pre-determination process. The two types of random numbers are stored in the random number storage area before the area for storing the first type of random numbers.

Therefore, in order to read the desired random number from the random number storage area, it is necessary to calculate the address of the area in which the desired random number is stored. However, as in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers read from the random number storage area By reducing the number, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation processing and also to reduce the storage capacity of the data for the address calculation processing and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the preliminary determination process (common process for the special figure starting port switch).
Furthermore, the random number read from the random number storage area (variable pattern random number in the case of the present embodiment) is first than the random number not read from the random number storage area (big hit random number, big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number in the present embodiment) By storing in an area close to, the address calculation becomes easy. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the preliminary determination process (common process for the special figure starting port switch).

  In addition, in the nineteenth embodiment, the first type of random number includes a jackpot random number for determining whether or not to derive the special result, and the second type of random number includes the variation pattern of the variable display game. It can be configured to include the variation pattern determination random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this embodiment) for determination.

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively reduce the load of the preliminary determination process (common process for the special figure starting port switch).
The big hit random number may be a second type of random number.
Further, the jackpot symbol random number may be a second type of random number.
Further, the small hit symbol random number may be a second type random number.
Further, the variation pattern random number may be a first type random number.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number value used for the preliminary determination may be a value extracted again from the corresponding random number area (generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number is generated) instead of the value read from the random number storage area of the RWM.
Further, the symbol random number value (big hit symbol random number value, small hit symbol random number value) used for pre-determination is not a register value (in the case of the present embodiment, A register value, W register value), but a corresponding random number area. It may be a value extracted again from (a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, a work area for pre-determination is provided in the RAM 111c or the like in addition to the random number storage area of the RWM, and in step A10802 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158), a hard random number is generated. The jackpot random number is extracted from the address area of the hard random number latch register prepared in step A10701 of the acquisition processing (FIG. 127), the jackpot random number is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM, and the jackpot random number is stored in advance in the RAM 111c or the like. It is also possible to configure to temporarily save in the work area for judgment. In such a configuration, the jackpot random number value used for the preliminary determination is not the value of the register (the value of the DE register in the case of the present embodiment) but the value read from the preliminary determination work area such as the RAM 111c. Good.

Further, in the case of such a configuration, the symbol random number value (big hit symbol random number value, small hit symbol random number value) used for the preliminary determination is the value of the register (in the case of the present embodiment, the value of the A register, the value of the W register). , A value read from the random number storage area of the RWM, or a value extracted again from the corresponding random number area (a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit).
Further, in the case of such a configuration, the variation pattern random number value used for the preliminary determination may be a value read from the random number storage area of the RWM, or a corresponding random number area (generation area in which the variation pattern random number is generated). It may be a value extracted again from. Here, for example, line number 22040 ("LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)") and line number 22060 ("LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2 ) ”), The fluctuation pattern random number value used for the preliminary determination can be extracted again from the corresponding random number area (generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number is generated).

  That is, according to the nineteenth embodiment described above, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the gaming machine provided with the game control means (game control device 100) for performing the game control for generating the special game state in which the game value is given to the player, the game control means stores the game control program. Game control program storage means, arithmetic processing means for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means, and a register group consisting of a plurality of arithmetic registers A head address specifying register for storing a head address of the update information storage means in the address space of the arithmetic processing means, An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the information storage means, the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address, and updated by the offset address based on the start address stored in the start address designation register. It is configured to be able to execute an instruction that specifies one of the storage areas of the information storage means and reads the value of the storage area into a predetermined arithmetic register, and the arithmetic processing means generates a plurality of random numbers based on the establishment of the start condition. Extracted and stored in a predetermined arithmetic register (in the case of the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern random number is a WA register, a big hit random number is a WA register and a DE register, a big hit symbol random number is an A register, and a small hit symbol random number is a W register), A random number storage controller for storing the random number stored in the calculation register in the random number storage area of the update information storage means. And a pre-judgment process (in the case of the present embodiment, a special figure starting port switch common process) for judging the random number extracted by the random number storage control means before the variable display game corresponding to the random number is executed. And a pre-determination means for performing. The plurality of types of random numbers include a first type of random number (in the case of this embodiment, a big hit random number, a big hit pattern random number, a small hit pattern random number) and a second type of random number (in the case of this embodiment, a variation pattern random number). ) And, the pre-judgment means reads the first type of random number from the arithmetic register and performs the pre-judgment process, while the second kind of random number is extracted again by the instruction to perform the pre-judgment process. It can be configured to do so.

Even with this configuration, in order to read out the desired random number from the random number storage area, it is necessary to calculate the address of the area in which the desired random number is stored. By reducing the number of random numbers read from the storage area, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation process and reduce the storage capacity of data for the address calculation process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the preliminary determination process (common process for the special figure starting port switch).
In addition, “Extract again by the command to perform the pre-determination process (that is, re-extract the variation pattern random number value used for the pre-determination from the corresponding random number area (generation area where the variation pattern random number is generated)”) During the special figure reservation information determination process, the line number 22040 (“LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)”) and the line number 22060 (“LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)” of the special diagram starting port switch common process (FIG. 160) are displayed. It is not limited to executing the same instruction. For example, during the special figure reservation information determination process, a similar instruction (“LQD A, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)” or “LQD B, (IY + R_RNDHEN3)” in which the line number 22040 or the line number 22060 and the register to be read is changed is executed. By doing so, it is possible to re-extract according to the command and perform the pre-determination process.

  Here, at the time of pre-determination, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159), and the jackpot random number and the pattern random number are not read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159). Not only that, but also jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers are read from the random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM. That is, the variation pattern random number value, the big hit random number value, and the symbol random number value used for the determination at the start of the variation are values read from the random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM.

  Specifically, in the nineteenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment and the like, the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 30) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ( In FIG. 31), a big hit random number is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM, preparation (reading the big hit random number and setting it in a predetermined register) (steps A3603, A3702) is performed, and the target area is set to 0. After clearing (steps A3604 and A3703), the big hit random number value is used for the big hit judging process (steps A3605 and A3704).

In addition, in the special figure 1 stop design setting processing of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (Figure 34) and the special figure 2 stop design setting processing of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (Figure 35), in the random number storage area of RWM The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the area of (the big hit symbol random number is read and set in a predetermined register) (steps A4002 and A4102), and the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved (steps A4004 and A4104). , The target area is cleared to 0 (steps A4022 and A4116).
Further, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 34) of the special figure 1 variation start process, a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the target area of the random number storage area of the RWM (the small hit symbol random number is read out by a predetermined register. (Step A4011), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved (Step A4013), and the target area is cleared to 0 (Step A4023).

  Further, in the variation pattern setting processing (FIG. 37) of the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of the RWM, and the preparation (variation pattern The random number 1 is read out and set in a predetermined register (step A4303), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used for 2-byte distribution processing (step A4305) or distribution processing (step A4306), and is stored in the random number storage area of the RWM. Random pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area, is prepared (the variable pattern random number 2 is read and set in a predetermined register) (step A4308), and the variable pattern random number 2 is used for distribution processing (step A4309). Load the variation pattern random number 3 from the target area of the random number storage area of Is set) to a predetermined register reads the emissions random number 3 (step A4314), used to process distributing the variation pattern random 3 (step A4315). Then, in the fluctuation start information setting processing (FIG. 40) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, these target areas are cleared (step A4601) and the random number storage area is shifted (step A4613). ), The empty area after the shift is cleared (step A4614).

Thus, at the start of fluctuation, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, the random number stored in the reserved number 1 area in the random number storage area of the RWM (that is, the fluctuation pattern random number of the fluctuation target, The big hit random number of the fluctuating object and the symbol random number of the fluctuating object are read out, and various judgments at the start of the fluctuation are performed.
Then, after performing a process of clearing the reserved number 1 region to 0, a process of shifting the random number storage region of the RWM is performed. For example, at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1, and when the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is filled, each random number in the reserved number 2 area is shifted in this shifting process. It shifts to the reserved number 1 area, shifts each random number in the reserved number 3 area to the reserved number 2 area, and shifts each random number in the reserved number 4 area to the reserved number 3 area. After that, a process of clearing the reserved number 4 area, which has become an empty area, to 0 is performed.

  Note that, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, it is possible to provide the variable holding area at a position closer to the beginning than the holding number 1 area in the random number storage area of the RWM. With this configuration, after shifting all the contents of the storage area to be changed (that is, the area for holding number 1) to the fluctuation holding area, the random number of the fluctuation holding area is used to start the fluctuation. It is possible to make various determinations.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163, for example, first, a process of shifting the random number storage area of the RWM (for example, at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is 4). If the reserved area is full, each random number in the reserved number 1 area is shifted to the variable pending area, each random number in the reserved number 2 area is shifted to the reserved number 1 area, and the reserved number 3 area Process of shifting each random number of 2 to the reserved number 2 area, and shifting each random number of the reserved number 4 area to the reserved number 3 area), and clearing the reserved number 4 area that has become an empty area to 0 I do. Then, the value of the random number stored in the variation holding area in the random number storage area of the RWM (that is, the variation pattern random number of the variation target, the jackpot random number of the variation target, and the symbol random number of the variation target) is changed. After reading, it is possible to perform various determinations at the start of fluctuation using the read value and clear the fluctuation holding area to zero.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, it is possible to provide a variation holding work area in the RAM 111c or the like in addition to the RWM random number storage area. With this configuration, after shifting all the contents of the storage area to be changed (that is, the area for the number of holdings 1) to the working area for holding the fluctuation, the fluctuation is started using the random number of the work area for holding the fluctuation. It is possible to make various determinations of time.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, first, when the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 is started, each random number in the reserved number 1 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is changed and held in the RAM 111c or the like. When the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started, each random number in the reserved number 1 area in the special figure 2 random number storage area of the RWM is shifted to the fluctuation holding work area such as the RAM 111c. However, since there is no small hit in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started, the small hit symbol random number storage area of the variation holding work area such as the RAM 111c is used. Not done.

  After that, a process of shifting the random number storage area of the RWM (for example, at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 and when the area for reserved number 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM is filled, the reserved number 2 Each random number in the reserved area is shifted to the reserved number 1 area, each random number in the reserved number 3 area is shifted to the reserved number 2 area, and each random number in the reserved number 4 area is shifted to the reserved number 3 area. Processing) to clear the reserved number 4 area, which has become an empty area, to 0. Then, the value of the random number (that is, the fluctuation pattern random number of the fluctuation target, the jackpot random number of the fluctuation target, and the pattern random number of the fluctuation target) stored in the fluctuation-holding work area is read from the fluctuation-holding work area of the RAM 111c or the like. After that, it is possible to perform various determinations at the start of fluctuation using the read value and clear the fluctuation holding work area to zero.

[Modification of the nineteenth embodiment]
A modified example of the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 168.
In the nineteenth embodiment, the big hit random number and the design random number (the big hit design random number and the small hit design random number) are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit.
However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the symbol random number is the CTC output that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt process that is the processing unit of the program. This is a so-called "low-speed counter" that is updated based on (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). In addition, the symbol random number adopts a so-called "initial value changing method" in which the start value is changed every time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software).
That is, in the nineteenth embodiment, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is a random number updated by hardware and software.

Also in this modification, the big hit random number and the pattern random number (the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number) are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit.
However, the symbol random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, similarly to the jackpot random number. It should be noted that each of the random numbers is a random update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until it makes a round, but it may be a counter update by +1 or -1.
That is, in this modification, the symbol random numbers (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) are random numbers updated only by hardware, like the big hit random number. That is, in this modification, the jackpot random number and the pattern random number are hard random numbers (hardware random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit.

  Further, in the nineteenth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the starting opening, the hard random number (big hit random number) automatically generated by the random number generation circuit is stored in the hard random number latch register. That is, in the nineteenth embodiment, since the jackpot random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit at the time of starting winning and stored in the hard random number latch register, in order to extract the jackpot random number from the hard random number latch register at the time of pre-determination, In the starting port switch monitoring process, a hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) is executed.

  On the other hand, in this modification, even if the game ball passes through the starting opening, the value of the random number counter (hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit, that is, big hit random number) is not automatically stored in the hard random number latch register. That is, in this modified example, since the jackpot random number is not stored in the hard random number latch register at the time of winning the start winning, the hard random number acquisition process is not executed. In the case of the present modification, the big hit random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit (specifically, a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) at the time of pre-determination, like the design random number (big hit design random number, small hit design random number). To be done.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. The start opening switch monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100. It should be noted that the same processes as those in the starting port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof will be omitted.
In FIG. 165, steps A2702 and A2710 of FIG. 22 are deleted. That is, as described above, the hard random number acquisition process is not executed in this modification.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. The special figure starting port switch common processing is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same steps as the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 158) according to the nineteenth embodiment described above will be denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof will be omitted.
In FIG. 166, steps A10805 and A10806 are provided instead of step A10802 of FIG. 158.

After performing the processing of step A2908, the game control device 100 extracts the jackpot random number from the random number area (a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) (step A10805) and performs the processing of step A2917.
Further, after performing the processing of step A2915, the game control device 100 saves the jackpot random number extracted in step A10805 in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A10806), and performs the processing of step A10803.

FIG. 167 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the starting opening switch monitoring processing (FIG. 165) according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the code having the same content as that of FIG. 132 of the eighth embodiment is given the same line number and its description is omitted.
The line numbers 1500 to 1510 and the line numbers 1540 to 1610 are the same as those in FIG. 132 of the eighth embodiment.

Line numbers 21010 to 21030 correspond to A2703 of the starting opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 165).
At line number 21010, the value stored in the address area currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is loaded into the A register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code "LD A, (HL +)"). The address currently stored (stored) in the HL register is set in the line number 1510.

In line number 21020, the rising information is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2 where the rising information is stored in the switch control area where the information about the target switch is stored, and the logical product is obtained with the switch bit data (judgment value) of the A register. Then, it is determined whether or not the switch is turned on (code “AND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”).
In line number 21030, when the operation result (logical product) of line number 21020 becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, that is, when the target switch is off, the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOSW20 is written. Jump (conditional branch) (code “JR Z, SIDOS W20”).

FIG. 168 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 166) according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. Codes having the same contents as those in FIG. 160 of the nineteenth embodiment are given the same line numbers, and description thereof will be omitted.
Line numbers 2500 to line numbers 2650, line numbers 22010 to line numbers 22070, line numbers 22130 to line numbers 22140, and line numbers 22170 to line numbers 22190 are the same as in FIG. 160 of the nineteenth embodiment.

Line numbers 23010 to 23020 correspond to step A10805 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 166).
At line number 23010, the value of a predetermined register "C_HRND0" in the random number generation circuit is input to the WA register (code "INW WA, (C_HRND0)"). The predetermined register is the hard random number register 0.
In line number 23020, the value of the WA register as a big hit random number is loaded (stored) in the DE register (code “LD DE, WA”). As a result, the jackpot random numbers are stored in the DE register as well as the WA register.

The line number 23030 corresponds to step A10806 of the common process starting switch common process (FIG. 166).
In line number 23030, the jackpot random number of the DE register is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (in the RAM), that is, in the reserved random number storage area (area corresponding to the number of reservations) generated by this winning. Load (store) (code “LQD (HL +), DE”). After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”).

Line numbers 23040 to 23050 correspond to A10803 of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 166).
At line number 23040, the value of a predetermined register “C_HRND1” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “INA, (C_HRND1)”). The predetermined register is the hard random number register 1.
In line number 23050, the value of the A register as a big hit symbol random number is loaded into the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LQD (HL +), A”). After that, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”).

Line numbers 23060 to 23070 correspond to A10804 of the common process starting switch common process (FIG. 166).
At line number 23060, the value of a predetermined register “C_HRND2” in the random number generation circuit is input to the W register (code “IN W, (C_HRND2)”). The predetermined register is the hard random number register 2.
In line number 23070, the value of the W register is loaded as a small hit symbol random number into the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LQD (HL +), W”). After that, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address (“HL +”).

[Operation / Effect of Modification of 19th Embodiment]
Similar to the nineteenth embodiment, in the case of this modification, as shown in FIG. 166, in the random number storage area of the RWM, fluctuation pattern random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, fluctuation pattern random number 3) → big hit Random number → symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) are stored in this order.
Further, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the variation pattern random value used in the preliminary determination (prefetch determination) in this modification is the value read from the random number storage area of the RWM, but is used in the preliminary determination (prefetch determination). The big hit random number value and the symbol random number value are not the values read from the random number storage area of the RWM, but the register values (in the case of this modification, the DE register value, the A register value, and the W register value).

Therefore, since the number of random numbers read from the random number storage area of the RWM is small, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation process and reduce the storage capacity of the data for the address calculation process.
In addition, the random number read from the random number storage area of the RWM (variable pattern random number in the case of the present modification) is closer to the beginning than the random number not read from the random number storage area of the RWM (the big hit random number and the pattern random number in the case of the present modification example). Since it is stored in the area, the address can be easily calculated.
In addition, the random number that uses the value of the register in the preliminary determination (in the case of this modification, the big hit random number, the pattern random number), immediately before performing the preliminary determination (special figure pending information determination process), the register (of this modification) In this case, it is stored in the DE register, A register, W register). Therefore, since it is easy to protect the state where random numbers (random numbers that use the value of the register in pre-determination) are set in the register, it is not necessary to program in consideration of the usage status of the register, etc. Efficiency is improved.

Further, in this modification, in the pre-determination, in the order of big hit random number → fluctuation pattern random number (fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, fluctuation pattern random number 3) → pattern random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) To be extracted. That is, the symbol random number is extracted after the jackpot random number is extracted, and a conditional branch instruction is executed between the jackpot random number extraction and the symbol random number extraction.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, in the present modification, there are a big hit random number extraction (step A10805), a big hit symbol random number extraction (step A10803), and a small hit symbol random number extraction (step A10804). In the meantime, effect command setting processing (step A2918) is executed. As shown in FIG. 59, the effect command setting process is a process including a conditional branch instruction.

Then, as described above, in the case of this modified example, both the jackpot random number and the pattern random number are so-called “high-speed counters” that are updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The symbol random number is updated at any time between the extraction of the big hit random number and the symbol random number.
Therefore, since the instruction whose number of states is not fixed is sandwiched between the extraction of the jackpot random number and the extraction of the symbol random number, the symbol random number can be further updated, and the symbol random number corresponding to the jackpot random number is fixed. You can avoid that. Therefore, since it is not possible to aim at a random number such as intentionally determining the symbol when the hit is won, it is possible to effectively prevent fraud.

  According to the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment described above, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is special. In the gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when the result is obtained, a plurality of types of random numbers are extracted based on the satisfaction of the start condition and a register (in the case of this modification, the jackpot random number is WA Registers and DE registers, fluctuation pattern random numbers are WA registers, big hit symbol random numbers are A registers, and small hit symbol random numbers are W registers), and the random numbers stored in the registers are stored in the storage means (game control device 100). Random number storage control means (game control device 100) to be stored in the area, and the random number extracted by the random number storage control means, the variable display game corresponding to the random number. (In this modified example, JP-view starting opening switch common processing) pre determination process for determining before being executed includes pre judgment means for performing a (game controller 100), the. Then, the plurality of types of random numbers include a jackpot random number for determining whether or not to derive the special result, and a jackpot symbol random number for determining the type of identification information when deriving the special result. The random number storage control means extracts the jackpot symbol random number after extracting the jackpot random number (see FIG. 166), and a conditional branch instruction (in the case of this modification, between the jackpot random number extraction and the jackpot symbol random number extraction). The effect command setting process (step A2918 in FIG. 166) is executed.

  Specifically, according to the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition. The game control means (game control device 100) is provided to perform game control for generating a special game state in which a player is given a game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Then, the game control means stores game control program storage means for storing a game control program, arithmetic processing means for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and update information storage for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Means and a register group composed of a plurality of registers, an address of a plurality of bytes is allocated to the update information storage means, the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address, and the register group Is composed of a plurality of register pairs each composed of two registers, and the arithmetic processing means corresponds a value stored in a predetermined register pair or a predetermined register to an address set in another register pair. Stored in one of the storage areas of the update information storage means, and then the address set in the other register pair is updated. The storage command is configured to be executable, and a plurality of types of random numbers are extracted based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and a predetermined register pair or a predetermined register (in this modification, the jackpot random number is a WA register and a DE register, a variation pattern). The random number is stored in the WA register, the big hit symbol random number is stored in the A register, and the small hit symbol random number is stored in the W register), and the random number stored in the register pair or register is stored (the line number 22050 and the line number 22070 in FIG. 168). (Random number 23030, line number 23050, line number 23070), the random number storage control means for storing in the random number storage area of the update information storage means, and the random number extracted by the random number storage control means are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the random number. Pre-judgment processing that judges before the game is executed (in the case of this modification, And a, and pre-determining means for processing). Then, the plurality of types of random numbers include a jackpot random number for determining whether or not to derive the special result, and a jackpot symbol random number for determining the type of identification information when deriving the special result. The random number storage control means extracts the jackpot symbol random number after extracting the jackpot random number (see FIG. 166), and a conditional branch instruction (in the case of this modification, between the jackpot random number extraction and the jackpot symbol random number extraction). The effect command setting process (step A2918 in FIG. 166) is executed.

  Therefore, by inserting an instruction whose number of states is not fixed between the extraction of the jackpot random number and the extraction of the jackpot symbol random number, it is possible to avoid that the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the jackpot random number is fixed. Therefore, since random numbers cannot be targeted, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal acts.

Further, in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, a plurality of types of random numbers include a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of the variation display game (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the case of this variation). Included, the random number storage control means (game control device 100) is configured to extract the random number for fluctuation pattern determination after extraction of the jackpot random number, and to extract the jackpot symbol random number after extraction of the fluctuation pattern determination random number. Is possible (see FIG. 166).
With such a configuration, the jackpot symbol random number can be updated more, and thus fraud can be more effectively prevented.

In addition, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the big hit random number and the big hit pattern random number are hardware random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, and a pre-determination process (in the case of the present modification, a special figure starting port switch common process). It is possible to be configured to be extracted from the random number generation circuit in.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud more effectively.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments and modifications.

  Furthermore, the register in the code of each embodiment can be replaced with another register, and for example, not only the addition address "IY + ...", but also "IX + ..." And "HL + ..." Can be used. When a plurality of registers are used in the code of each embodiment, the combination of the plurality of registers may be arbitrary or may be replaced with each other. For example, the code “LQD B, (DE +)” (stored in the DE register Stored in the B register and then updating the address value of the DE register) or code "AQND C, (WA +)" (value of the address value area stored in the WA register and C A code for updating the address value of the WA register after calculating the logical product of the register values) or the like can also be used.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game machine such as a pachi-slot machine other than a pachinko machine (for example, a game machine in which a character ratio and a winning rate can be defined).

  The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalents of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 100 Game Control Device (Storage Means, Random Number Storage Control Means, Predetermination Means, Game Control Means)

Claims (2)

A special game that executes a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area and gives a player a game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the gaming machine that generates the state,
Starting storage means capable of storing the execution right of the variable display game as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area,
Only when the starting memory is to be stored based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning area, a plurality of types of random numbers are extracted and stored in the arithmetic register, and the random number stored in the arithmetic register is stored. Random number storage control means for storing in a random number storage area of the storage means,
A prior determination means for performing a prior determination process of determining the random number extracted by the random number storage control means before the variable display game corresponding to the random number is executed,
The plurality of types of random numbers include jackpot random numbers for determining whether or not to derive the special result, and jackpot symbol random numbers for determining the type of identification information when deriving the special result, And
The big hit random number and the big hit symbol random number are hardware random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit,
The random number storage control means, after extracting the jackpot random number, extracts the jackpot symbol random number,
A conditional branch instruction is configured to be executed between the extraction of the jackpot random number and the extraction of the jackpot symbol random number, and the predetermined condition of the conditional branch instruction is satisfied and the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the total number of instructions to be executed is different between when the big hit random number is extracted and when when the big hit random number is not extracted . The plurality of types of random numbers further includes a variation pattern determination random number for determining a variation pattern of the variation display game,
The random number storage control means extracts the random number for fluctuation pattern determination after extraction of the jackpot random number, and extracts the jackpot symbol random number after extraction of the fluctuation pattern determination random number. The game machine described.